Nanotechnology Books

Book SynopsisThis reference/text addresses concepts and synthetic techniques for the preparation of polymers for state-of-the-art usein biomedicine, synthetic biology, and bionanotechnology.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 What makes Polymers so Interesting? 1 1.2 Macromolecular Engineering and Nanostructure Formation 4 1.3 Specific Needs in Bionanotechnology and Biomedicine 5 Reference 6 2 Terminology 7 2.1 Polymer Architectures 7 2.2 Multifunctionality 11 2.3 Bioconjugates 12 2.4 Biocompatibility 12 2.5 Biodegradation 14 2.6 Bioactivity 14 2.7 Multivalency 15 2.8 Bionanotechnology 17 References 18 3 Preparation Methods and Tools 19 3.1 General Aspects of Polymer Synthesis 19 3.1.1 Chain Growth Polymerizations 20 3.1.2 Step Growth Polymerizations 23 3.1.3 Modification of Polymers 25 3.2 Controlled Polymer Synthesis 25 3.2.1 Anionic Polymerization 26 3.2.2 Cationic Polymerization 30 3.2.3 Controlled Radical Polymerization 34 3.2.4 Metal‐Catalyzed Polymerization 37 3.2.5 Chain Growth Condensation Polymerization 41 3.3 Effective Polymer Analogous Reactions 43 3.4 Pegylation 47 3.5 Bioconjugation 51 3.5.1 Polynucleotide Conjugates 53 3.5.2 Protein Conjugates 55 3.5.3 Polysaccharide Conjugates 57 3.6 Enzymatic Polymer Synthesis 59 3.7 Solid Phase Synthesis and Biotechnological Approaches 63 3.7.1 Solid Phase Synthesis 63 3.7.2 Biotechnology Approaches in the Synthesis of Biopolymers 75 3.8 Hydrogels and Hydrogel Scaffolds 81 3.8.1 Hydrogels 81 3.8.2 Hydrogels as Scaffold Materials 84 3.9 Surface Modification and Film Preparation 92 3.9.1 Self‐Assembled Monolayers 93 3.9.2 Langmuir–Blodgett Films 95 3.9.3 Layer‐by‐Layer Deposition 96 3.9.4 Immobilization by Chemical Binding to Substrates 97 3.9.5 Low‐Pressure Plasma 99 3.9.6 Electron Beam Treatment 101 3.10 Microengineering of Polymers and Polymeric Surfaces 102 References 107 4 Analytical Methods 113 4.1 Molecular Structure and Molar Mass Determination of Polymers and Biohybrids 113 4.1.1 Structural Characterization 114 4.1.2 Determination of Molar Mass and Molar Mass Distribution 132 4.2 Characterization of Aggregates and Assemblies 137 4.2.1 Dynamic Light Scattering 138 4.2.2 Pulsed Field Gradient and Electrophoretic Nuclear Magnetic Resonance 139 4.2.3 Field‐Flow Fractionation 142 4.2.4 UV–Vis Spectroscopy and Fluorescence Spectroscopy 144 4.2.5 Electron Microscopy 145 4.3 Characterization of Hydrogel Networks 147 4.3.1 Network Structure of Hydrogels 148 4.3.2 Swelling Degree 148 4.3.3 Mechanical Properties 150 4.3.4 Deriving Microscopic Network Parameters from Macroscopic Hydrogel Properties 153 4.4 Surface Characterization 154 4.4.1 X‐Ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy 154 4.4.2 Contact Angle Measurements by Axisymmetric Drop Shape Analysis 157 4.4.3 Electrokinetic Measurements 158 4.4.4 Spectroscopic Ellipsometry 159 4.4.5 Quartz Crystal Microbalance with Dissipation Monitoring 160 4.4.6 Surface Plasmon Resonance 161 4.4.7 Scanning Force Techniques 162 4.4.8 Environmental Scanning Electron Microscopy 164 4.5 Biophysical Characterization and Biocompatibility 166 4.5.1 Biophysical Characterization 167 4.5.2 Biocompatibility 175 References 183 5 Multifunctional Polymer Architectures 187 5.1 Multifunctional (Block) Copolymers 187 5.1.1 Multifunctionality through Copolymerization 187 5.1.2 Multifunctionality by Polymer Analogous Reactions 189 5.1.3 Spatially Defined Multifunctionality by Phase Separation and Self‐Assembly of Segmented Copolymers 190 5.2 Dendritic Polymers 196 5.2.1 Synthesis of Dendrimers and Hyperbranched Polymers 198 5.2.2 Properties and Applications 200 5.3 Glycopolymers 203 5.3.1 Linear Glycopolymers 205 5.3.2 Globular Glycomacromolecules 207 5.4 Peptide‐Based Structures 212 5.4.1 Hierarchical Self‐Assembly of Peptide Molecules 214 5.4.2 General Design Concepts for Peptide‐Based Structural Materials 215 5.4.3 Noncanonical Amino Acids in Peptide/Protein Engineering 217 5.4.4 Peptide‐Based Materials Inspired by Naturally Occurring Structural Proteins 217 5.4.5 Polypeptide Materials Based on other Naturally Occurring or De Novo Designed Self‐Assembling Domains such as Coiled Coils 221 5.4.6 Self‐Assembly of Short Peptide Derivates and Peptide‐Based Amphiphilic Molecules 222 5.5 Biohybrid Hydrogels 224 5.5.1 Composition Basic Principles and Formation of Biohybrids 225 5.5.2 Polynucleotide Biohybrids 228 5.5.3 Polypeptide or Protein Biohybrids 231 5.5.4 Polysaccharide Biohybrids 232 References 235 6 Functional Materials and Applied Systems 241 6.1 Organic Nanoparticles and Aggregates for Drug and Gene Delivery 241 6.1.1 Polymeric Micelles Polymersomes and Nanocapsules 241 6.1.2 Polymeric Beads and Micro/Nanogels Based on Dendritic Structures 254 6.1.3 Polyplexes for Gene Delivery 263 6.2 Polymer Therapeutics and Targeting Approaches 264 6.2.1 Current Status of Polymer Therapeutics 264 6.2.2 Implications and Rationale for Effective Delivery Systems 266 6.2.3 Cellular Uptake and Targeting 267 6.3 Multi‐ and Polyvalent Polymeric Architectures 271 6.3.1 Polyvalent Interactions on Biological Interfaces 272 6.3.2 Prospects for Multivalent Drugs 277 6.4 Bioresponsive Networks 280 6.4.1 Active Principle 280 6.4.2 Homeostatic Regulation of Blood Coagulation 281 6.4.3 Insulin Release in Response to Glucose Concentration 282 6.4.4 Urate‐Responsive Release of Urate Oxidase 283 6.4.5 Cell‐Responsive Degradation of Hydrogel Networks 284 6.5 Biofunctional Surfaces 284 6.5.1 Concepts and Aims of Biofunctional Material Surfaces 284 6.5.2 Biofunctional Surfaces for the Prevention of Biofouling 287 6.5.3 Anticoagulant Coatings for Blood‐Contacting Devices 292 References 295 Abbreviations 303 Index 309

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first book written on this important topic, Metal Chalcogenide Semiconductor Nanostructures and Their Applications in Renewable Energy provides an in-depth examination of the properties and synthesis of a class of nanomaterials essential to renewable energy manufacturing.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Part 1: Renewable Energy Conversion Systems 1 1 Introduction: An Overview of Metal Chalcogenide Nanostructures for Renewable Energy Applications 3 Ahsanulhaq Qurashi 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Metal Chalcogenide Nanostructures 7 1.3 Growth of Metal Chalcogenide Nanostructures 8 1.4 Applications of Metal Chalcogenide Nanostructures 16 1.5 Summary and Future Perspective 18 References 18 2 Renewable Energy and Materials 23 Muhammad Asif 2.1 Global Energy Scenario 23 2.2 Role of Renewable Energy in Sustainable Energy Future 25 2.3 Importance of Materials Role in Renewable Energy 27 References 30 3 Sustainable Feed Stock and Energy Futures 33 H. Idriss 3.1 Introduction 33 3.2 Discussion 34 References 41 Part 2: Synthesis of Metal Chalcogenide Nanostructures 43 4 Metal-Selenide Nanostructures: Growth and Properties 45 Ramin Yousefi 4.1 Introduction 45 4.2 Growth and Properties of Different Groups of Metal-Selenide Nanostructures 48 4.3 Metal Selenides from III?VI Semiconductors 57 4.4 Metal Selenides from IV?VI Semiconductors 61 4.5 Metal Selenides from V?VI Semiconductors 66 4.6 Metal Selenides from Transition Metal (TM) 69 4.7 Ternary Metal-Selenide Compounds 75 4.8 Summary and Future Outlook 78 Acknowledgment 79 References 79 5 Growth Mechanism and Surface Functionalization of Metal Chalcogenides Nanostructures 83 Muhammad Nawaz Tahir, Jugal Kishore Sahoo, Faegheh Hoshyargar, and Wolfgang Tremel 5.1 Introduction 84 5.2 Synthetic Methods for Layered Metal Chalcogenides 89 5.3 Surface Functionalization of Layered Metal Dichalcogenide Nanostructures 102 5.4 Applications of Inorganic Nanotubes and Fullerenes 110 References 113 6 Optical and Structural Properties of Metal Chalcogenide Semiconductor Nanostructures 123 Ihsan-ul-Haq Toor and Shafique Khan 6.1 Optical Properties of Metal Chalcogenides Semiconductor Nanostructures 124 6.2 Structural Properties and Defects of Metal Chalcogenide Semiconductor Nanostructures 133 References 142 7 Structural and Optical Properties of CdS Nanostructures 147 Y. Al-Douri, Abdulwahab S. Z. Lahewil, U. Hashim, and N. M. Ahmed 7.1 Introduction 147 7.2 Nanomaterials 150 7.3 II-VI Semiconductors 152 7.4 Sol-Gel Process 155 7.5 Structural and Surface Characterization of Nanostructured CdS 156 7.6 Optical Properties 159 7.7 Conclusion 161 Acknowledgments 162 References 162 Part 3: Applications of Metal Chalcogenides Nanostructures 165 8 Metal Sulfide Photocatalysts for Hydrogen Generation by Water Splitting under Illumination of Solar Light 167 Dr. Zhonghai Zhang 8.1 Introduction 167 8.2 Photocatalytic Water Splitting on Single Metal Sulfide 169 8.3 Photocatalytic Water Splitting on Multi-metal Sulfide 173 8.4 Metal Sulfides Solid-Solution Photocatalysts 180 8.5 Summary and Future Outlook 184 References 184 9 Metal Chalcogenide Hierarchical Nanostructures for Energy Conversion Devices 189 Ramin Yousefi, Farid Jamali-Sheini, and Ali Khorsand Zak 9.1 Introduction 190 9.2 Main Characteristics of Cd-Chalcogenide Nanocrystals (CdE; E = S, Se, Te) 192 9.3 Different Methods to Grow Cd-Chalcogenide Nanocrystals 192 9.4 Solar Energy Conversion 212 9.5 Cd-Chalcogenide Nanocrystals as Solar Energy Conversion 219 9.6 Summary and Future Outlook 230 References 230 10 Metal Chalcogenide Quantum Dots for Hybrid Solar Cell Applications 233 Mir Waqas Alam and Ahsanulhaq Qurashi 10.1 Introduction 233 10.2 Chemical Synthesis of Quantum Dots 235 10.3 Quantum Dots Solar cell 238 10.4 Summary and Future Prospects 243 References 243 11 Solar Cell Application of Metal Chalcogenide Semiconductor Nanostructures 247 Hongjun Wu 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Chalcogenide-Based Thin-Film Solar Cells 248 11.3 CdTe-Based Solar Cells 249 11.4 Cu(In,Ga)(S,Se)2 (CIGS)-Based Solar Cells 251 11.5 Metal Chalcogenides-Based Quantum-Dots-Sensitized Solar Cells (QDSSCs) 253 11.6 Hybrid Metal Chalcogenides Nanostructure-Conductive Polymer Composite Solar Cells 257 11.7 Conclusions 261 References 262 12 Chalcogenide-Based Nanodevices for Renewable Energy 269 Y. Al-Douri 12.1 Introduction 269 12.2 Renewable Energy 272 12.3 Nanodevices 274 12.4 Density Functional Theory 277 12.5 Analytical Studies 278 12.6 Conclusion 284 Acknowledgments 285 References 285 13 Metal Tellurides Nanostructures for Thermoelectric Applications 289 Salman B. Inayat 13.1 Introduction 290 13.2 Thermoelectric Microdevice Fabricated by a MEMS-Like Electrochemical Process 290 13.3 Bi2Te3-Based Flexible Micro Thermoelectric Generator 292 13.4 High-Thermoelectric Performance of Nanostructured Bismuth Antimony Telluride Bulk Alloys 293 13.5 Nano-manufactured Thermoelectric Glass Windows for Energy Efficient Building Technologies 294 13.6 Conclusion 296 References 297

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith contributed papers from the 2011 Materials Science and Technology symposia, this is a useful one-stop resource for understanding the most important issues in advances in the synthesis, processing, and applications of nanostructures. Logically organized and carefully selected, the articles cover the themes of the symposia: Nanotechnology for Energy, Healthcare and Industry; Controlled Synthesis Processing and Applications of Structural and Functional Nanomaterials; and Synthesis, Properties, and Applications of Noble Metal Nanostructures. A must for academics in mechanical and chemical engineering, materials and or ceramics, and chemistry.Table of ContentsPreface vii CONTROLLED SYNTHESIS, PROCESSING AND APPLICATIONS OF STRUCTURAL AND FUNTIONAL NANOMATERIALS Effect of Annealing and Transition Metal Doping on Structural, Optical and Magnetic Properties of ZnO Nanomaterial 3 Navendu Goswami Chemical Vapor Deposition Growth of Graphene Encapsulated Palladium Nanoparticles 17 Junchi Wu and Nitin Chopra Well Adhered, Nanocrystalline, Photoactive, Ti02, Thin Films Dip-Coated On Corona-Treated Poly(Ethylene Terephthalate) by Modified Sol-Gel Processing at ~95°C and Drying at ~130°C 31 H.C. Pham, D.A.H. Hanaor, Ü.M. Cox, and C.C. Sorrell Large-Scale Synthesis of MoS2-Polymer Derived SiCN Composite Nanosheets 45 R. Bhandavat, L. David, U. Barrera, and G. Singh Synthesis of Ti02/Sn02 Bifunctional Nanocomposites 53 Huaming Yang and Chengli Huo Fabrication of Porous Mullite by Freeze Casting and Sintering of Alumina-Silica Nanoparticles 57 Wenle Li, Margaret Anderson, Kathy Lu, and John Y. Walz Low Temperature Sintering of a Gadolinium-Doped Ceria for Solid Oxide Fuel Cells 65 Pasquale F. Lavorato, and Leon L. Shaw NANOTECHNOLOGY FOR ENERGY, HEALTHCARE, AND INDUSTRY Current Status and Prospects of Nanotechnology in Arab States 79 Bassam Alfeeli, Ghada Al-Naqi, and Abeer Al-Qattan Finite Element Modeling for Mode Reduction in Bundled Sapphire Photonic Crystal Fibers 93 Neal T. Pfeiffenberger and Gary R. Pickrell p-Type Silicon Optical Fiber 103 Brian Scott, Ke Wang, Adam Floyd, and Gary Pickrell Synthesis and Characterization of Cobalt Aluminate and Fe203 Nanocomposite Electrode for Solar Driven Water Splitting to Produce Hydrogen 109 Sudhakar Shet, Kwang-Soon Ahn, Yanfa Yan, Heli Wang, Nuggehalli Ravindra, John Turner, and Mowafak Al-Jassim Influence of Substrate Temperature and RF Power on the Formation of ZnO Nanorods for Solar Driven Hydrogen Production 115 Sudhakar Shet, Heli Wang, Yanfa Yan, Nuggehalli Ravindra, John Turner, and Mowafak Al-Jassim Porous Material Fabrication using Ice Particles as a Pore Forming Agent 121 Samantha Smith and Gary Pickrell Random-Hole Optical Fiber Sensors and Their Sensing Applications 129 Ke Wang, Brian Scott, Neal Pfeiffenberger, and Gary Pickrell Wetting Properties of Silicon Incorporated DLC Films on Aluminum Substrate 135 Tae Gyu Kim, Van Cao Nguyen, Hye Sung Kim, Soon-Jik Hong, and Ri-ichi Murakami Nanoporous Ag Prepared by Electrochemical Dealloying of Melt-Spun Cu-Ag-Si Alloys 141 Guijing Li, FeiFei Lu, Linping Zhang, Zhanbo Sun, Xiaoping Song, Bingjun Ding, and Zhimao Yang Effect of Film Thickness on Electrical and Optical Properties of ZnO/Ag Dual Layer Film 149 Hiromi Yabe, Eri Akita, Pangpang Wang, Daisuke Yonekura, Ri-ichi Murakami, and Xiaoping Song Author Index 157

Read more less

Book SynopsisToday, nano- and microencapsulation are increasingly being utilized in the pharmaceutical, textile, agricultural and food industries. Microencapsulation is a process in which tiny particles or droplets of a food are surrounded by a coating to give small capsules.Trade Review“This book will help food companies to develop new nanotechnology for major problems such as the development of functional coatings to enhance the long-term suitability of food products.” (South African Food Science and Technology magazine, 1 February 2015)Table of ContentsList of Contributors xiii Preface xvii 1 Overview of Nano- and Microencapsulation for Foods 1 Hae-Soo Kwak 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Nano- or microencapsulation as a rich source of delivery of functional components 3 1.3 Wall materials used for encapsulation 3 1.4 Techniques used for the production of nano- or microencapsulation of foods 4 1.5 Characterization of nano- or microencapsulated functional particles 5 1.6 Fortification of foods through nano- or microcapsules 6 1.7 Nano- or microencapsulation technologies: industrial perspectives and applications in the food market 6 1.8 Overview of the book 8 Acknowledgments 12 References 12 Part I Concepts and rationales of nano- and microencapsulation for foods 15 2 Theories and Concepts of Nano Materials, Nano- and microencapsulation 17 Jingyuan Wen, Guanyu Chen, and Raid G. Alany 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 Materials used for nanoparticles, nano- and microencapsulation 19 2.2.1 Polymers 19 2.3 Nano- and microencapsulation techniques 20 2.3.1 Chemical methods 20 2.3.2 Physico-chemical methods 23 2.3.3 Other methods 25 2.3.4 Factors influencing optimization 28 2.4 Pharmaceutical and nutraceutical applications 30 2.4.1 Various delivery routes for nano- and microencapsulation systems 30 2.5 Food ingredients and nutraceutical applications 35 2.5.1 Background and definitions 35 2.5.2 Nanomaterials, nano- and microencapsulation in nutraceuticals 36 2.6 Conclusion 37 References 38 3 Rationales of Nano- and Microencapsulation for Food Ingredients 43 Sundaram Gunasekaran and Sanghoon Ko 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 Factors affecting the quality loss of food ingredients 45 3.2.1 Oxygen 45 3.2.2 Light 47 3.2.3 Temperature 48 3.2.4 Adverse interaction 49 3.2.5 Taste masking 50 3.3 Case studies of food ingredient protection through nano- and microencapsulation 50 3.3.1 Vitamins 51 3.3.2 Enzymes 52 3.3.3 Minerals 53 3.3.4 Phytochemicals 54 3.3.5 Lipids 55 3.3.6 Probiotics 55 3.3.7 Flavors 56 3.4 Conclusion 57 References 58 4 Methodologies Used for the Characterization of Nano- and Microcapsules 65 Minh-Hiep Nguyen, Nurul Fadhilah Kamalul Aripin, Xi G. Chen, and Hyun-Jin Park 4.1 Introduction 65 4.2 Methodologies used for the characterization of nano- and microcapsules 67 4.2.1 Particle size and particle size distribution 67 4.2.2 Zeta potential measurement 75 4.2.3 Morphology 77 4.2.4 Membrane flexibility 80 4.2.5 Stability 82 4.2.6 Encapsulation efficiency 83 4.3 Conclusion 88 Acknowledgements 88 References 88 5 Advanced Approaches of Nano- and Microencapsulation for Food Ingredients 95 Mi-Jung Choi and Hae-Soo Kwak 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Nanoencapsulation based on the microencapsulation technology 96 5.3 Classification of the encapsulation system 97 5.3.1 Nanoparticle or microparticle 97 5.3.2 Structural encapsulation systems 100 5.4 Preparation methods for the encapsulation system 106 5.4.1 Emulsification 106 5.4.2 Precipitation 107 5.4.3 Desolvation 108 5.4.4 Ionic gelation 109 5.5 Application of the encapsulation system in food ingredients 109 5.6 Conclusion 110 References 111 Part II Nano- and microencapsulations of food ingredients 117 6 Nano- and Microencapsulation of Phytochemicals 119 Sung Je Lee and Marie Wong 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 Classification of phytochemicals 120 6.2.1 Flavonoids 120 6.2.2 Carotenoids 124 6.2.3 Betalains 126 6.2.4 Phytosterols 127 6.2.5 Organosulfurs and glucosinolates 128 6.3 Stability and solubility of phytochemicals 129 6.4 Microencapsulation of phytochemicals 130 6.4.1 Spray-drying 131 6.4.2 Freeze-drying 135 6.4.3 Liposomes 136 6.4.4 Coacervation 138 6.4.5 Molecular inclusion complexes 141 6.5 Nanoencapsulation 146 6.5.1 Nanoemulsions 147 6.5.2 Nanoparticles 148 6.5.3 Solid lipid nanoparticles (SLN) 150 6.5.4 Nanoparticles through supercritical anti-solvent precipitation 152 6.6 Conclusion 153 References 153 7 Microencapsulation for Gastrointestinal Delivery of Probiotic Bacteria 167 Kasipathy Kailasapathy 7.1 Introduction 167 7.2 The gastrointestinal (GI) tract 169 7.2.1 Microbiota of the adult GI tract 169 7.2.2 Characteristics of the GI tract for probiotic delivery 170 7.3 Encapsulation technologies for probiotics 173 7.4 Techniques for probiotic encapsulation 175 7.4.1 Microencapsulation (ME) in gel particles using polymers 175 7.4.2 The extrusion technique 175 7.4.3 The emulsion technique 177 7.4.4 Spray-drying, spray-coating and spray-chilling technologies 179 7.4.5 Microencapsulation technologies for nutraceuticals incorporating probiotics 182 7.5 Controlled release of probiotic bacteria 182 7.6 Potential applications of encapsulated probiotics 183 7.6.1 Yoghurt 184 7.6.2 Cheese 185 7.6.3 Frozen desserts 186 7.6.4 Unfermented milks 186 7.6.5 Powdered formulations 187 7.6.6 Meat products 187 7.6.7 Plant-based (vegetarian) probiotic products 188 7.7 Future trends and marketing perspectives 189 References 191 8 Nano-Structured Minerals and Trace Elements for Food and Nutrition Applications 199 Florentine M. Hilty and Michael B. Zimmermann 8.1 Introduction 199 8.2 Special characteristics of nanoparticles 200 8.3 Nano-structured entities in natural foods 202 8.4 Nano-structured minerals in nutritional applications 202 8.4.1 Iron 202 8.4.2 Zinc 207 8.4.3 Calcium 209 8.4.4 Magnesium 210 8.4.5 Selenium 211 8.4.6 Copper 211 8.5 Uptake of nano-structured minerals 212 8.6 Conclusion 213 References 214 9 Nano- and Microencapsulation of Vitamins 223 Ashok R. Patel and Bhesh Bhandari 9.1 Introduction 223 9.2 Vitamins for food and nutraceutical applications 224 9.2.1 Vitamins: nutritional requirement and biological functions 224 9.2.2 Vitamins: formulation challenges and stability issues 224 9.3 Colloidal encapsulation (nano and micro) in foods: principles of use 227 9.3.1 Solid-in-liquid dispersions 229 9.3.2 Liquid-in-liquid dispersions 232 9.3.3 Dispersions of self-assembled colloids 234 9.3.4 Encapsulation in dry matrices 238 9.3.5 Molecular encapsulation of vitamins in cyclodextrins 239 9.4 Conclusion and future trends 240 References 241 10 Nano- and Microencapsulation of Flavor in Food Systems 249 Kyuya Nakagawa 10.1 Introduction 249 10.2 Flavor stabilization in food nano- and microstructures 250 10.2.1 Application of encapsulated flavors 250 10.2.2 Interactions between flavor compounds and carrier matrices 251 10.2.3 Flavor retention in colloidal systems 251 10.2.4 Flavor retention in food gel 252 10.2.5 Flavor inclusion in starch nanostructure 253 10.3 Flavor retention and release in an encapsulated system 254 10.3.1 Mass transfer at the liquid–gas interface 254 10.3.2 Mass transfer at a solid–gas interface 258 10.4 Nano- and microstructure processing 259 10.4.1 Spray-drying 260 10.4.2 Freeze-drying 262 10.4.3 Complex coacervation 264 10.5 Conclusion 266 Acknowledgements 267 References 267 11 Application of Nanomaterials, Nano- and Microencapsulation to Milk and Dairy Products 273 Hae-Soo Kwak, Mohammad Al Mijan, and Palanivel Ganesan 11.1 Introduction 273 11.2 Milk 274 11.2.1 Microencapsulation of functional ingredients 274 11.2.2 Microencapsulation of vitamins 278 11.2.3 Microencapsulation of iron 279 11.2.4 Microencapsulation of lactase 281 11.2.5 Nanofunctional ingredients 285 11.2.6 Nanocalcium 287 11.3 Yogurt 287 11.3.1 Microencapsulation of functional ingredients 287 11.3.2 Microencapsulation of iron 288 11.3.3 Nanofunctional ingredients 289 11.4 Cheese 291 11.4.1 Microencapsulation for accelerated cheese ripening 291 11.4.2 Microencapsulation of iron 292 11.4.3 Nanopowdered functional ingredients 292 11.5 Others 293 11.5.1 Microencapsulation of iron 293 11.6 Conclusion 293 References 294 12 Application of Nano- and Microencapsulated Materials to Food Packaging 301 Loong-Tak Lim 12.1 Introduction 301 12.2 Nanocomposite technologies 302 12.2.1 Layered silicate nanocomposites 302 12.2.2 Mineral oxide and organic nanocrystal composites 305 12.2.3 Material properties’ enhancement of biodegradable/compostable polymers 306 12.3 Intelligent and active packaging based on nano- and microencapsulation technologies 307 12.3.1 Product quality and shelf-life indicators 308 12.3.2 Nano- and microencapsulated antimicrobial composites 312 12.3.3 TiO2 ethylene scavenger for shelf-life extension of fruits and vegetables 317 12.4 Conclusion 318 References 319 Part III Bioactivity, toxicity, and regulation of nanomaterial, nano- and microencapsulated ingredients 325 13 Controlled Release of Food Ingredients 327 Sanghoon Ko and Sundaram Gunasekaran 13.1 Introduction 327 13.2 Fracturation 328 13.3 Diffusion 329 13.4 Dissolution 331 13.5 Biodegradation 333 13.6 External and internal triggering 334 13.6.1 Thermosensitive 335 13.6.2 Acoustic sensitive 336 13.6.3 Light-sensitive 337 13.6.4 pH-sensitive 338 13.6.5 Chemical-sensitive 339 13.6.6 Enzyme-sensitive 339 13.6.7 Other stimuli 340 13.7 Conclusion 340 References 340 14 Bioavailability and Bioactivity of Nanomaterial, Nano- and Microencapsulated Ingredients in Foods 345 Soo-Jin Choi 14.1 Introduction 345 14.2 Bioavailability of nano- and microencapsulated phytochemicals 347 14.3 Bioavailability of other nano- and microencapsulated nutraceuticals 352 14.4 Bioavailability of nano- and microencapsulated bioactive components 355 14.5 Conclusion 357 References 358 15 Potential Toxicity of Food Ingredients Loaded in Nano- and Microparticles 363 Guanyu Chen, Soon-Mi Shim, and Jingyuan Wen 15.1 Introduction 363 15.2 Factors influence the toxicity of nano- and microparticles 365 15.2.1 Size of the nano- and microparticles 366 15.2.2 Shape of the nano- and microparticles 367 15.2.3 Solubility of the nano- and microparticles 367 15.2.4 Chemical composition of the nano- and microparticles 367 15.3 Behavior and health risk of nano- and microparticles in the gastrointestinal (GI) tract 370 15.3.1 Absorption 370 15.3.2 Distribution 371 15.3.3 Excretion/elimination 371 15.4 Toxicity studies of nano- and microparticles 371 15.4.1 Oral exposure studies for toxicity 371 15.4.2 In vitro studies for toxicity 372 15.4.3 Lack of an analytical method model to evaluate the safety of micro- and nanoparticles 373 15.5 Risk assessment of micro- and nanomaterials in food applications 374 15.5.1 Risk assessment 375 15.6 Conclusion 377 References 377 16 Current Regulation of Nanomaterials Used as Food Ingredients 383 Hyun-Kyung Kim, Jong-Gu Lee, and Si-Young Lee 16.1 Introduction 383 16.2 The European Union (EU) 384 16.2.1 Definition 384 16.2.2 The EFSA Guidance 385 16.2.3 Regulation 386 16.3 The United Kingdom (UK) 388 16.4 France 389 16.5 The United States of America (USA) 389 16.6 Canada 391 16.7 Korea 392 16.8 Australia and New Zealand 393 References 393 Index 395

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Second Edition features new problems that engage readers in contemporary reactor design Highly praised by instructors, students, and chemical engineers, Introduction to Chemical Engineering Kinetics & Reactor Design has been extensively revised and updated in this Second Edition. The text continues to offer a solid background in chemical reaction kinetics as well as in material and energy balances, preparing readers with the foundation necessary for success in the design of chemical reactors. Moreover, it reflects not only the basic engineering science, but also the mathematical tools used by today's engineers to solve problems associated with the design of chemical reactors. Introduction to Chemical Engineering Kinetics & Reactor Design enables readers to progressively build their knowledge and skills by applying the laws of conservation of mass and energy to increasingly more difficult challenges in reactor design. The first oneTable of ContentsPreface ix Preface to the First Edition xi 1. Stoichiometric Coefficients and Reaction Progress Variables 1 1.0 Introduction 1 1.1 Basic Stoichiometric Concepts 2 Literature Citation 3 2. Thermodynamics of Chemical Reactions 4 2.0 Introduction 4 2.1 Chemical Potentials and Standard States 4 2.2 Energy Effects Associated with Chemical Reactions 5 2.3 Sources of Thermochemical Data 7 2.4 The Equilibrium Constant and its Relation to ΔG0 7 2.5 Effects of Temperature and Pressure Changes on the Equilibrium Constant 8 2.6 Determination of Equilibrium Compositions 9 2.7 Effects of Reaction Conditions on Equilibrium Yields 11 2.8 Heterogeneous Reactions 12 2.9 Equilibrium Treatment of Simultaneous Reactions 12 2.10 Supplementary Reading References 15 Literature Citations 15 Problems 15 3. Basic Concepts in Chemical Kinetics: Determination of the Reaction Rate Expression 22 3.0 Introduction 22 3.1 Mathematical Characterization of Simple Reaction Systems 25 3.2 Experimental Aspects of Kinetic Studies 29 3.3 Techniques for the Interpretation of Kinetic Data 34 Literature Citations 53 Problems 54 4. Basic Concepts in Chemical Kinetics: Molecular Interpretations of Kinetic Phenomena 72 4.0 Introduction 72 4.1 Reaction Mechanisms 73 4.2 Chain Reactions 83 4.3 Molecular Theories of Chemical Kinetics 93 Literature Citations 103 Problems 104 5. Chemical Systems Involving Multiple Reactions 117 5.0 Introduction 117 5.1 Reversible Reactions 117 5.2 Parallel or Competitive Reactions 125 5.3 Series or Consecutive Reactions: Irreversible Series Reactions 133 5.4 Complex Reactions 137 Literature Citations 142 Problems 142 6. Elements of Heterogeneous Catalysis 152 6.0 Introduction 152 6.1 Adsorption Phenomena 153 6.2 Adsorption Isotherms 156 6.3 Reaction Rate Expressions for Heterogeneous Catalytic Reactions 160 6.4 Physical Characterization of Heterogeneous Catalysts 170 6.5 Catalyst Preparation, Fabrication, and Activation 174 6.6 Poisoning and Deactivation of Catalysts 177 Literature Citations 178 Problems 179 7. Liquid Phase Reactions 189 7.0 Introduction 189 7.1 Electrostatic Effects in Liquid Solution 191 7.2 Pressure Effects on Reactions in Liquid Solution 192 7.3 Homogeneous Catalysis in Liquid Solution 193 7.4 Correlation Methods for Kinetic Data: Linear Free Energy Relations 202 Literature Citations 207 Problems 207 8. Basic Concepts in Reactor Design and Ideal Reactor Models 216 8.0 Introduction 216 8.1 Design Analysis for Batch Reactors 225 8.2 Design of Tubular Reactors 228 8.3 Continuous Flow Stirred-Tank Reactors 234 8.4 Reactor Networks Composed of Combinations of Ideal Continuous Flow Stirred-Tank Reactors and Plug Flow Reactors 254 8.5 Summary of Fundamental Design Relations: Comparison of Isothermal Stirred-Tank and Plug Flow Reactors 256 8.6 Semibatch or Semiflow Reactors 256 Literature Citations 259 Problems 259 9. Selectivity and Optimization Considerations in the Design of Isothermal Reactors 273 9.0 Introduction 273 9.1 Competitive (Parallel) Reactions 274 9.2 Consecutive (Series) Reactions: A →k1→ B →k2→ C →k3→ D 278 9.3 Competitive Consecutive Reactions 283 9.4 Reactor Design for Autocatalytic Reactions 290 Literature Citations 294 Problems 294 10. Temperature and Energy Effects in Chemical Reactors 305 10.0 Introduction 305 10.1 The Energy Balance as Applied to Chemical Reactors 305 10.2 The Ideal Well-Stirred Batch Reactor 307 10.3 The Ideal Continuous Flow Stirred-Tank Reactor 311 10.4 Temperature and Energy Considerations in Tubular Reactors 314 10.5 Autothermal Operation of Reactors 317 10.6 Stable Operating Conditions in Stirred Tank Reactors 320 10.7 Selection of Optimum Reactor Temperature Profiles: Thermodynamic and Selectivity Considerations 324 Literature Citations 327 Problems 328 11. Deviations from Ideal Flow Conditions 337 11.0 Introduction 337 11.1 Residence Time Distribution Functions, F(t) and dF(t) 337 11.2 Conversion Levels in Nonideal Flow Reactors 352 11.3 General Comments and Rules of Thumb 358 Literature Citations 359 Problems 359 12. Reactor Design for Heterogeneous Catalytic Reactions 371 12.0 Introduction 371 12.1 Commercially Significant Types of Heterogeneous Catalytic Reactors 371 12.2 Mass Transport Processes within Porous Catalysts 376 12.3 Diffusion and Reaction in Porous Catalysts 380 12.4 Mass Transfer Between the Bulk Fluid and External Surfaces of Solid Catalysts 406 12.5 Heat Transfer Between the Bulk Fluid and External Surfaces of Solid Catalysts 413 12.6 Global Reaction Rates 416 12.7 Design of Fixed Bed Reactors 418 12.8 Design of Fluidized Bed Catalytic Reactors 437 Literature Citations 439 Problems 441 13. Basic and Applied Aspects of Biochemical Transformations and Bioreactors 451 13.0 Introduction 451 13.1 Growth Cycles of Microorganisms: Batch Operation of Bioreactors 452 13.2 Principles and Special Considerations for Bioreactor Design 472 13.3 Commercial Scale Applications of Bioreactors in Chemical and Environmental Engineering 495 Literature Citations 516 Problems 517 Appendix A. Fugacity Coefficient Chart 527 Appendix B. Nomenclature 528 Appendix C. Supplementary References 535 Author Index 537 Subject Index 545

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides readers with a one-stop entry into the chemistry of varied hybrids and applications, from a molecular synthetic standpoint Describes introduction and effect of organic structures on specific support components (carbon-based materials, proteins, metals, and polymers). Chapters cover hot topics including nanodiamonds, nanocrystals, metal-organic frameworks, peptide bioconjugates, and chemoselective protein modification Describes analytical techniques, with pros and cons, to validate synthetic strategies Edited by internationally-recognized chemists from different backgrounds (synthetic polymer chemistry, inorganic surfaces and particles, and synthetic organic chemistry) to pull together diverse perspectives and approachesTable of ContentsPreface vii Contributors ix 1 COVALENT ORGANIC FUNCTIONALIZATION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF CARBON NANOTUBES 1 Cécilia Ménard-Moyon 2 FUNCTIONALIZED GRAPHENES 36 Iban Azcarate, David Lachkar, Emmanuel Lacôte, Jennifer Lesage de la Haye, and Anne-Laure Vallet 3 NANODIAMONDS: EMERGENCE OF FUNCTIONALIZED DIAMONDOIDS AND THEIR UNIQUE APPLICATIONS 69 Maria A. Gunawan, Paul Kahl, Didier Poinsot, Bruno Domenichini, Peter R. Schreiner, Andrey A. Fokin, and Jean-Cyrille Hierso 4 TITANIA-BASED HYBRID MATERIALS: FROM MOLECULAR PRECURSORS TO THE CONTROLLED DESIGN OF HIERARCHICAL HYBRID MATERIALS 114 Laurence Rozes, Loïc D’Arras, Chloé Hoffman, François Potier, Niki Halttunen, and Lionel Nicole 5 FUNCTIONALIZATION OF ZIRCONIUM OXIDE SURFACES 168 Marc Petit and Julien Monot 6 FUNCTIONAL METAL–ORGANIC FRAMEWORKS: SYNTHESIS AND REACTIVITY 200 Flavien L. Morel, Xiaoying Xu, Marco Ranocchiari, and Jeroen A. van Bokhoven 7 SURFACE CHEMISTRY OF COLLOIDAL SEMICONDUCTOR NANOCRYSTALS: ORGANIC, INORGANIC, AND HYBRID 233 Richard Brutchey, Zeger Hens, and Maksym V. Kovalenko 8 COVALENT ORGANIC FUNCTIONALIZATION OF NUCLEIC ACIDS 272 Michel Arthur and Mélanie Etheve-Quelquejeu 9 CHEMOSELECTIVE PROTEIN MODIFICATIONS: METHODS AND APPLICATIONS FOR THE FUNCTIONALIZATION OF VIRAL CAPSIDS 299 Divya Agrawal and Christian P. R. Hackenberger 10 CYCLODEXTRINS–METAL HYBRIDS 349 Maxime Guitet, Mickaël Ménand, and Matthieu Sollogoub 11 POST-FUNCTIONALIZATION OF POLYMERS VIA ORTHOGONAL LIGATION CHEMISTRY 395 Anja S. Goldmann, M. Glassner, Andrew J. Inglis, and Christopher Barner-Kowollik 12 POLYMER–PROTEIN/PEPTIDE BIOCONJUGATES 466 Paul Wilson, Julien Nicolas, and David M. Haddleton 13 HYBRID MATERIALS BUILT FROM (PHOSPHORUS) DENDRIMERS 503 Anne-Marie Caminade, Beatrice Delavaux-Nicot, and Jean-Pierre Majoral Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers all aspects of the different classes of nanomaterials from synthesis to application. It investigates in detail the use and feasibility of developing nanocomposites with these nanomaterials as reinforcements. The book encompasses synthesis and properties of cellulose nanofibers, bacterial nanocellulose, carbon nanotubes / nanofibers, graphene, nanodiamonds, nanoclays, inorganic nanomaterials and their nanocomposites for high-end applications such as electronic devices, energy storage, structural and packaging. The book also provides insight into various modification techniques for improving the functionality of nanomaterials apart from their compatibility with the base matrix.Table of ContentsPart I: Nanomaterials 1 Cellulose Nanofibers: Synthesis, Properties and Applications 3 Mahuya Das and Rupa Bhattacharyya 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Synthesis of Cellulose Nanofibers 4 1.3 Properties of Cellulose Nanofibers 14 1.4 Applications of Nanocellulose Fibers 28 1.5 Conclusion 32 References 33 2 Bacterial Nanocellulose: Synthesis, Properties and Applications 39 M.L. Foresti, P. Cerrutti and A. Vazquez 2.1 Introduction 39 2.2 Bacterial Nanocellulose Synthesis 41 2.3 Bacterial Nanocellulose Properties 49 2.4 Bacterial Nanocellulose Applications 52 2.5 Conclusions 57 References 58 3 Carbon Nanofibers: Synthesis, Properties and Applications 63 Tanmoy Rath 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 Carbon Nanofiber Structure and Defects 65 3.3 Synthesis 67 3.4 Growth Mechanism of CNFs 773.5 Properties 78 3.6 Applications 82 3.7 Conclusion 84 References 85 4 Carbon Nanotubes: Synthesis, Properties and Applications 89 Raghunandan Sharma Poonam Benjwal and Kamal K. Kar 4.1 Introduction 89 4.2 Carbon Nanostructures 91 4.3 Structure: Chirality 97 4.4 Synthesis 99 4.5 Characterizations 103 4.6 Properties 108 4.7 Applications 112 4.8 Conclusions 131 Acknowledgement 132 References 1325 Graphene: Synthesis, Properties and Application 139 Subash Chandra Sahu, Aneeya K. Samantara, Jagdeep Mohanta, Bikash Kumar Jena and Satyabrata Si 5.1 Introduction 140 5.2 History of Graphene 142 5.3 Natural Occurrence 143 5.4 Carbon Allotropes 144 5.5 Molecular Structure and Chemistry of Graphene 147 5.6 Properties of Graphene 147 5.7 Synthesis of Graphene 153 5.8 Biomedical Application of Graphene 155 5.9 Graphene in Energy 166 5.10 Graphene in Electronics 174 5.11 Graphene in Catalysis 177 5.12 Graphene Composites 177 5.13 Conclusion and Perspective 179 Acknowledgement 180 References 181 6 Nanoclays: Synthesis, Properties and Applications 195 Biswabandita Kar and Dibyaranjan Rout 6.1 Introduction 195 6.2 Structure and Properties of Nanoclays 196Contents ix 6.3 Synthesis of Polymer-Clay Nanocomposites 203 6.4 Applications of Nanoclays 206 6.5 Conclusion 211 References 212 7 Applications for Nanocellulose in Polyolefins-Based Composites 215 Alcides Lopes Leao, Bibin Mathew Cherian, Suresh Narine, Mohini Sain, Sivoney Souza and Sabu Thomas 7.1 Introduction 215 7.2 Flexural Strength 224 References 227 8 Recent Progress in Nanocomposites Based on Carbon Nanomaterials and Electronically Conducting Polymers 229 Jayesh Cherusseri and Kamal K. Kar 8.1 Introduction 230 8.2 Electronically Conducting Polymers 230 8.3 Carbon Nanomaterials 233 8.4 Why Nanocomposites? 235 8.5 Electronically Conducting Polymer/Fullerene Nanocomposites 236 8.6 Electronically Conducting Polymer/Carbon Nanofiber Nanocomposites 240 8.7 Electronically Conducting Polymer/Carbon Nanotube Nanocomposites 243 8.8 Electronically Conducting Polymer/Graphene Nanocomposites 246 8.9 Applications 249 8.10 Conclusions 252 Acknowledgement 253 References 253 Part II: Nanocomposites Based on Inorganic Nanoparticles 9 Nanocomposites Based on Inorganic Nanoparticles 259 M. Balasubramanian, and P. Jawahar 9.1 Introduction 260 9.2 Processing of Clay-Polymer Nanocomposites (CPN) 273 9.3 Particulate-Polymer Nanocomposites Processing 283 9.4 Characterization of Polymer Nanocomposites 292 9.5 Properties of Polymer Nanocomposites 301 9.6 Application of Nanocomposites 336 References 342xii Contents 10 Polymer Nanocomposites Reinforced with Functionalized Carbon Nanomaterials: Nanodiamonds, Carbon Nanotubes and Graphene 347 F. Navarro-Pardo, A.L. Martínez-Hernández and C. Velasco-Santos 10.1 Introduction 348 10.2 Synthesis of Carbon Nanomaterials 349 10.3 Functionalization 351 10.4 Methods of Nanocomposite Preparation 358 10.5 Properties 360 10.6 Concluding Remarks 386 References 386 Part III: Green Nanocomposites 11 Green Nanocomposites from Renewable Resource-Based Biodegradable Polymers and Environmentally Friendly Blends 403 P. J. Jandas, S. Mohanty and S. K. Nayak 11.1 Introduction 404 11.2 Organically Modified Layered Silicates Reinforced Biodegradable Nanocomposites: New Era of Polymer Composites 407 11.3 Environmentally Friendly Polymer Blends from Renewable Resources 425 11.4 Applications and Prototype Development 436 11.5 Future Perspectives 436 11.6 Conclusion 437 References 438 Part IV: Applications of Polymer Nanocomposites 12 Nanocomposites for Device Applications 445 Sreevalsa VG 12.1 Introduction 446 12.2 Nonvolatile Memory Devices 447 12.3 Fabrication of Nonvolatile Memory Devices Utilizing Graphene Materials Embedded in a Polymer Matrix 451 12.4 Electric-Field-Induced Resistive Switching 452 12.5 Nanocomposite Solar Cells 455 12.6 Thin-Film Capacitors for Computer Chips 457 12.7 Solid Polymer Electrolyes for Batteries 457 12.8 Automotive Engine Parts and Fuel Tanks 458 12.9 Oxygen and Gas Barriers 459 12.10 Printing Technologies 459 12.11 Capacitors 461 12.12 Inductors 461 12.13 Optical Waveguides 462 12.14 Low-K and Low-Loss Composites 463 12.15 ZnO-Based Nanocomposites 463xiv Contents 12.16 Functional Polymer Nanocomposites 464 12.17 Plasmonics 464 12.18 Polymer Nanocomposites 465 12.19 Magnetically Active Nanocomposites 475 12.20 Nanocomposites of Nature 479 References 479 13 Polymer Nanocomposites for Energy Storage Applications 483 Sutapa Ghosh and Naresh Chilaka 13.1 Introduction 483 13.2 Energy Storage Mechanism in Supercapacitor and Batteries 485 13.3 Synthesis of Conducting Polymers 488 13.4 Characterization of Nanocomposites: Structure, Electrical, Chemical Composition and Surface Area 491 13.5 Conducting Polymer Nanocomposites for Energy Storage Application 494 13.6 Future of Graphene and Conducting Polymer Nancomposites 499 13.7 Conclusions and Future Research Initiatives 500 References 501 14 Polymer Nanocomposites for Structural Applications 505 M. Mollo and C. Bernal 14.1 Introduction 506 14.2 Nanocomposite Fibers 510 14.3 Nano-Enhanced Conventional Composites 512 14.4 Nano-Enhanced All-Polymer Composites 513 14.5 Single Polymer Nanocomposites 514 14.6 Summary, Conclusions and Future Trends 515Contents xv References 517 15 Nanocomposites in Food Packaging 519 Mahuya Das 15.1 Introduction 519 15.2 Nanoreinforcements in Food Packaging Materials 523 15.3 Polymer Matrix for Nanocomposite 538 15.4 Recent Trends in Packaging Developed by Application of Nanocomposites 541 15.5 Application of Nanocomposites as Nanosensor for Smart/Intelligent Packaging 551 15.6 Conclusion 556 References 557 Index 573

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book describes a broad area of nanomedicine which involves mainly applications, diseases, and diagnostics. The comprehensive coverage provides researchers, academics, and health specialists with a great tool, that includes techniques applicable to various uses.Table of ContentsPreface xv Part 1: Nanomedicine 1 1 High-technology Therapy Using Biomolecules or Synthetic Compounds for HIV Inhibition 3 Elvis Fosso-Kankeu, Pascaline Fontehand Ajay K.Mishra 1.1 Gene Therapy Including RNAHigh-Technology Against HIV 4 1.2 Metals and HIV Therapy 16 1.3 Conclusions 26 References 27 2 Emerging Nanomedicine Approaches for Osteochondral Tissue Regeneration 39 Author Lineis Missing 2.1 Introduction 39 2.2 Emerging NanomedicineApproaches 42 References 54 3 Synthesis of Poly(Methacrylate) Encapsulated Magnetite Nanoparticles via Phosphonic Acid Anchoring Chemistry and Its Applications Toward Biomedicine 63 B. Kothandapaniand Ajay K. Mishra 3.1 Introduction 64 3.2 Synthesis of Magnetite Nanoparticles 73 3.3 Application in Biomedical Fields 82 3.4 Conclusions 84 References 85 4 Potentiometric PVC Membrane Sensors and Their Analytical Applications in Pharmaceuticals and Environmental Samples at Micro- and Nano-level 87 Gamal Abel-Hafiz Mostafa 4.1 Introduction 87 4.2 Ion Selective Electrode 88 4.3 Glass Membrane Electrode 89 4.4 Characteristics of ISE 90 4.5 Preparation of PVC Membrane 94 4.6 Method of Preparation of the Liquid Membrane ISEs 96 4.7 Application of Ion Selective Electrodes in Pharmaceutical and Environmental Analysis Using 97 4.8 Conclusion 123 References 127 5 Bioceramics: Silica-based Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Materials for Medical Applications 135 Sadanand Pandey and Shivani B. Mishra 5.1 Introduction 136 5.2 Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Materials 141 5.3 Tissue Engineering 146 5.4 Other Organic-Inorganic Bioceramics for Medical Applications 150 5.5 Conclusion 156 5.6 Considerations and Future Directions 157 Acknowledgement 157 References 158 6 Recent Advances of Multifunctional Nanomedicines 163 Pradeep Pratap Singh and Ambika 6.1 Introduction 163 6.2 Nanomaterials of Biomedical Interest 164 6.3 Target-specificPharmacotherapy: Need for Nanocarrier Delivery Systems 165 6.4 Engineering of Pharmaceutical Nanosystems 166 6.5 Applications of Pharmaceutical Nanotools 180 6.6 Nanotoxicity 181 6.7 Future prospects 182 6.8 Conclusion 183 References 184 7 Nanomedicinal Approaches for Diabetes Management 189 Prashant Kumar Raiand Ajay Kumar Mishra 7.1 Introduction: The Motivation behind the Chapter 189 7.2 Type of Diabetes 191 7.3 Treatments for Diabetes 192 7.4 Why the Interest in Nanomedicine Research? 193 7.5 The Vision of Nanotechnology and its Clinical Applications for Diabetes 194 7.6 Summary 195 Acknowledgements 195 References 195 8 Polymeric Nanofibersin Regenerative Medicine 197 Narayan Chandra Mishra and Sharmistha Mitra (Majumder) 8.1 Introduction 197 8.2 Preparation of Nanofibers 199 8.3 RecentAdvances onApplication of Polymeric Nanofibersin Regenerative Medicine 201 8.4 Conclusions 222 References 222 Part 2: Drug Delivery and Therapeutics 227 9 Multifunctional Nano/Micro Polymer Capsules as Potential 229 Haider Sami, J. Jaishree, Ashok Kumar and Sri Sivakumar 9.1 Introduction 230 9.2 Synthesis of Polymer Capsules 232 9.3 Properties of Multilayered Polymer Capsules 237 9.4 Loading of Therapeutics 239 9.5 Stimuli-responsive Polymer Capsules 242 9.6 Multifunctional Hybrid Capsules 255 9.7 Targeted Polymer Capsules 267 9.8 BiomedicalApplications 268 9.9 Outlook and Future Prospects 274 References 274 10 Nanophosphors-Nanogold Immunoconjugates in Isolation of Biomembranes and in Drug Delivery 285 Dwijendra Gupta, Dhruv Kumar, Manish Dwivedi, Vijay Tripathi, Pratibha Phadke-Gupta and Surya Pratap Singh 10.1 Introduction 286 10.2 Nanoparticle Technology 287 10.3 The Versatility of Nanoparticles in Biological Sciences 288 10.4 Materials and Methods 293 10.5 Nanotags for Bio-labeling and Targeting: Nanophosphors or Quantum Dots 297 10.6 AFM Study of CdS and BSATagged ZnS-Mn Nanoparticles 302 10.7 Nano-Conjugates in Drug Delivery 304 10.8 Nanoparticle-mediated Drug Delivery and Nanotherapeutics 305 10.9 The Limitations of QDs 306 10.10 Summary 307 Acknowledgements 308 References 309 11 Cyclodextrin-based Nanoengineered Drug Delivery System 313 Jaya Lakkakula and Rui Werner Maçedo Krause 11.1 Introduction 314 11.2 Inclusion Complex Formation 316 11.3 Phase Solubility Relationships 318 11.4 Effect of Cyclodextrin on Drug Formulation 321 11.5 Cyclodextrin-based Drug Delivery 324 11.6 Cyclodextrins in Novel Drug Delivery Systems (DDS) 331 11.7 Conclusion 335 Acknowledgements 335 References 338 12 Medicinal Patches and Drug Nanoencapsulation 343 María H. Lissarrague, Hernan Garate, Melisa E. Lamanna, Norma B. D’Accorso and Silvia N.Goyanes 12.1 Introduction 343 12.2 Overview of Passive Skin Permeation (Passive Patches) 344 12.3 Recent Development on Skin Permeation 357 12.4 Drug Encapsulation 361 12.5 Triggered Release 369 12.6 Conclusions 374 References 374 13 Dendrimers: AClass of Polymer in the Nanotechnology for the Drug Delivery 379 Sunil K.Singh and Vivek K. Sharma 13.1 Introduction 379 13.2 Historical Origin of Dendrimers 380 13.3 Structure of Dendrimers 381 13.4 Terms Used in Dendrimer Chemistry 383 13.5 Types of Dendrimers 385 13.6 Application of Dendrimers 392 13.7 Dendrimers in Oral Drug Delivery 394 13.8 Dendrimers in Transdermal Drug Delivery 396 13.9 Dendrimers in Ocular Drug Delivery 398 13.10 Dendrimers inAnticancer Drug Delivery 399 13.11 Dendrimers in Cancer Diagnosis and Treatment 401 13.12 Conclusion 411 References 411 14 Designing Nanocarriers for Drug Delivery 417 Munishwar N. Gupta and Joyeeta Mukherjee 14.1 Introduction 417 14.2 Sizes, Shapes andAdvantages of Nanomaterials 418 14.3 Bioconjugation Strategies 421 14.4 Carbon Nanotubes 429 14.5 Drug Targeting 434 14.6 Future Perspectives 436 Acknowledgements 437 References 437 15 Multifunctional Polymeric Micelles for Drug Delivery and Therapeutics 443 Alicia Sawdon and Ching-An Peng 15.1 Introduction 443 15.2 Composition, Formation and Characterization of Polymeric Micelles 444 15.3 Polymeric Micelles for Cancer Chemotherapy 450 15.4 Targeting Schemes 457 15.5 Polymeric Micelles for Diagnostics and Imaging 465 15.6 Conclusions 467 References 467 16 Nanoparticles-based Carriers for Gene Therapy and Drug Delivery 477 Marketa Ryvolova, Jana Drbohlavova, Kristyna Smerkova, Jana Chomoucka, Pavlina Sobrova,Vojtech Adam, PavelKopel, Jaromir Hubalek and Rene Kizek 16.1 Introduction 478 16.2 Targeted Delivery 478 16.3 Conclusion 494 References 494

Read more less

Book SynopsisEmerging Nanoelectronic Devices focuses on the future direction of semiconductor and emerging nanoscale device technology.Table of ContentsPreface xix List of Contributors xxi Acronyms xxiii PART ONE INTRODUCTION 1 1 The Nanoelectronics Roadmap 3 James Hutchby 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Technology Scaling: Impact and Issues 4 1.3 Technology Scaling: Scaling Limits of Charge-based Devices 4 1.4 The International Technology Roadmap for Semiconductors 6 1.5 ITRS Emerging Research Devices International Technology Working Group 7 1.6 Guiding Performance Criteria 8 1.7 Selection of Nanodevices as Technology Entries 13 1.8 Perspectives 13 References 14 2 What Constitutes a Nanoswitch? A Perspective 15 Supriyo Datta, Vinh Quang Diep, and Behtash Behin-Aein 2.1 The Search for a Better Switch 15 2.2 Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Switch: Why it Shows Gain 17 2.3 Switch Based on Magnetic Tunnel Junctions: Would it Show Gain? 20 2.4 Giant Spin Hall Effect: A Route to Gain 23 2.5 Other Possibilities for Switches with Gain 27 2.6 What do Alternative Switches Have to Offer? 29 2.7 Perspective 32 2.8 Summary 32 Acknowledgments 32 References 33 PART TWO NANOELECTRONIC MEMORIES 35 3 Memory Technologies: Status and Perspectives 37 Victor V. Zhirnov and Matthew J. Marinella 3.1 Introduction: Baseline Memory Technologies 37 3.2 Essential Physics of Charge-based Memory 38 3.3 Dynamic Random Access Memory 39 3.4 Flash Memory 43 3.5 Static Random Access Memory 49 3.6 Summary and Perspective 52 Appendix: Memory Array Interconnects 52 Acknowledgments 54 References 54 4 Spin Transfer Torque Random Access Memory 56 Jian-Ping Wang, Mahdi Jamali, Angeline Klemm, and Hao Meng 4.1 Chapter Overview 56 4.2 Spin Transfer Torque 57 4.3 STT-RAM Operation 60 4.4 STT-RAM with Perpendicular Anisotropy 63 4.5 Stack and Material Engineering for Jc Reduction 66 4.6 Ultra-Fast Switching of MTJs 71 4.7 Spin–Orbit Torques for Memory Application 72 4.8 Current Demonstrations for STT-RAM 73 4.9 Summary and Perspectives 73 References 74 5 Phase Change Memory 78 Rakesh Jeyasingh, Ethan C. Ahn, S. Burc Eryilmaz, Scott Fong, and H.-S. Philip Wong 5.1 Introduction 78 5.2 Device Operation 79 5.3 Material Properties 80 5.4 Device and Material Scaling to the Nanometer Size 88 5.5 Multi-Bit Operation and 3D Integration 93 5.6 Applications 97 5.7 Future Outlook 100 5.8 Summary 103 Acknowledgments 103 References 103 6 Ferroelectric FET Memory 110 Ken Takeuchi and An Chen 6.1 Introduction 110 6.2 Ferroelectric FET for Flash Memory Application 111 6.3 Ferroelectric FET for SRAM Application 115 6.4 System Consideration: SSD System with Fe-NAND Flash Memory 118 6.5 Perspectives and Summary 119 References 120 7 Nano-Electro-Mechanical (NEM) Memory Devices 123 Adrian M. Ionescu 7.1 Introduction and Rationale for a Memory Based on NEM Switch 123 7.2 NEM Relay and Capacitor Memories 126 7.3 NEM-FET Memory 130 7.4 Carbon-based NEM Memories 132 7.5 Opportunities and Challenges for NEM Memories 133 References 135 8 Redox-based Resistive Memory 137 Stephan Menzel, Eike Linn, and Rainer Waser 8.1 Introduction 137 8.2 Physical Fundamentals of Redox Memories 139 8.3 Electrochemical Metallization Memory Cells 144 8.4 Valence Change Memory Cells 149 8.5 Performance 154 8.6 Summary 158 References 158 9 Electronic Effect Resistive Switching Memories 162 An Chen 9.1 Introduction 162 9.2 Charge Injection and Trapping 164 9.3 Mott Transition 167 9.4 Ferroelectric Resistive Switching 170 9.5 Perspectives 173 9.6 Summary 176 References 176 10 Macromolecular Memory 181 Benjamin F. Bory and Stefan C.J. Meskers 10.1 Chapter Overview 181 10.2 Macromolecules 181 10.3 Elementary Physical Chemistry of Macromolecular Memory 184 10.4 Classes of Macromolecular Memory Materials and Their Performance 187 10.5 Perspectives 190 10.6 Summary 190 Acknowledgments 190 References 191 11 Molecular Transistors 194 Mark A. Reed, Hyunwook Song, and Takhee Lee 11.1 Introduction 194 11.2 Experimental Approaches 194 11.3 Molecular Transistors 213 11.4 Molecular Design 218 11.5 Perspectives 222 Acknowledgments 223 References 223 12 Memory Select Devices 227 An Chen 12.1 Introduction 227 12.2 Crossbar Array and Memory Select Devices 227 12.3 Memory Select Device Options 230 12.4 Challenges of Memory Select Devices 241 12.5 Summary 242 References 242 13 Emerging Memory Devices: Assessment and Benchmarking 246 Matthew J. Marinella and Victor V. Zhirnov 13.1 Introduction 246 13.2 Common Emerging Memory Terminology and Metrics 248 13.3 Redox RAM 249 13.4 Emerging Ferroelectric Memories 254 13.5 Mott Memory 258 13.6 Macromolecular Memory 259 13.7 Carbon-based Resistive Switching Memory 260 13.8 Molecular Memory 262 13.9 Assessment and Benchmarking 263 13.10 Summary and Conclusions 271 Acknowledgments 271 References 271 PART THREE NANOELECTRONIC LOGIC AND INFORMATION PROCESSING 277 14 Re-Invention of FET 279 Toshiro Hiramoto 14.1 Introduction 279 14.2 Historical and Future Trend of MOSFETs 279 14.3 Near-term Solutions 282 14.4 Long-term Solutions 285 14.5 Summary 295 References 296 15 Graphene Electronics 298 Frank Schwierz 15.1 Introduction 298 15.2 Properties of Graphene 300 15.3 Graphene MOSFETs for Mainstream Logic and RF Applications 303 15.4 Graphene MOSFETs for Nonmainstream Applications 308 15.5 Graphene NonMOSFET Transistors 309 15.6 Perspectives 310 Acknowledgment 311 References 311 16 Carbon Nanotube Electronics 315 Aaron D. Franklin 16.1 Carbon Nanotubes – The Ideal Transistor Channel 315 16.2 Operation of the CNTFET 319 16.3 Important Aspects of CNTFETs 320 16.4 Scaling CNTFETs to the Sub-10 Nanometer Regime 324 16.5 Material Considerations 327 16.6 Perspective 329 16.7 Conclusion 331 References 331 17 Spintronics 336 Alexander Khitun 17.1 Introduction 336 17.2 Spin Transistors 337 17.3 Magnetic Logic Circuits 348 17.4 Summary 364 References 365 18 NEMS Switch Technology 370 Louis Hutin and Tsu-Jae King Liu 18.1 Electromechanical Switches for Digital Logic 370 18.2 Actuation Mechanisms 373 18.3 Electrostatic Switch Designs 379 18.4 Reliability and Scalability 383 References 386 19 Atomic Switch 390 Tsuyoshi Hasegawa and Masakazu Aono 19.1 Chapter Overview 390 19.2 Historical Background of the Atomic Switch 390 19.3 Fundamentals of Atomic Switches 391 19.4 Various Atomic Switches 395 19.5 Perspectives 401 References 402 20 ITRS Assessment and Benchmarking of Emerging Logic Devices 405 Shamik Das 20.1 Introduction 405 20.2 Overview of the ITRS Roadmap for Emerging Research Logic Devices 406 20.3 Recent Results for Selected Emerging Devices 407 20.4 Perspective 412 20.5 Summary 413 Acknowledgments 413 References 413 PART FOUR CONCEPTS FOR EMERGING ARCHITECTURES 417 21 Nanomagnet Logic: A Magnetic Implementation of Quantum-dot Cellular Automata 419 Michael T. Niemier, György Csaba, and Wolfgang Porod 21.1 Introduction 419 21.2 Technology Background 420 21.3 NML Circuit Design Based on Conventional, Boolean Logic Gates 423 21.4 Alternative Circuit Design Techniques and Architectures 432 21.5 Retrospective, Future Challenges, and Future Research Directions 437 References 439 22 Explorations in Morphic Architectures 443 Tetsuya Asai and Ferdinand Peper 22.1 Introduction 443 22.2 Neuromorphic Architectures 443 22.3 Cellular Automata Architectures 447 22.4 Taxonomy of Computational Ability of Architectures 450 22.5 Summary 452 References 452 23 Design Considerations for a Computational Architecture of Human Cognition 456 Narayan Srinivasa 23.1 Introduction 456 23.2 Features of Biological Computation 457 23.3 Evolution of Behavior as a Basis for Cognitive Architecture Design 460 23.4 Considerations for a Cognitive Architecture 460 23.5 Emergent Cognition 463 23.6 Perspectives 463 References 464 24 Alternative Architectures for NonBoolean Information Processing Systems 467 Yan Fang, Steven P. Levitan, Donald M. Chiarulli, and Denver H. Dash 24.1 Introduction 467 24.2 Hierarchical Associative Memory Models 475 24.3 N-Tree Model 484 24.4 Summary and Conclusion 494 Acknowledgments 496 References 496 25 Storage Class Memory 498 Geoffrey W. Burr and Paul Franzon 25.1 Introduction 498 25.2 Traditional Storage: HDD and Flash Solid-state Drives 499 25.3 What is Storage Class Memory? 499 25.4 Target Specifications for SCM 501 25.5 Device Candidates for SCM 502 25.6 Architectural Issues in SCM 504 25.7 Conclusions 508 References 509 PART FIVE SUMMARY, CONCLUSIONS, AND OUTLOOK FOR NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES 511 26 Outlook for Nanoelectronic Devices 513 An Chen, James Hutchby, Victor V. Zhirnov, and George Bourianoff 26.1 Introduction 513 26.2 Quantitative Logic Benchmarking for Beyond CMOS Technologies 514 26.3 Survey-based Critical Assessment of Emerging Devices 518 26.4 Retrospective Assessment of ERD Tracked Technologies 526 References 528 Index 529

Read more less

Book SynopsisThere has been concerted effort across scientific disciplines to develop artificial materials and systems that can help researchers understand natural stimuli-responsive activities. With its up-to-date coverage on intelligent stimuli-responsive materials, Intelligent Stimuli-Responsive Materials provides research, industry, and academia professionals with the fundamentals and principles of intelligent stimuli-responsive materials, with a focus on methods and applications. Emphasizing nanostructures and applications for a broad range of fields, each chapter comprehensively covers a different stimuli-responsive material and discusses its developments, advances, challenges, analytical techniques, and applications.Trade Review“From this book it becomes clear that the potential of stimuli-responsive materials is enormous. It is a superb guide to the subject, and I enthusiastically recommend reading it.” (Angew. Chem. Int. Ed, 1 October 2014)Table of ContentsPreface vii Contributors ix 1 Nature-Inspired Stimuli-Responsive Self-Folding Materials 1 Leonid Ionov 2 Stimuli-Responsive Nanostructures from Self-Assembly of Rigid–Flexible Block Molecules 17 Yongju Kim, Taehoon Kim, and Myongsoo Lee 3 Stimuli-Directed Alignment Control of Semiconducting Discotic Liquid Crystalline Nanostructures 55 Hari Krishna Bisoyi and Quan Li 4 Anion-Driven Supramolecular Self-Assembled Materials 115 Hiromitsu Maeda 5 Photoresponsive Cholesteric Liquid Crystals 141 Yannian Li and Quan Li 6 Electric- and Light-Responsive Bent-Core Liquid Crystals: From Molecular Architecture and Supramolecular Nanostructures to Applications 189 Yongqiang Zhang 7 Photomechanical Liquid Crystalline Polymers:Motion in Response to Light 233 Haifeng Yu and Quan Li 8 Responsive Nanoporous Silica Colloidal Films and Membranes 265 Amir Khabibullin and Ilya Zharov 9 Stimuli-Responsive Smart Organic Hybrid Metal Nanoparticles 293 Chenming Xue and Quan Li 10 Biologically Stimuli-Responsive Hydrogels 335 Akifumi Kawamura and Takashi Miyata 11 Biomimetic Self-Oscillating Polymer Gels 363 Ryo Yoshida 12 Stimuli-Responsive Surfaces in Biomedical Applications 377 Alice Pranzetti, Jon A. Preece, and Paula M. Mendes 13 Stimuli-Responsive Conjugated Polymers: From Electronic Noses to Artificial Muscles 423 Astha Malhotra, Matthew McInnis, Jordan Anderson, and Lei Zhai Index 471

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe continued advancement in the sciences of functional foods and nutraceuticals has clearly established a strong correlation between consumption of bioactives and improved human health and performance. However, the efficacy and bioavailability of these bioactive ingredients (e.g.Table of ContentsContributors ix 1 Introduction 1Cristina M. Sabliov, Hongda Chen and Rickey Yada 2 Nutrient absorption in the human gastrointestinal tract 3Emily S. Mohn and Elizabeth J. Johnson 3 Cellular fate of delivery systems and entrapped bioactives 35Cristina M. Sabliov, Dorel Moldovan, Brian Novak, Toni Borel, and Meocha Whaley 4 Interfacial science and the creation of nanoparticles 52Stephanie R. Dungan 5 Controlling properties of micro] to nanosized dispersions using emulsification devices 69Zheng Wang, Marcos A. Neves, Isao Kobayashi, and Mitsutoshi Nakajima 6 Delivery systems for food applications: an overview of preparation methods and encapsulation, release, and dispersion properties 91Qixin Zhong, Huaiqiong Chen, Yue Zhang, Kang Pan, and Wan Wang 7 Characterization of nanoscale delivery systems 112Rohan V. Tikekar 8 Impact of delivery systems on the chemical stability of bioactive lipids 130Ketinun Kittipongpittaya, Lorena Salcedo, David Julian McClements, and Eric Andrew Decker 9 Encapsulation strategies to stabilize a natural folate, L-5-methyltetrahydrofolic acid, for food fortification practices 142David D. Kitts and Yazheng Liu 10 The application of nanoencapsulation to enhance the bioavailability and distribution of polyphenols 158Alison Kamil, C]Y. Oliver Chen, and Jeffrey B. Blumberg 11 Properties and applications of multilayer and nanoscale emulsions 175Moumita Ray, Renuka Gupta, and Dérick Rousseau 12 Liposome as efficient system for intracellular delivery of bioactive molecules 191Mihaela Trif and Oana Craciunescu 13 Solid lipid nanoparticles and applications 214Maria Fernanda San Martin]Gonzalez 14 Protein–polysaccharide complexes for effective delivery of bioactive functional food ingredients 224Yunqi Li and Qingrong Huang 15 Bicontinuous delivery systems 247Graciela Padua 16 Self]assembly of amylose, protein, and lipid as a nanoparticle carrier of hydrophobic small molecules 263Genyi Zhang, Deepak Bhopatkar, Bruce R. Hamaker, and Osvaldo H. Campanella 17 Polymeric nanoparticles for food applications 272Cristina M. Sabliov and Carlos E. Astete 18 Encapsulation of bioactive compounds using electrospinning and electrospraying technologies 297Loong]Tak Lim 19 Risks and ethics in the context of food nanotechnology and the delivery of bioactive ingredients 318Paul B. Thompson 20 Consumer perceptions of nanomaterials in functional foods 331William K. Hallman and Mary L. Nucci 21 Safety assessment of nano] and microscale delivery vehicles for bioactive ingredients 348Qasim Chaudhry and Laurence Castle 22 Evidence]based regulation of food nanotechnologies: a perspective from the European Union and United States 358Diana Bowman, Qasim Chaudhry and Anna Gergely Index 375

Read more less

Book SynopsisNanoparticles are the building blocks for nanotechnology; they are better built, long lasting, cleaner, safer, and smarter products for use across industries, including communications, medicine, transportation, agriculture and other industries. Controlled size, shape, composition, crystallinity, and structure-dependent properties govern the unique properties of nanotechnology. Bio-Nanoparticles: Biosynthesis and Sustainable Biotechnological Implications explores both the basics of and advancements in nanoparticle biosynthesis. The text introduces the reader to a variety of microorganisms able to synthesize nanoparticles, provides an overview of the methodologies applied to biosynthesize nanoparticles for medical and commercial use, and gives an overview of regulations governing their use. Authored by leaders in the field, Bio-Nanoparticles: Biosynthesis and Sustainable Biotechnological Implications bridges the gap between biology and technology, and is an iTable of ContentsList of Contributors xv Introduction xvii 1 Diversity of Microbes in Synthesis of Metal Nanoparticles: Progress and Limitations 1Mahendra Rai, Irena Maliszewska, Avinash Ingle, Indarchand Gupta, and Alka Yadav 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Synthesis of Nanoparticles by Bacteria 2 1.3 Synthesis of Nanoparticles by Fungi 9 1.4 Synthesis of Nanoparticles by Algae 12 1.5 Applications of Metal Nanoparticles 16 1.5.1 Nanoparticles as Catalyst 16 1.5.2 Nanoparticles as Bio]membranes 17 1.5.3 Nanoparticles in Cancer Treatment 17 1.5.4 Nanoparticles in Drug Delivery 17 1.5.5 Nanoparticles for Detection and Destruction of Pesticides 17 1.5.6 Nanoparticles in Water Treatment 18 1.6 Limitations of Synthesis of Biogenic Nanoparticles 18 References 20 2 Role of Fungi Toward Synthesis of Nano]Oxides 31Rajesh Ramanathan and Vipul Bansal 2.1 Introduction 31 2.2 Fungus]mediated Synthesis of Nanomaterials 34 2.2.1 Biosynthesis of Binary Nano]oxides using Chemical Precursors 34 2.2.2 Biosynthesis of Complex Mixed]metal Nano]oxides using Chemical Precursors 39 2.2.3 Biosynthesis of Nano]oxides using Natural Precursors employing Bioleaching Approach 42 2.2.4 Biosynthesis of nano]oxides employing bio]milling approach 44 2.3 Outlook 46 References 47 3 Microbial Molecular Mechanisms in Biosynthesis of Nanoparticles 53Atmakuru Ramesh, Marimuthu Thiripura Sundari, and Perumal Elumalai Thirugnanam 3.1 Introduction 53 3.2 Chemical Synthesis of Metal Nanoparticles 54 3.2.1 Brust–Schiffrin Synthesis 55 3.3 Green Synthesis 57 3.4 Biosynthesis of Nanoparticles 58 3.5 Mechanisms for Formation or Synthesis of Nanoparticles 61 3.5.1 Biomineralization using Magnetotactic Bacteria (MTB) 61 3.5.2 Reduction of Tellurite using Phototroph Rhodobacter capsulatus 62 3.5.3 Formation of AgNPs using Lactic Acid and Bacteria 62 3.5.4 Microfluidic Cellular Bioreactor for the Generation of Nanoparticles 62 3.5.5 Proteins and Peptides in the Synthesis of Nanoparticles 65 3.5.6 NADH]dependent Reduction by Enzymes 65 3.5.7 Sulfate and Sulfite Reductase 66 3.5.8 Cyanobacteria 67 3.5.9 Cysteine Desulfhydrase in Rhodopseudomonas palustris 68 3.5.10 Nitrate and Nitrite reductase 68 3.6 E xtracellular Synthesis of Nanoparticles 69 3.6.1 Bacterial Excretions 69 3.6.2 Fungal Strains 71 3.6.3 Yeast: Oxido]reductase Mechanism 72 3.6.4 Plant Extracts 73 3.7 Conclusion 76 References 78 4 Biofilms in Bio]Nanotechnology: Opportunities and Challenges 83Chun Kiat Ng, Anee Mohanty, and Bin Cao 4.1 Introduction 83 4.2 Microbial Synthesis of Nanomaterials 84 4.2.1 Overview 84 4.2.2 Significance of Biofilms in Biosynthesis of Nanomaterials 89 4.2.3 Synthesis of Nanomaterials using Biofilms 90 4.3 Interaction of Microbial Biofilms with Nanomaterials 90 4.3.1 Nanomaterials as Anti]biofilm Agents 90 4.3.2 Nanomaterials as a Tool in Biofilm Studies 92 4.4 Future Perspectives 93 References 94 5 Extremophiles and Biosynthesis of Nanoparticles: Current and Future Perspectives 101Jingyi Zhang, Jetka Wanner, and Om V. Singh 5.1 Introduction 101 5.2 Synthesis of Nanoparticles 104 5.2.1 Microorganisms: An Asset in Nanoparticle Biosynthesis 104 5.2.2 E xtremophiles in Nanoparticle Biosynthesis 104 5.3 Mechanism of Nanoparticle Biosynthesis 108 5.4 Fermentative Production of Nanoparticles 111 5.5 Nanoparticle Recovery 114 5.6 Challenges and Future Perspectives 115 5.7 Conclusion 115 References 116 6 Biosynthesis of Size-Controlled Metal and Metal Oxide Nanoparticles by Bacteria 123Chung-Hao Kuo, David A. Kriz, Anton Gudz, and Steven L. Suib 6.1 Introduction 123 6.2 Intracellular Synthesis of Metal Nanoparticles by Bacteria 124 6.3 E xtracellular Synthesis of Metal Nanoparticles by Bacteria 129 6.4 Synthesis of Metal Oxide and Sulfide Nanoparticles by Bacteria 131 6.5 Conclusion 135 References 135 7 Methods of Nanoparticle Biosynthesis for Medical and Commercial Applications 141Shilpi Mishra, Saurabh Dixit, and Shivani Soni 7.1 Introduction 141 7.2 Biosynthesis of Nanoparticles using Bacteria 144 7.2.1 Synthesis of Silver Nanoparticles by Bacteria 144 7.2.2 Synthesis of Gold Nanoparticles by Bacteria 145 7.2.3 Synthesis of other Metallic Nanoparticles by Bacteria 145 7.3 Biosynthesis of Nanoparticles using Actinomycete 146 7.4 Biosynthesis of Nanoparticles using Fungi 147 7.5 Biosynthesis of Nanoparticles using Plants 148 7.6 Conclusions 149 References 149 8 Microbial Synthesis of Nanoparticles: An Overview 155Sneha Singh, Ambarish Sharan Vidyarthi, and Abhimanyu Dev 8.1 Introduction 156 8.2 Nanoparticles Synthesis Inspired by Microorganisms 157 8.2.1 Bacteria in NPs Synthesis 162 8.2.2 Fungi in NPs Synthesis 167 8.2.3 Actinomycetes in NPs Synthesis 170 8.2.4 Yeast in NPs Synthesis 171 8.2.5 Virus in NPs Synthesis 173 8.3 Mechanisms of Nanoparticles Synthesis 174 8.4 Purification and Characterization of Nanoparticles 176 8.5 Conclusion 177 References 179 9 Microbial Diversity of Nanoparticle Biosynthesis 187Raveendran Sindhu, Ashok Pandey, and Parameswaran Binod 9.1 Introduction 187 9.2 Microbial-mediated Nanoparticles 187 9.2.1 Gold 188 9.2.2 Silver 190 9.2.3 Selenium 191 9.2.4 Silica 192 9.2.5 Cadmium 192 9.2.6 Palladium 193 9.2.7 Zinc 193 9.2.8 Lead 194 9.2.9 Iron 195 9.2.10 Copper 195 9.2.11 Cerium 196 9.2.12 Microbial Quantum Dots 196 9.2.13 Cadmium Telluride 197 9.2.14 Iron Sulfide-greigite 198 9.3 Native and Engineered Microbes for Nanoparticle Synthesis 198 9.4 Commercial Aspects of Microbial Nanoparticle Synthesis 199 9.5 Conclusion 200 References 200 10 S ustainable Synthesis of Palladium(0) Nanocatalysts and their Potential for Organohalogen Compounds Detoxification 205Michael Bunge and Katrin Mackenzie 10.1 Introduction 205 10.2 Chemically Generated Palladium Nanocatalysts for Hydrodechlorination: Current Methods and Materials 206 10.2.1 Pd Catalysts 206 10.2.2 Data Analysis 207 10.2.3 Pd as Dehalogenation Catalyst 207 10.2.4 Intrinsic Potential vs. Performance 208 10.2.5 Concepts for Pd Protection 210 10.3 Bio-supported Synthesis of Palladium Nanocatalysts 211 10.3.1 Background 211 10.4 Current Approaches for Synthesis of Palladium Catalysts in the Presence of Microorganisms 212 10.4.1 Pd(II)-Tolerant Microorganisms for Future Biotechnological Approaches 213 10.4.2 Controlling Size and Morphology during Bio-Synthesis 214 10.4.3 Putative and Documented Mechanisms of Biosynthesis of Palladium Nanoparticles 215 10.4.4 Isolation of Nanocatalysts from the Cell Matrix and Stabilization 216 10.5 Bio-Palladium(0)-nanocatalyst Mediated Transformation of Organohalogen Pollutants 217 10.6 Conclusions 218 References 219 11 E nvironmental Processing of Zn Containing Wastes and Generation of Nanosized Value-Added Products 225Abhilash and B.D. Pandey 11.1 Introduction 225 11.1.1 World Status of Zinc Production 226 11.1.2 E nvironmental Impact of the Process Wastes Generated 226 11.1.3 Production Status in India 227 11.1.4 Recent Attempts at Processing Low-Grade Ores and Tailings 228 11.2 Physical/Chemical/Hydrothermal Processing 229 11.2.1 E xtraction of Pb-Zn from Tailings for Utilization and Production in China 229 11.2.2 Vegetation Program on Pb-Zn Tailings 229 11.2.3 Recovering Valuable Metals from Tailings and Residues 229 11.2.4 E xtraction of Vanadium, Lead and Zinc from Mining Dump in Zambia 230 11.2.5 Recovery of Zinc from Blast Furnace and other Dust/Secondary Resources 230 11.2.6 Treatment and Recycling of Goethite Waste 231 11.2.7 Other Hydrometallurgical Treatments of Zinc-based Industrial Wastes and Residues 231 11.3 Biohydrometallurgical Processing: International Scenario 233 11.3.1 Bioleaching of Zn from Copper Mining Residues by Aspergillus niger 233 11.3.2 Bioleaching of Zinc from Steel Plant Waste using Acidithiobacillus ferrooxidans 234 11.3.3 Bacterial Leaching of Zinc from Chat (Chert) Pile Rock and Copper from Tailings Pond Sediment 234 11.3.4 Dissolution of Zn from Zinc Mine Tailings 234 11.3.5 Microbial Diversity in Zinc Mines 234 11.3.6 Chromosomal Resistance Mechanisms of A. ferrooxidans on Zinc 235 11.3.7 Bioleaching of Zinc Sulfides by Acidithiobacillus ferrooxidans 235 11.3.8 Bioleaching of High-sphalerite Material 235 11.3.9 Bioleaching of Low-grade ZnS Concentrate and Complex Sulfides (Pb-Zn) using Thermophilic Species 236 11.3.10 Improvement of Stains for Bio-processing of Sphalerite 236 11.3.11 Tank Bioleaching of ZnS and Zn Polymetallic Concentrates 237 11.3.12 Large-Scale Development for Zinc Concentrate Bioleaching 237 11.3.13 Scale-up Studies for Bioleaching of Low-Grade Sphalerite Ore 238 11.3.14 Zinc Resistance Mechanism in Bacteria 238 11.4 Biohydrometallurgical Processing: Indian Scenario 238 11.4.1 E lectro-Bioleaching of Sphalerite Flotation Concentrate 239 11.4.2 Bioleaching of Zinc Sulfide Concentrate 239 11.4.3 Bioleaching of Moore Cake and Sphalarite Tailings 239 11.5 Synthesis of Nanoparticles 240 11.6 Applications of Zinc-based Value-added Products/Nanomaterials 244 11.6.1 Hydro-Gel for Bio-applications 244 11.6.2 Sensors 244 11.6.3 Biomedical Applications 245 11.6.4 Antibacterial Properties 245 11.6.5 Zeolites in biomedical applications 246 11.6.6 Textiles 246 11.6.7 Prospects of Zinc Recovery from Tailings and Biosynthesis of Zinc-based Nano-materials 246 11.7 Conclusions and Future Directions 247 References 248 12 Interaction Between Nanoparticles and Plants: Increasing Evidence of Phytotoxicity 255Rajeshwari Sinha and S.K. Khare 12.1 Introduction 255 12.2 Plant–Nanoparticle Interactions 256 12.3 E ffect of Nanoparticles on Plants 256 12.3.1 Monocot Plants 257 12.3.2 Dicot Plants 257 12.4 Mechanisms of Nanoparticle]induced Phytotoxicity 257 12.4.1 Endocytosis 257 12.4.2 Transfer through Ion Channels Post]ionization 262 12.4.3 Aquaporin Mediated 262 12.4.4 Carrier Proteins Mediated 262 12.4.5 Via Organic Matter 262 12.4.6 Complex Formation with Root Exudates 262 12.4.7 Foliar Uptake 263 12.5 E ffect on Physiological Parameters 263 12.5.1 Loss of Hydraulic Conductivity 263 12.5.2 Genotoxic Effects 263 12.5.3 Absorption and Accumulation 263 12.5.4 Generation of Reactive Oxygen Species (ROS) 264 12.5.5 Biotransformation of NPs 264 12.6 Genectic and Molecular Basis of NP Phytotoxicity 266 12.7 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 266 References 267 13 Cytotoxicology of Nanocomposites 273Horacio Bach 13.1 Introduction 273 13.2 Cellular Toxicity 274 13.2.1 Mechanisms of Cellular Toxicity 274 13.2.2 E ffect of Glutathione (GSH) in Oxidative Stress 276 13.2.3 Damage to Cellular Biomolecules 277 13.3 Nanoparticle Fabrication 281 13.3.1 Physico]chemical Characteristics of NPs 282 13.3.2 Cellular Uptake 284 13.3.3 Factors Affecting the Internalization of NPs 287 13.4 Immunological Response 289 13.4.1 Cytokine Production 289 13.4.2 Cytotoxicity, Necrosis, Apoptosis, and Cell Death 290 13.5 Factors to Consider to Reduce the Cytotoxic Effects of NP 292 13.6 Conclusions and Future Directions 293 References 294 14 Nanotechnology: Overview of Regulations and Implementations 303Om V. Singh and Thomas Colonna 14.1 Introduction 303 14.2 Scope of Nanotechnology 305 14.3 Safety Concerns Related to Nanotechnology 310 14.4 Barriers to the Desired Regulatory Framework 311 14.4.1 Regulatory Framework in the United States 312 14.4.2 Global Efforts toward Regulation of Nanotechnology 315 14.5 Biosynthesis of Microbial Bio]nanoparticles: An Alternative Production Method 317 14.6 Conclusion 325 References 326 Name index 331 Subject index 333

Read more less

Book SynopsisFocusing on the cutting-edge technologies available in the field of photovoltaics, Solar Cell Nanotechnology explores the latest research and development activities related to organic, inorganic, and hybrid materials being used in solar cell manufacturing.Table of ContentsPreface xvii Part 1 Current Developments 1 1 Design Considerations for Efficient and Stable Polymer Solar Cells 3 Prajwal Adhikary, Jing Li, and Qiquan Qiao 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Role of Interfacial Layer for Efficient BHJ Solar Cells 11 1.3 Selection of Interfacial Layer for Stable and Longer Lifetime 20 1.4 Materials Used as Interfacial Layer 26 1.5 Conclusion and Outlook 34 Acknowledgement 34 References 35 2 Carbazole-Based Organic Dyes for Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells: Role of Carbazole as Donor, Auxiliary Donor and π-linker 41 A. Venkateswararao and K. R. Justin Thomas 2.1 Introduction 42 2.2 Carbazole as a Donor for Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells 44 2.3 Carbazole as a π-Linker 64 2.4 Carbazole as Auxiliary Donor for DSSC 75 2.5 Carbazole as Donor as Well as Linker for DSSC 87 2.6 Conclusion and Outlook 91 Acknowledgements 92 References 92 3 Colloidal Synthesis of CuInS2 and CuInSe2 Nanocrystals for Photovoltaic Applications 97 Joanna Kolny-Olesiak 3.1 Introduction 97 3.2 Synthesis of CuInS2 and CuInSe2 Nanocrystals 99 3.3 Application of Colloidal CuInS2 and CuInSe2 Nanoparticles in Solar Energy Conversion 109 3.4 Conclusion and Outlook 112 References 112 4 Two Dimensional Layered Semiconductors: Emerging Materials for Solar Photovoltaics 117 Mariyappan Shanmugam and Bin Yu 4.1 Introduction 118 4.2 Material Synthesis 119 4.3 Photovoltaic Device Fabrication 122 4.4 Microstructural and Raman Spectroscopic Studies of MoS2 and WS2 124 4.5 Photovoltaic Performance Evaluation 126 4.6 Electronic Transport and Interfacial Recombination 129 4.7 Conclusion and Outlook 132 References 133 5 Control of ZnO Nanorods for Polymer Solar Cells 135 Hsin-Yi Chen, Ching-Fuh Lin 5.1 Introduction 136 5.2 Preparation and Characterization of ZnO NRs 137 5.3 Application of ZnO NR in Polymer Solar Cells 147 5.4 Conclusion and Outlook 154 References 154 Part 2 Noble Approaches 159 6 Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells 161 Lakshmi V. Munukutla, Aung Htun, Sailaja Radhakrishanan, Laura Main, and Arunachala M. Kannan 6.1 Introduction 161 6.2 Background 163 6.3 DSSC Key Performance Parameters 173 6.4 Device Improvements 174 6.5 DSSC Performance with Different Electrolytes 180 6.6 Conclusion and Outlook 183 References 183 7 Nanoimprint Lithography for Photovoltaic Applications 185 Benjamin Schumm and Stefan Kaskel 7.1 Introduction 186 7.2 Soft Lithography 186 7.3 NIL-Based Techniques for PV 190 7.4 Conclusion and Outlook 198 References 199 8 Indoor Photovoltaics: Efficiencies, Measurements and Design 203 Monika Freunek (Müller) 8.1 Introduction 203 8.2 Indoor Radiation 205 8.3 Maximum Efficiencies 208 8.4 Optimization Strategies 213 8.5 Characterization and Measured Efficiencies 216 8.6 Irradiance Measurements 217 8.7 Characterization 217 8.8 Conclusion and Outlook 219 References 221 9 Photon Management in Rare Earth Doped Nanomaterials for Solar Cells 223 Jiajia Zhou, Jianrong Qiu 9.1 Introduction 223 9.2 Basic Aspects of Solar Cell 224 9.4 Down-Conversion Nanomaterials for Solar Cell Application 232 9.5 Conclusion and Outlook 236 References 238 Part 3 Developments in Prospective 241 10 Advances in Plasmonic Light Trapping in Thin-Film Solar Photovoltaic Devices 243 J. Gwamuri, D. Ö. Güney, and J. M. Pearce 10.1 Introduction 244 10.2 Theoretical Approaches to Plasmonic Light Trapping Mechanisms in Thin-fi lm PV 247 10.3 Plasmonics for Improved Photovoltaic Cells Optical Properties 256 10.4 Fabrication Techniques and Economics 260 10.5 Conclusion and Outlook 263 Acknowledgements 266 References 266 11 Recent Research and Development of Luminescent Solar Concentrators 271 Yun Seng Lim, Shin Yiing Kee, and Chin Kim Lo 11.1 Introduction 272 11.2 Mechanisms of Power Losses in Luminescent Solar Concentrator 274 11.3 Modeling 276 11.4 Polymer Materials 279 11.5 Luminescent Materials for Luminescent Solar Concentrator 280 11.6 New Designs of Luminescent Solar Concentrator 286 11.7 Conclusion and Outlook 287 References 289 12 Luminescent Solar Concentrators – State of the Art and Future Perspectives 293 M. Tonezzer, D. Gutierrez, and D. Vincenzi 12.1 Introduction to the Third Generation of Photovoltaic Systems 294 12.2 Luminescence Solar Concentrators (LSCs) 294 12.3 Components of LSC Devices 299 12.4 Pathways for Improving LSC Efficiency 308 12.5 Conclusion and Outlook 311 Acknowledgments 312 References 312 13 Organic Fluorophores for Luminescent Solar Concentrators 317 Luca Beverina and Alessandro Sanguineti 13.1 Introduction 318 13.2 LSCs: Device Operation and Main Features 321 13.3 Luminophores in LSCs 324 13.4 Conclusion and Outlook 349 References 351 14 PAn-Graphene-Nanoribbon Composite Materials for Organic Photovoltaics: A DFT Study of Their Electronic and Charge Transport Properties 357 Javed Mazher, Asefa A. Desta, and Shabina Khan 14.1 Introduction 358 14.2 Review of Computational Background 379 14.3 Atomistic Computational Simulations: Modeling and Methodology 385 14.4 Results and Discussions 389 14.5 Conclusion and Outlook 398 References 400 15 Analytical Modeling of Thin-Film Solar Cells – Fundamentals and Applications 409 Kurt Taretto 15.1 Introduction 409 15.2 Basics 410 15.3 Fundamental Semiconductor Equations 417 15.4 Analytical Models for Selected Solar Cells 425 15.5 The Importance of the Temperature Dependence of VOC 442 15.6 Conclusions and Outlook 444 Acknowledgements 444 References 444 16 Efficient Organic Photovoltaic Cells: Current Global Scenario 447 Sandeep Rai and Atul Tiwari 16.1 Introduction 448 16.2 Current Developments in OPVs 455 16.3 Economics of Solar Energy 464 16.4 Conclusions and Future Trends in Photovoltaic 468 References 471 17 Real and Reactive Power Control of Voltage Source Converter-Based Photovoltaic Generating Systems 475 S. Mishra and P. C. Sekhar 17.1 Introduction 476 17.2 State of Art 478 17.3 Proposed Solution 479 17.4 Modeling of the PV Generator 480 17.5 Control of the PV Generator 483 17.6 Validation of the Proposed Control Architecture 491 17.7 Conclusion and Outlook 501 References 502 Index 505

Read more less

Book SynopsisNanomaterial Characterization Providing various properties of nanomaterials and the various methods available for their characterization Over the course of the last few decades, research activity on nanomaterials has gained considerable press coverage. The use of nanomaterials has meant that consumer products can be made lighter, stronger, esthetically more pleasing, and less expensive. The significant role of nanomaterials in improving the quality of life is clear, resulting in faster computers, cleaner energy production, target-driven pharmaceuticals, and better construction materials. It is not surprising, therefore, that nanomaterial research has really taken off, spanning across different scientific disciplines from material science to nanotoxicology. A critical part of any nanomaterial research, however, is the need to characterize physicochemical properties of the nanomaterials, which is not a trivial matter. Nanomaterial Characterization: An IntroduTrade Review"For those actively involved in the nanosafety and other relevant research fields involving nanomaterials, as well as those new to the field, this book represents an excellent reference point and source of knowledge." (Andy Booth 2016)Table of ContentsList of Contributors xv Editor’s Preface xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 Properties Unique to Nanomaterials 3 1.3 Terminology 4 1.3.1 Nanomaterials 4 1.3.2 Physicochemical Properties 7 1.4 Measurement of Good Practice 8 1.4.1 Method Validation 8 1.4.2 Standard Documents 13 1.5 Typical Methods 16 1.5.1 Sampling 16 1.5.2 Dispersion 19 1.6 Potential Errors Due to Chosen Methods 20 1.7 Summary 20 Acknowledgments 21 References 21 2 Nanomaterial Syntheses 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 Bottom–Up Approach 26 2.2.1 Arc-Discharge 26 2.2.2 Inert-Gas Condensation 26 2.2.3 Flame Synthesis 27 2.2.4 Vapor-Phase Deposition 27 2.2.5 Colloidal Synthesis 27 2.2.6 Biologically synthesized nanomaterials 28 2.2.7 Microemulsion Synthesis 28 2.2.8 Sol–Gel Method 29 2.3 Synthesis: Top–Down Approach 29 2.3.1 Mechanical Milling 29 2.3.2 Laser Ablation 30 2.4 Bottom–Up and Top–Down: Lithography 30 2.5 Bottom–Up or Top–Down? Case Example: Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs) 30 2.6 Particle Growth: Theoretical Considerations 32 2.6.1 Nucleation 32 2.6.2 Particle Growth and Growth Kinetics 33 2.6.2.1 Diffusion-Limited Growth 33 2.6.2.2 Ostwald Ripening 34 2.7 Case Study: Microreactor for the Synthesis of Gold Nanoparticles 34 2.7.1 Introduction 34 2.7.2 Method 36 2.7.2.1 Materials 36 2.7.2.2 Protocol: Nanoparticles Batch Synthesis 37 2.7.2.3 Protocol: Nanoparticle Synthesis via Continuous Flow Microfluidics 37 2.7.2.4 Protocol: Nanoparticles Synthesis via Droplet-Based Microfluidics 38 2.7.2.5 Protocol: Dynamic Light Scattering 38 2.7.3 Results Interpretation and Conclusion 39 2.8 Summary 42 Acknowledgments 43 References 43 3 Reference Nanomaterials 49 3.1 Definition, Development, and Application Fields 49 3.2 Case Studies 50 3.2.1 Silica Nanomaterial as Potential Reference Material to Establish Possible Size Effects on Mechanical Properties 50 3.2.1.1 Introduction 50 3.2.1.2 Findings So Far 53 3.2.2 Silica Nanomaterial as Potential Reference Material in Nanotoxicology 55 3.3 Summary 57 Acknowledgments 58 References 58 4 Particle Number Size Distribution 63 4.1 Introduction 63 4.2 Measuring Methods 65 4.2.1 Particle Tracking Analysis 65 4.2.2 Resistive Pulse Sensing 67 4.2.3 Single Particle Inductively Coupled Plasma Mass Spectrometry 69 4.2.4 Electron Microscopy 71 4.2.5 Atomic Force Microscopy 73 4.3 Summary of Capabilities of the Counting Techniques 74 4.4 Experimental Case Study 74 4.4.1 Introduction 74 4.4.2 Method 76 4.4.3 Results and Interpretation 76 4.4.4 Conclusion 77 4.5 Summary 78 References 78 5 Solubility Part 1: Overview 81 5.1 Introduction 82 5.2 Separation Methods 84 5.2.1 Filtration, Centrifugation, Dialysis, and Ultrafiltration 84 5.2.2 Ion Exchange 85 5.2.3 High-Performance Liquid Chromatography, Electrophoresis, Field Flow Fractionation 87 5.3 Quantification Methods: Free Ions (And Labile Fractions) 90 5.3.1 Electrochemical Methods 90 5.3.2 Colorimetric Methods 93 5.4 Quantification Methods to Measure Total Dissolved Species 94 5.4.1 Indirect Measurements 94 5.4.2 Direct Measurements 95 5.5 Theoretical Modeling Using Speciation Software 96 5.6 Which Method? 97 5.7 Case Study: Miniaturized Capillary Electrophoresis with Conductivity Detection to Determine Nanomaterial Solubility 99 5.7.1 Introduction 99 5.7.2 Method 100 5.7.2.1 Materials 100 5.7.2.2 Dispersion Protocol 100 5.7.2.3 Instrumentation: CE-Conductivity Device 100 5.7.2.4 CE-Conductivity Microchip: Measurement Protocol 101 5.7.2.5 Protocol: To Assess the Feasibility of Measuring the Zn2+ (from ZnO Nanomaterial) Signal above the Fish Medium Background 102 5.7.2.6 Protocol: To Assess Data Variability between Different Microchips 102 5.7.3 Results and Interpretation 103 5.7.3.1 Study 1: Assessing Feasibility of the CE-Conductivity Microchip to Detect Free Zn2+ Arising from Dispersion of ZnO in Fish Medium 103 5.7.3.2 Study 2: Assessing Performance of Microchips Using Reference Test Material 103 5.7.4 Conclusion 105 5.8 Summary 105 Acknowledgments 105 References 106 6 Solubility Part 2: Colorimetry 117 6.1 Introduction 117 6.2 Materials and Method 119 6.2.1 Materials 119 6.2.2 Mandatory Protocol: NanoGenotox Dispersion for Nanomaterials 119 6.2.3 Mandatory Protocol: Simulated In Vitro Digestion Model 120 6.2.4 Colorimetry Analysis 121 6.2.5 SEM Analysis 122 6.3 Results and Interpretation 123 6.4 Conclusion 127 Acknowledgments 128 A6. 1 Materials and Method 128 A6.1.1 Materials 128 A6.1.2 Mandatory Protocol: Ultrasonic Probe Calibration 128 A6.1.3 Mandatory Protocol: Benchmarking of SiO2 (NM 200) 129 A6.1.4 Mandatory Protocol: Preliminary Characterization of ZnO (NM 110) 129 A6.1.5 Mandatory Protocol: Dynamic Light Scattering (DLS) 130 A6. 2 Results and Interpretation 130 A6.2.1 Probe Sonication 130 A6.2.2 Benchmarking with SiO2 (NM 200) 130 A6.2.3 NM 110: Characterizing Batch Dispersions ZnO (NM 110) 131 References 131 7 Surface Area 133 7.1 Introduction 133 7.2 Measurement Methods: Overview 134 7.3 Case Study: Evaluating Powder Homogeneity Using NMR Versus Bet 140 7.3.1 Background: NMR for Surface Area Measurements 141 7.3.2 Method 142 7.3.2.1 Materials 142 7.3.2.2 Sample Preparation for NMR 142 7.3.2.3 Protocol: NMR Analysis 142 7.3.2.4 BET Protocol 143 7.3.3 Results and Interpretation 143 7.3.4 Conclusion 145 7.4 Summary 145 Acknowledgments 145 References 149 8 Surface Chemistry 153 8.1 Introduction 153 8.2 Measurement Challenges 155 8.3 Analytical Techniques 157 8.3.1 Electron Spectroscopies 158 8.3.1.1 X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) 158 8.3.1.2 Auger Electron Spectroscopy (AES) 159 8.3.2 Incident Ion Techniques 160 8.3.2.1 Secondary Ion Mass Spectrometry (SIMS) 160 8.3.2.2 Low- and Medium-Energy Ion Scattering (LEIS and MEIS) 160 8.3.3 Scanning Probe Microscopies 161 8.3.4 Optical Techniques 161 8.3.5 Other Techniques 162 8.4 Case Studies 163 8.4.1 Part I: Surface Characterization of Biomolecule-Coated Nanoparticles 163 8.4.2 Part II: Surface Characterization of Commercial Metal-Oxide Nanomaterials by TOF-SIMS 169 8.4.2.1 Effect of Sample Topography 171 8.4.2.2 Chemical Analysis of Nanopowders 171 8.5 Summary 174 References 174 9 Mechanical Tribological Properties and Surface Characteristics of Nanotextured Surfaces 179 9.1 Introduction 179 9.2 Fabricating Nanotextured Surfaces 181 9.2.1 Plasma Treatment Processes 181 9.2.2 Randomly Nanotextured Surfaces by Plasma Etching 182 9.2.3 Ordered Hierarchical Nanotextured by Plasma Etching 185 9.2.4 Carbon Nanotube Forests by Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD) 185 9.3 Mechanical Property Characterization 187 9.3.1 Nanoindentation Testing 187 9.3.2 Tribological Characterization by Nanoscratching 190 9.4 Case Study: Nanoscratch Tests to Characterize Mechanical Stability of PS/PMMA Surfaces 191 9.4.1 Method 191 9.4.2 Results and Discussion 192 9.5 Case Study: Structural Integrity of Multiwalled CNT Forest 194 9.6 Case Study: Mechanical Characterization of Plasma-Treated Polylactic Acid (PLA) for Packaging Applications 197 9.7 Conclusions 201 Acknowledgments 202 References 202 10 Methods for Testing Dustiness 209 10.1 Introduction 209 10.2 Cen Test Methods (Under Consideration) 213 10.2.1 The EN 15051 Rotating Drum (RD) Method 213 10.2.2 The EN 15051 Continuous Drop (CD) Method 215 10.2.3 The Small Rotating Drum (SRD) Method 217 10.2.4 The Vortex Shaker (VS) Method 219 10.2.5 Dustiness Test: Comparison of Methods 223 10.3 Case Studies: Application of Dustiness Data 225 10.4 Summary 226 Acknowledgments 227 References 227 11 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy and Spectroscopy for Nanofunctionality Characterization 231 11.1 Introduction 231 11.2 Extreme Field STM: a Brief History 234 11.3 STM/STS for the Extraction of Surface Local Density of States (LDOS): Theoretical Background 234 11.4 Scanning Tunneling Spectroscopy (STS) at Low Temperatures: Background 238 11.5 STM Instrumentation at Extreme Conditions: Specification Requirements and Design 239 11.6 STM/STS Imaging Under Extreme Environments: a Review on Applications 242 11.6.1 Atomic-Scale STM Imaging 242 11.6.2 Interference of Low-Dimensional Electron Waves 244 11.6.3 Interesting Phenomena Related to High-Magnetic Fields 246 11.7 Summary and Future Outlook 248 Acknowledgments 248 References 249 12 Biological Characterization of Nanomaterials 253 12.1 Introduction 253 12.1.1 Importance of Nanomaterial Characterization 253 12.1.2 Extrinsic NMs Characterization 254 12.1.3 The Proposal for Measuring “extrinsic” Properties 255 12.2 Measurement Methods 255 12.2.1 Review of Existing Approaches 255 12.2.2 Introducing Acetylcholinesterase as a Model Biosensor Protein 256 12.3 Experimental Case Study 257 12.3.1 Introduction 257 12.3.2 Method: Assay of AChE Activity 258 12.3.3 Results and Discussion 260 12.3.4 Conclusions 262 12.4 Summary 263 Acknowledgments 263 References 263 13 Visualization of Multidimensional Data for Nanomaterial Characterization 269 13.1 Introduction 269 13.2 Case Study: Structure–Activity Relationship (SAR) Analysis of Nanoparticle Toxicity 271 13.2.1 Introduction 271 13.2.2 Parallel Coordinates: Background 273 13.2.3 Case Study Data 274 13.2.4 Method 276 13.2.5 Results and Interpretation 277 13.2.5.1 Analysis of the 14 Dry Powder Samples Using BET and DTT Data Only 277 13.2.5.2 Analysis of the Structural Properties of Zinc Oxide (N14) and Nickel Oxide (N12) (Excluding BET and DTT Data) 278 13.2.5.3 Metal-Content-Only Analysis of the 18 Samples Excluding Structural Descriptors 279 13.2.5.4 Analysis of the Structural Properties of Nanotubes (N3) 281 13.2.5.5 Analysis of the Structural Properties of Aminated Beads (N6) (Excluding BET and DTT Data) 281 13.2.6 Conclusion 283 13.3 Summary 283 References 284 Index 287

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides detailed reviews of a range of nanostructures used in the construction of biosensors as well as the applications of these biosensor nanotechnologies in the biological, chemical, and environmental monitoring fields. This book examines some of the emerging technologies that are fueling scientific discovery and underpinning new products.Table of ContentsPreface xv Part 1: New Materials and Methods 1 1 ZnO and Graphene Microelectrode Applications in Biosensing 3 Susana Campuzano, María Pedrero, Georgia-Paraskevi Nikoleli, José M. Pingarron, Dimitrios P. Nikolelis, Nikolaos Tzamtzis and Vasillios N. Psychoyios 1.1 Biosensors Based on Nanostructured Materials 4 1.2 Graphene Nanomaterials Used in ElectrochemicalBiosensor Fabrication 5 1.3 ZnO Nanostructures Used in the Fabrication of Electrochemical Biosensors 7 1.4 Miniaturized Graphene and ZnO Nanostructured Electrochemical Biosensors for Food and Clinical Applications 10 1.5 Conclusions and Future Prospects 30 Acknowledgements 32 References 32 2 Assembly of Polymers/Metal Nanoparticles and Their Applications as Medical Devices 37 Magdalena Stevanovic 2.1 Introduction 38 2.2 Platinum Nanoparticles 40 2.3 Gold Nanoparticles 41 2.4 Silver Nanoparticles 44 2.5 Assembly of Polymers/Silver Nanoparticles 45 2.6 Conclusion 51 Acknowledgements 51 References 52 3 Gold Nanoparticle-Based Electrochemical Biosensors for Medical Applications 63 Ülkü Anik 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 Gold Nanoparticles 64 3.3 Conclusion 76 References 76 4 Impedimetric DNA Biosensors Based on Nanomaterials 81 Manel del Valle and Alessandra Bonanni 4.1 Introduction 82 4.2 Electrochemical Impedance Spectroscopy for Genosensing 85 4.3 Nanostructured Carbon Used in Impedimetric Genosensors 91 4.4 Nanostructured Gold Used in Impedimetric Genosensors 97 4.5 Quantum Dots for Impedimetric Genosensing 100 4.6 Impedimetric Genosensors for Point-of-Care Diagnosis 101 4.7 Conclusions (Past, Present and Future Perspectives) 102 Acknowledgements 104 References 104 5 Graphene: Insights of its Application in Electrochemical Biosensors for Environmental Monitoring 111 G.A. Álvarez-Romero, G. Alarcon-Angeles and A. Merkoçi 5.1 Introduction 112 5.2 Environmental Applications of Graphene-based Biosensors 117 5.3 Conclusions and Perspectives 133 References 134 6 Functional Nanomaterials for Multifarious Nanomedicine 141 Ravindra P. Singh, Jeong-Woo Choi, Ashutosh Tiwari and Avinash Chand Pandey 6.1 Introduction 142 6.2 Nanoparticle Coatings 145 6.3 Cyclic Peptides 147 6.4 Dendrimers 149 6.5 Fullerenes/Carbon Nanotubes/Graphene 156 6.6 Functional Drug Carriers 157 6.7 MRI Scanning Nanoparticles 162 6.8 Nanoemulsions 165 6.9 Nanofibers 166 6.10 Nanoshells 169 6.11 Quantum Dots 171 6.12 Nanoimaging 179 6.13 Inorganic Nanoparticles 180 6.14 Conclusions 182 Acknowledgement 183 References 183 Part 2: Principals and Prospective 199 7 Computational Nanochemistry Study of the Molecular Structure, Spectra and Chemical Reactivity Properties of the BFPF Green Fluorescent Protein Chromophore 201 Daniel Glossman-Mitnik 7.1 Introduction 201 7.2 Theory and Computational Details 202 7.3 Results and Discussion 206 7.4 Conclusions 233 Acknowledgements 234 References 234 8 Biosynthesis of etal Nanoparticles and Their Applications 239 Meryam Sardar, Abhijeet Mishra and Razi Ahmad 8.1 Introduction 240 8.2 Synthesis of Metal Nanoparticles 241 8.3 Applications 253 8.4 Conclusions 255 Acknowledgement 256 References 257 9 Ionic Discotic Liquid Crystals: Recent Advances and Applications 267 Santanu Kumar Pal and Sandeep Kumar 9.1 Introduction 268 9.2 Part I: Chromonic LCs 271 9.3 Part II: Thermotropic Ionic Discotic Liquid Crystals 282 Acknowledgement 309 References 309 10 Role of Advanced Materials as Nanosensors in Water Treatment 315 Sheenam Thatai, Parul Khurana and Dinesh Kumar 10.1 Introduction 315 10.2 Nanoparticles 318 10.3 Different Fabrication Methods of Nanoparticles 319 10.4 Core Material/Nanofillers 321 10.5 Shell Material/Nanomatrix 324 10.6 Core-Shell Material 326 10.7 Properties of Metal Nanoparticles and Core-Shell Nanocomposites 330 10.8 Detection of Heavy Metals Using Smart Core-Shell Nanocomposites 333 10.9 Conclusions 337 Acknowledgement 337 References 338 Part 3: Advanced Structures and Properties 345 11 Application of Bioconjugated Nanoporous Gold Films in Electrochemical Biosensors 347 Leila Kashefi-Kheyrabadi, Abolhassan Noori and Masoud Ayatollahi Mehrgardi 11.1 Introduction 348 11.2 Fabrication of Nanoporous Gold 349 11.3 Nucleic Acids (NAs)-Based Biosensors 351 11.4 Protein-Nanostructured Gold Bioconjugates in Biosensing 356 11.5 Conclusion 369 References 369 12 Combination of Molecular Imprinting and Nanotechnology: Beginning of a New Horizon 375 Rashmi Madhuri, Ekta Roy, Kritika Gupta and Prashant K. Sharma 12.1 Introduction 376 12.2 Classification of Imprinted Nanomaterials 383 12.3 Imprinted Materials at Nanoscale 421 12.4 Conclusions and Future Outlook 427 Acknowledgements 428 References 428 13 Structural, Electrical and Magnetic Properties of Pure and Substituted BiFeO3 Multiferroics 433 S. Jangid, S. K. Barbar and M. Roy 13.1 Introduction 434 13.2 Synthesis of Materials 446 13.3 Structural and Morphological Analyses 454 13.4 Electrical Properties 467 13.5 Magnetic Properties 476 13.6 Thermal Analysis (MDSC Studies) 489 13.7 Summary and Conclusion 496 References 498 14 Synthesis, Characterization and Rietveld Studies of Sr-modified PZT Ceramics 507 Kumar Brajesh, A.K. Himanshu and N.K. Singh 14.1 Introduction 508 14.2 Experiment 509 14.3 Rietveld Refinement Details 510 14.4 Results and Discussion 511 14.5 Conclusions 521 References 521 Index 523

Read more less

Book SynopsisOffers a comprehensive and interdisciplinary view of the research on advanced materials for healthcare technology and applications. This book summarizes the state of knowledge in the field of advanced materials for functional therapeutics, point-of-care diagnostics, translational materials, and up-and-coming bioengineering devices.Trade Review“Although they claim in the Preface that this book is written for university students and researchers from diverse backgrounds, I believe having read the majority of the scientific aspects of the work it really expects the reader to have a very thorough knowledge of polymer chemistry at the nanometer level of particle or pore size and suggest this book is aimed at the researchers in the pharmaceutical industry or academics in pharmaceutical chemistry research rather than researchers into biomaterials.” (Scope, 1 February 2014) Table of ContentsPreface xvii 1 Stimuli-Responsive Smart Nanoparticles for Biomedical Application 1 Arnab De, Sushil Mishra and Subho Mozumdar 1.1 A Brief Overview of Nanotechnology 2 1.2 Nanoparticulate Delivery Systems 3 1.3 Delivery Systems 4 1.4 Polymers for Nanoparticle Synthesis 11 1.5 Synthesis of Nanovehicles 15 1.6 Dispersion of Preformed Polymers 16 1.7 Emulsion Polymerization 20 1.8 Purification of Nanoparticle 22 1.9 Drying of Nanoparticles 24 1.10 Drug Loading 25 1.11 Drug Release 26 1.12 Conclusion 27 References 27 2 Diagnosis and Treatment of Cancer—Where We Are and Where We Have to Go! 35 Rajiv Lochan Gaur and Richa Srivastava 2.1 Cancer Pathology 36 2.2 Cancer Diagnosis 37 2.3 Treatment 41 Conclusion 42 References 42 3 Advanced Materials for Biomedical Application and Drug Delivery 47 Salam J.J. Titinchi, Mayank P. Singh, Hanna S. Abbo and Ivan R. Green 3.1 Introduction 48 3.2 Anticancer Drug Entrapped Zeolite Structures as Drug Delivery Systems 48 3.3 Mesoporous Silica Nanoparticles and Multifunctional Magnetic Nanoparticles in Biomedical Applications 52 3.4 BioMOFs: Metal-Organic Frameworks for Biological and Medical Applications 64 3.5 Conclusions 75 References 75 4 Nanoparticles for Diagnosis and/or Treatment of Alzheimer’s Disease 85 S.G. Antimisiaris, S. Mourtas, E. Markoutsa, A. Skouras, and K. Papadia 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 Nanoparticles 86 4.3 Physiological Factors Related with Brain-Located Pathologies: Focus on AD 96 4.4 Current Methodologies to Target AD-Related Pathologies 110 4.5 Nanoparticles for Diagnosis of AD 136 4.6 Nanoparticles for Therapy of AD 146 4.7 Summary of Current Progress and Future Challenges 160 Acknowledgments 161 References 161 5 Novel Biomaterials for Human Health: Hemocompatible Polymeric Micro-and Nanoparticles and Their Application in Biosensor 179 Chong Sun, Xiaobo Wang, Chun Mao and Jian Shen 5.1 Introduction 179 5.2 Design and Preparation of Hemocompatible Polymeric Micro- and Nanoparticles 181 5.3 The Biosafety and Hemocompatibility Evaluation System for Polymeric Micro- and Nanoparticles 183 5.4 Construction of Biosensor for Direct Detection in Whole Blood 188 5.5 Conclusion and Prospect 194 References 195 6 The Contribution of Smart Materials and Advanced Clinical Diagnostic Micro-Devices on the Progress and Improvement of Human Health Care 199 Teles, F.R.R. and Fonseca, L.P. 6.1 Introduction 200 6.2 Physiological Biomarkers as Targets in Clinical Diagnostic Bioassays 202 6.3 Biosensors 205 6.4 Advanced Materials and Nanostructures for Health Care Applications 217 6.5 Applications of Micro-Devices to Some Important Clinical Pathologies 223 6.6 Conclusions and Future Prospects 227 Acknowledgment 227 References 228 7 Hierarchical Modeling of Elastic Behavior of Human Dental Tissue Based on Synchrotron Diffraction Characterization 233 TanSui and Alexander M. Korsunsky 7.1 Introduction 233 7.2 Experimental Techniques 236 7.3 Model Formulation 238 7.4 Experimental Results and Model Validation 245 7.5 Discussion 251 7.6 Conclusions 255 Acknowledgments 256 Appendix 256 References 260 8 Biodegradable Porous Hydrogels 263 Martin Pradny, Miroslav Vetrik, Martin Hruby and Jiri Michalek 8.1 Introduction 263 8.2 Methods of Preparation of Porous Hydrogels 265 8.3 Hydrogels Crosslinked With Degradable Crosslinkers 271 8.4 Hydrogels Degradable in the Main Chain 276 8.5 Conclusions 281 Acknowledgments 281 References 283 9 Hydrogels: Properties, Preparation, Characterization and Biomedical Applications in Tissue Engineering, Drug Delivery and Wound Care 289 Mohammad Sirousazar, Mehrdad Forough, Khalil Farhadi, Yasaman Shaabani and Rahim Molaei 9.1 Introduction 289 9.2 Types of Hydrogels 290 9.3 Properties of Hydrogels 295 9.4 Preparation Methods of Hydrogels 299 9.5 Characterization of Hydrogels 305 9.6 Biomedical Applications of Hydrogels 308 9.7 Hydrogels for Wound Management 319 9.8 Recent Developments on Hydrogels 337 9.9 Conclusions 340 References 341 10 Modified Natural Zeolites—Functional Characterization and Biomedical Application 353 Jela Miliæ, Aleksandra Dakoviæ, Danina Krajišnik and George E. Rottinghaus 10.1 Introduction 354 10.2 Surfactant Modified Zeolites (SMZs) 359 10.3 Minerals as Pharmaceutical Excipients 366 10.4 SMZs for Pharmaceutical Application 372 10.5 Conclusions 389 Acknowledgement 390 References 390 11 Supramolecular Hydrogels Based on Cyclodextrin Poly(Pseudo)Rotaxane for New and Emerging Biomedical Applications 397 JinHuang, Jing Hao, Debbie P. Anderson and Peter R. Chang 11.1 Introduction 398 11.2 Fabrication of Cyclodextrin Poly(pseudo)rotaxane-Based Hydrogels 400 11.3 Stimulus-Response Properties of Cyclodextrin Poly(pseudo)rotaxane Based Hydrogels 409 11.4 Nanocomposite Supramolecular Hydrogels 413 11.5 Biomedical Application of Cyclodextrin Poly(pseudo)rotaxane-Based Hydrogels 420 11.6 Conclusions and Prospects 425 References 425 12 Polyhydroxyalkanoate-Based Biomaterials for Applicationsin Biomedical Engineering 431 Chenghao Zhu and Qizhi Chen 12.1 Introduction 12.2 Synthesis of PHAs 433 12.3 Processing and its Influence on the Mechanical Properties of PHAs 435 12.4 Mechanical Properties of PHA Sheets/Films 436 12.5 PHA-Based Polymer Blends 439 12.6 Summary 451 References 451 13 Biomimetic Molecularly Imprinted Polymers as Smart Materials and Future Perspective in Health Care 457 Mohammad Reza Ganjali, Farnoush Faridbod and Parviz Norouzi 13.1 Molecularly Imprinted Polymer Technology 458 13.2 Synthesis of MIPs 458 13.3 Application of MIPs 463 13.4 Biomimetic Molecules 464 13.5 MIPs as Receptors in Bio-Molecular Recognition 465 13.6 MIPs as Sensing Elements in Sensors/Biosensors 466 13.7 MIPs as Drug Delivery Systems 467 13.8 MIPs as Sorbent Materials in Separation Science 475 13.9 Future Perspective of MIP Technologies 480 13.10 Conclusion 480 References 480 14 The Role of Immunoassays in Urine Drug Screening 485 Niina J. Ronkainen and Stanley L. Okon 14.1 Introduction 486 14.2 Urine and Other Biological Specimens 489 14.3 Immunoassays 491 14.4 Drug Screening with Immunoassays 504 14.5 Immunoassay Specificity: False Negative and False Positive Test Results 507 14.6 Confirmatory Secondary Testing Using Chromatography Instruments 510 Conclusion 513 References

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of ContentsPreface xv 1 Processing and Characterizations: State-of-the-Art and New Challenges 1 Visakh. P. M. 1.1 Membrane: Technology and Chemistry 1 1.2 Characterization of Membranes 3 1.3 Ceramic and Inorganic Polymer Membranes: Preparation, Characterization and Applications 4 1.4 Supramolecular Membranes: Synthesis and Characterizations 5 1.5 Organic Membranes and Polymers to Remove Pollutants 7 1.6 Membranes for CO2 Separation 8 1.7 Polymer Nanomembranes 9 1.8 Liquid Membranes 11 1.9 Recent Progress in Separation Technology Based on Ionic Liquid Membranes 12 1.10 Membrane Distillation 13 1.11 Alginate-based Films and Membranes: Preparation, Characterization and Applications 14 References 15 2 Membrane Technology and Chemistry 27 Manuel Palencia, Alexander Córdoba and Myleidi Vera 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Membrane Technology: Fundamental Concepts 28 2.3 Separation Mechanisms 33 2.4 Chemical Nature of Membrane 41 2.5 Surface Treatment of Membranes 42 2.6 Conclusions 48 References 48 3 Characterization of Membranes 55 Derya Y. Koseoglu-Imer, Ismail Koyuncu, Reyhan Sengur-Tasdemir, Serkan Guclu, Recep Kaya, Mehmet Emin Pasaoglu and Turker Turken 3.1 Introduction 56 3.2 Physical Methods for Characterizing Pore Size of Membrane 56 3.3 Membrane Chemical Structure 67 3.4 Conclusions 85 References 85 4 Ceramic and Inorganic Polymer Membranes: Preparation, Characterization and Applications 89 Chiam-Wen Liew and S. Ramesh 4.1 Introduction 90 4.2 Recent Developments in Filler-doped Polymer Electrolytes 95 4.3 Methodology 105 4.4 Results and Discussion 109 4.5 Conclusions 127 Acknowledgment 128 References 128 5 Supramolecular Membranes: Synthesis and Characterizations 137 Cher Hon Lau, Matthew Hill and Kristina Konstas 5.1 Overview 138 5.2 Supramolecular Materials 138 5.3 Supramolecular Membranes 157 5.4 Membrane Fabrication Using Supramolecular Chemistry 170 5.5 Conclusions 184 References 186 6 Organic Membranes and Polymers for the Removal of Pollutants 203 Bernabé L. Rivas, Julio Sánchez and Manuel Palencia 6.1 Membranes: Fundamental Aspects 204 6.2 Liquid-phase Polymer-based Retention (LPR) 212 6.3 Applications for Removal of Specific Pollutants 216 6.4 Future Perspectives 228 6.5 Conclusions 228 Acknowledgments 228 References 228 7 Membranes for CO2 Separation 237 Abedalkhader Alkhouzaam, Majeda Khraisheh, Mert Atilhan, Shaheen A. Al-Muhtaseb and Syed Javaid Zaidi 7.1 Introduction 238 7.2 Fundamentals of Membrane Gas Separation 239 7.3 Polymeric Membranes for CO2 Separation 245 7.4 Mixed Matrix Membranes 258 7.5 Supported Ionic Liquid Membranes (SILMs) for CO2 Separation 263 7.6 Conclusion 278 7.7 Overall Comparison and Future Outlook 279 Abbreviations 282 References 285 8 Polymer Nanomembranes 293 Giuseppe Firpo and Ugo Valbusa 8.1 Introduction 293 8.2 Materials 294 8.3 Nanomembrane Fabrication 298 8.4 Characterization 304 8.5 Applications 310 References 316 9 Liquid Membranes 329 Jiangnan Shen, Lijing Zhu, Lixin Xue and Congjie Gao 9.1 Introduction 329 9.2 Most Recent Developments 330 9.3 Liquid Membranes Based Separation Processes 330 9.4 Conclusion 379 References 379 10 Recent Progress in Separation Technology Based on Ionic Liquid Membranes 391 M.J. Salar-García, V.M. Ortiz-Martínez, A. Pérez de los Ríos and F.J. Hernández-Fernández 10.1 Introduction 392 10.2 Ionic Liquid Properties 393 10.3 Bulk Ionic Liquid Membranes 395 10.4 Emulsified Ionic Liquid Membranes 397 10.5 Immobilized Ionic Liquid Membranes 400 10.6 Green Aspect of Ionic Liquids 410 10.7 Conclusions 411 Acknowledgments 411 References 412 11 Membrane Distillation 419 Mohammadali Baghbanzadeh, Christopher Q. Lan, Dipak Rana and Takeshi Matsuura 11.1 Introduction 419 11.2 Applications of Membrane Distillation Technology 420 11.3 Different Kinds of Membrane Distillation Configurations 422 11.4 Distillation Membranes 432 11.5 Transport Phenomena in MD 439 11.6 Conclusion 450 References 450 12 Alginate-based Films and Membranes: Preparation, Characterization and Applications 457 Jiwei Li and Jinmei He 12.1 Introduction 457 12.2 Recent Development 459 12.3 Applications 468 12.4 Conclusion 473 References 474 Index 491

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe 2nd volume on applications with discuss the various aspects of state-of-the-art, new challenges and opportunities for gas and vapor separation of polymer membranes, membranes for wastewater treatment, polymer electrolyte membranes and methanol fuel cells, polymer membranes for water desalination, optical, electrochemical and anion/polyanion sensors, polymeric pervaporation membranes, organic-organic separation, biopolymer electrolytes for energy devices, carbon nanoparticles for pervaporation polymeric membranes, and mixed matrix membranes for nanofiltration application.Table of ContentsPreface xvii 1 Nanostructured Polymer Membranes: Applications, State-of-the-Art, New Challenges and Opportunities 1 Visakh. P. M 1.1 Membranes: Technology and Applications 1 1.2 Polymer Membranes: Gas and Vapor Separation 3 1.3 Membranes for Wastewater Treatment 4 1.4 Polymer Electrolyte Membrane and Methanol Fuel Cell 5 1.5 Polymer Membranes for Water Desalination and Treatment 6 1.6 Biopolymer Electrolytes for Energy Devices 7 1.7 Phosphoric Acid-Doped Polybenzimidazole Membranes 9 1.8 Natural Nanofibers in Polymer Membranes for Energy Applications 10 1.9 Potential of Carbon Nanoparticles for Pervaporation Polymeric Membranes 14 1.10 Mixed Matrix Membranes for Nanofiltration Application 16 1.11 Fundamentals, Applications and Future Prospects of Nanofiltration Membrane Technique 18 References 19 2 Membranes: Technology and Applications 27 Yang Liu and Guibin Wang 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Reverse Osmosis Process 37 2.3 Ultrafiltration Process 50 2.4 Pervaporation Process 59 2.5 Microfiltration Process 65 2.6 Coupled and Facilitated Transport 69 References 84 3 Polymeric Membranes for Gas and Vapor Separations 89 Seyed Saeid Hosseini and Sara Najari 3.1 Introduction 89 3.2 Significance and Prominent Industrial Applications 91 3.3 Fundamentals and Transport of Gases in Polymeric Membranes 100 3.4 Polymeric Membrane Materials for Gas and Vapor Separations 112 3.5 Strategies for Tuning the Transport in Polymeric Membranes through Molecular Design and Architecture 128 3.6 Process Modeling and Simulation 132 3.7 Challenges and Future Directions 141 3.8 Concluding Remarks 144 References 144 4 Membranes for Wastewater Treatment 159 Alireza Zirehpour and Ahmad Rahimpour 4.1 Introduction 160 4.2 Membrane Theory 161 4.3 Membrane Separation Techniques in Industry 168 4.4 Membrane Operations in Wastewater Management 178 4.5 Existing Membrane Processes 185 4.6 Industrial Development of Membrane Modules 194 4.7 Conclusion 198 References 198 5 Polymer Electrolyte Membrane and Methanol Fuel Cell 209 Kilsung Kwon and Daejoong Kim 5.1 Introduction 209 5.2 Polymer Electrolyte Membrane Fuel Cells (PEMFCs) 212 5.3 Direct Methanol Fuel Cells (DMFCs) 228 5.4 Principle and Working Process of PEMFCs 232 5.5 Principle and Working Process of DMFCs 236 5.6 Modeling and Theory of Polymer Electrolyte Membrane Fuel Cells 241 5.7 Conclusion 243 References 243 6 Polymer Membranes for Water Desalination and Treatment 251 Tânia L. S. Silva, Sergio Morales-Torres, José L. Figueiredo and Adrián M. T. Silva 6.1 Introduction 252 6.2 Polymer Membranes Used in Distillation 253 6.3 Membrane Distillation 256 6.4 Desalination Driven by MD Systems 265 6.5 MD Hybrid Systems for Water Desalination and Treatment 272 6.6 Conclusions 275 Acknowledgments 275 References 276 7 Polymeric Pervaporation Membranes: Organic-Organic Separation 287 Francesco Galiano, Francesco Falbo and Alberto Figoli 7.1 General Introduction on Pervaporation 287 7.2 Brief History of Pervaporation 290 7.3 Polymeric Materials for Organic-Organic Separation – General Requirements 291 7.4 Pervaporation Case Studies for Organic-Organic Separation 298 7.5 Conclusions and Future Directions 303 References 303 8 Biopolymer Electrolytes for Energy Devices 311 Tan Winie1 and A. K. Arof 8.1 Introduction 312 8.2 Chitosan-Based Electrolyte Membranes 312 8.3 Methyl Cellulose-based Electrolyte Membranes 315 8.4 Biopolymer Electrolytes in Lithium Polymer Batteries 317 8.5 Biopolymer Electrolytes in Supercapacitors 322 8.6 Polymer Electrolytes in Fuel Cells 328 8.7 Biopolymer Electrolytes in Dye-Sensitized Solar Cells (DSSCs) 332 8.8 Conclusions 344 Acknowledgments 346 References 346 9 Phosphoric Acid-Doped Polybenzimidazole Membranes: A Promising Electrolyte Membrane for High Temperature PEMFC 357 S. R. Dhanushkodi, M. W.Fowler, M. D. Pritzker and W. Merida 9.1 Introduction 357 9.2 Synthesis of PBI 362 9.3 Characterization of PBI 363 9.4 Research Needs and Conclusions 370 Table of Abbreviations 373 References 374 10 Natural Nanofibers in Polymer Membranes for Energy Applications 379 Annalisa Chiappone 10.1 Introduction 379 10.2 Natural Fibers 380 10.2.1 Cellulose and Chitin Structures 381 10.3 Polymer Nanocomposite Membranes Based on Natural Fibers: Production, Properties and General Applications 386 10.4 Applications of Natural Fibers Nanocomposite Membranes in the Energy Field 393 10.5 Conclusions 402 References 403 11 Potential Interests of Carbon Nanoparticles for Pervaporation Polymeric Membranes 413 Anastasia V. Penkova and Denis Roizard 11.1 Introduction 413 11.2 Principle of Permeation 415 11.3 Current Requirements for Pervaporation Membranes 418 11.4 Performances of Nanocomposite Membranes: From Membrane Preparations to Enhanced Properties with Carbon Nanoparticles 420 11.5 Impact of the Insertion of Carbon Particles in Pervaporation Membranes 422 11.6 Pervaporation Membranes 423 11.7 Pervaporation with the Use of MMM Containing Pristine Carbon Particles 424 11.8 Pervaporation with the Use of MMM Containing Functionalized Carbon Particles 427 11.9 Conclusion 434 Acknowledgment 435 References 435 12 Mixed Matrix Membranes for Nanofiltraion Application 441 Vahid Vatanpour, Mahdie Safarpour and Alireza Khataee 12.1 Introduction 442 12.2 Nanofiltration Process: History and Principles 443 12.3 Mixed Matrix Nanofiltration Membranes 444 12.4 Applications of Mixed Matrix Nanofiltration Membranes 468 12.5 Conclusion 469 Acknowledgment 470 List of Abbreviations 470 References 471 13 Fundamentals, Applications and Future Prospects of Nanofiltration Membrane Technique 477 Siddhartha Moulik, Shaik Nazia and S. Sridhar 13.1 Introduction 478 13.2 Membrane Synthesis 483 13.3 Membrane Characterization 485 13.4 Equations for Calculation of Operating Parameters 487 13.5 Effect of Feed Pressure on Process Flux 488 13.6 Optimization of NF Process Using Computation Fluid Dynamics (CFD) 490 13.7 Applications of NF in Societal Development and Industrial Progress 501 13.8 Economics of NF Process for Groundwater Purification 510 13.9 Conclusions 514 References 515 Index 519

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive advanced level examination of the transport theory of nanoscale devices Provides advanced level material of electron transport in nanoscale devices from basic principles of quantum mechanics through to advanced theory and various numerical techniques for electron transportCombines several up-to-date theoretical and numerical approaches in a unified manner, such as Wigner-Boltzmann equation, the recent progress of carrier transport research for nanoscale MOS transistors, and quantum correction approximationsThe authors approach the subject in a logical and systematic way, reflecting their extensive teaching and research backgroundsTable of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgements xi 1 Emerging Technologies 1 1.1 Moore's Law and the Power Crisis 1 1.2 Novel Device Architectures 2 1.3 High Mobility Channel Materials 5 1.4 Two-Dimensional (2-D) Materials 7 1.5 Atomistic Modeling 8 2 First-principles calculations for Si nanostructures 12 2.1 Band structure calculations 12 2.1.1 Si ultrathin-body structures 12 2.1.2 Si nanowires 17 2.1.3 Strain effects on band structures: From bulk to nanowire 20 2.2 Tunneling current calculations through Si/SiO2/Si structures 31 2.2.1 Atomic models of Si (001)/SiO2 /Si (001) structures 32 2.2.2 Current-voltage characteristics 33 2.2.3 SiO2 thickness dependences 35 3 Quasi-ballistic Transport in Si Nanoscale MOSFETs 41 3.1 A picture of quasi-ballistic transport simulated using quantum-corrected Monte Carlo simulation 41 3.1.1 Device structure and simulation method 42 3.1.2 Scattering rates for 3-D electron gas 44 3.1.3 Ballistic transport limit 46 3.1.4 Quasi-ballistic transport 50 3.1.5 Role of elastic and inelastic phonon scattering 51 3.2 Multi-sub-band Monte Carlo simulation considering quantum confinement in inversion layers 55 3.2.1 Scattering Rates for 2-D Electron Gas 56 3.2.2 Increase in Dac for SOI MOSFETs 58 3.2.3 Simulated electron mobilities in bulk Si and SOI MOSFETs 59 3.2.4 Electrical characteristics of Si DG-MOSFETs 61 3.3 Extraction of quasi-ballistic transport parameters in Si DG-MOSFETs 64 3.3.1 Backscattering coefficient 64 3.3.2 Current drive 66 3.3.3 Gate and drain bias dependences 67 3.4 Quasi-ballistic transport in Si junctionless transistors 69 3.4.1 Device structure and simulation conditions 70 3.4.2 Influence of SR scattering 71 3.4.3 Influence of II scattering 74 3.4.4 Backscattering coefficient 75 3.5 Quasi-ballistic transport in GAA-Si nanowire MOSFETs 76 3.5.1 Device structure and 3DMSB-MC method 76 3.5.2 Scattering rates for 1-D electron gas 77 3.5.3 ID-VG characteristics and backscattering coefficient 79 4 Phonon Transport in Si Nanostructures 85 4.1 Monte Carlo simulation method 87 4.1.1 Phonon dispersion model 87 4.1.2 Particle simulation of phonon transport 88 4.1.3 Free flight and scattering 89 4.2 Simulation of thermal conductivity 91 4.2.1 Thermal conductivity of bulk silicon 91 4.2.2 Thermal conductivity of silicon thin films 94 4.2.3 Thermal conductivity of silicon nanowires 98 4.2.4 Discussion on Boundary scattering effect 100 4.3 Simulation of heat conduction in devices 102 4.3.1 Simulation method 102 4.3.2 Simple 1-D structure 103 4.3.3 FinFET structure 106 5 Carrier Transport in High-mobility MOSFETs 112 5.1 Quantum-corrected MC Simulation of High-mobility MOSFETs 112 5.1.1 Device Structure and Band Structures of Materials 112 5.1.2 Band Parameters of Si, Ge, and III-V Semiconductors 114 5.1.3 Polar-optical Phonon (POP) Scattering in III-V Semiconductors 115 5.1.4 Advantage of UTB Structure 116 5.1.5 Drive Current of III-V, Ge and Si n-MOSFETs 119 5.2 Source-drain Direct Tunneling in Ultrascaled MOSFETs 124 5.3 Wigner Monte Carlo (WMC) Method 125 5.3.1 Wigner Transport Formalism 126 5.3.2 Relation with Quantum-corrected MC Method 129 5.3.3 WMC Algorithm 131 5.3.4 Description of Higher-order Quantized Subbands 133 5.3.5 Application to Resonant-tunneling Diode 133 5.4 Quantum Transport Simulation of III-V n-MOSFETs with Multi-subband WMC (MSB-WMC) Method 138 5.4.1 Device Structure 138 5.4.2 POP Scattering Rate for 2-D Electron Gas 139 5.4.3 ID-VG Characteristics for InGaAs DG-MOSFETs 139 5.4.4 Channel Length Dependence of SDT Leakage Current 143 5.4.5 Effective Mass Dependence of Subthreshold Current Properties 144 6 Atomistic Simulations of Si, Ge and III-V Nanowire MOSFETs 151 6.1 Phonon-limited electron mobility in Si nanowires 151 6.1.1 Band structure calculations 152 6.1.2 Electron-phonon interaction 161 6.1.3 Electron mobility 162 6.2 Comparison of phonon-limited electron mobilities between Si and Ge nanowires 168 6.3 Ballistic performances of Si and InAs nanowire MOSFETs 173 6.3.1 Band structures 174 6.3.2 Top-of-the-barrier model 174 6.3.3 ID-VG characteristics 177 6.3.4 Quantum capacitances 178 6.3.5 Power-delay-product 179 6.4 Ballistic performances of InSb, InAs, and GaSb nanowire MOSFETs 181 6.4.1 Band structures 182 6.4.2 ID-VG characteristics 182 6.4.3 Power-delay-product 186 Appendix A: Atomistic Poisson equation 187 Appendix B: Analytical expressions of electron-phonon interaction Hamiltonian matrices 188 7 2-D Materials and Devices 191 7.1 2-D Materials 191 7.1.1 Fundamental Properties of Graphene, Silicene and Germanene 192 7.1.2 Features of 2-D Materials as an FET Channel 197 7.2 Graphene Nanostructures with a Bandgap 198 7.2.1 Armchair-edged Graphene Nanoribbons (A-GNRs) 199 7.2.2 Relaxation Effects of Edge Atoms 203 7.2.3 Electrical Properties of A-GNR-FETs Under Ballistic Transport 205 7.2.4 Bilayer Graphenes (BLGs) 209 7.2.5 Graphene Nanomeshes (GNMs) 214 7.3 Influence of Bandgap Opening on Ballistic Electron Transport in BLG and A-GNR-MOSFETs 215 7.3.1 Small Bandgap Regime 217 7.3.2 Large Bandgap Regime 219 7.4 Silicene, Germanene and Graphene Nanoribbons 221 7.4.1 Bandgap vs Ribbon Width 222 7.4.2 Comparison of Band Structures 222 7.5 Ballistic MOSFETs with Silicene, Germanene and Graphene nanoribbons 223 7.5.1 ID-VG Characteristics 223 7.5.2 Quantum Capacitances 224 7.5.3 Channel Charge Density and Average Electron Velocity 225 7.5.4 Source-drain Direct Tunneling (SDT) 226 7.6 Electron Mobility Calculation for Graphene on Substrates 228 7.6.1 Band Structure 229 7.6.2 Scattering Mechanisms 229 7.6.3 Carrier Degeneracy 231 7.6.4 Electron Mobility Considering Surface Optical Phonon Scattering of Substrates 232 7.6.5 Electron Mobility Considering Charged Impurity Scattering 234 7.7 Germanane MOSFETs 236 7.7.1 Atomic Model for Germanane Nanoribbon Structure 237 7.7.2 Band Structure and Electron Effective Mass 238 7.7.3 Electron Mobility 240 Appendix A: Density-of-states for Carriers in Graphene 242 References 242 Index 247

Read more less

Book SynopsisBeginning with a general overview of nanocomposites, Bionanocomposites: Integrating Biological Processes for Bio-inspired Nanotechnologies details the systems available in nature (nucleic acids, proteins, carbohydrates, lipids) that can be integrated within suitable inorganic matrices for specific applications. Describing the relationship between architecture, hierarchy and function, this book aims at pointing out how bio-systems can be key components of nanocomposites. The text then reviews the design principles, structures, functions and applications of bionanocomposites. It also includes a section presenting related technical methods to helpreaders identify and understand the most widely used analytical tools such as mass spectrometry, calorimetry, and impedance spectroscopy, among others.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xv 1 What Are Bionanocomposites? 1Agathe Urvoas, Marie Valerio‐Lepiniec, Philippe Minard and Cordt Zollfrank 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 A Molecular Perspective: Why Biological Macromolecules? 3 1.3 Challenges for Bionanocomposites 3 References 6 2 Molecular Architecture of Living Matter 9 2.1 Nucleic Acids 11Enora Prado, Mónika Ádok‐Sipiczki and Corinne Nardin 2.1.1 Introduction: A Bit of History 11 2.1.2 Definition and Structure 12 2.1.2.1 Nomenclature 12 2.1.2.2 Structure 13 2.1.3 DNA and RNA Functions 15 2.1.3.1 Introduction 15 2.1.3.2 Transcription–Translation Process 16 2.1.3.3 Replication Process 18 2.1.4 Specific Secondary Structures 19 2.1.4.1 Watson–Crick H‐Bonds 19 2.1.4.1.1 Stem‐Loop 19 2.1.4.1.2 Kissing Complex 20 2.1.4.2 Other Kinds of H‐Bonding 21 2.1.4.2.1 G‐Quartets 21 2.1.4.2.2 i‐Motifs 23 2.1.5 Stability 23 2.1.6 Conclusion 25 References 25 2.2 Lipids 29Carole Aimé and Thibaud Coradin 2.2.1 Lipids Self‐Assembly 29 2.2.2 Structural Diversity of Lipids 30 2.2.2.1 Fatty Acyls (FA) 30 2.2.2.2 Glycerolipids (GL) 32 2.2.2.3 Glycerophospholipids (GP) 32 2.2.2.4 Sphingolipids (SP) 33 2.2.2.5 Sterol Lipids (ST) 34 2.2.2.6 Prenol Lipids (PR) 34 2.2.2.7 Saccharolipids (SL) 35 2.2.2.8 Polyketides (PK) 35 2.2.3 Lipid Synthesis and Distribution 35 2.2.4 The Diversity of Lipid Functions 36 2.2.4.1 Cellular Architecture 37 2.2.4.2 Lipid Rafts 37 2.2.4.3 Energy Storage 37 2.2.4.4 Regulating Membrane Proteins by Protein–Lipid Interactions 39 2.2.4.5 Signaling Functions 39 2.2.5 Lipidomics 39 References 40 2.3 Carbohydrates 41Mirjam Czjzek 2.3.1 Introduction 41 2.3.2 Monosaccharides 42 2.3.3 Oligosaccharides 44 2.3.3.1 Disaccharides 44 2.3.3.2 Protein Glycosylations 46 2.3.4 Polysaccharides 47 2.3.4.1 Cellulose 49 2.3.4.2 Hemicelluloses 50 2.3.4.2.1 Xyloglucan 50 2.3.4.2.2 Xylan 50 2.3.4.2.3 Mannan or Glucomannan 52 2.3.4.2.4 Mixed‐Linkage Glucan (MLG) 52 2.3.4.3 Pectins 53 2.3.4.4 Chitin 54 2.3.4.5 Alginate 54 2.3.4.6 Marine Galactans 55 2.3.4.7 Storage Polysaccharides: Starch, Glycogen, and Laminarin 55 References 56 2.4 Proteins: From Chemical Properties to Cellular Function: A Practical Review of Actin Dynamics 59Stéphane Romero and François‐Xavier Campbell‐Valois 2.4.1 Introduction 59 2.4.2 Molecular Architecture of Proteins 59 2.4.2.1 Amino Acids 60 2.4.2.2 Peptide Bond 60 2.4.2.3 Primary Structure 64 2.4.3 Protein Folding 66 2.4.3.1 Peptide and Protein: Secondary Structure 66 2.4.3.2 3D Folding: Tertiary Structure 67 2.4.3.3 Quaternary Structure 68 2.4.3.4 Protein Folding and De Novo Design 70 2.4.4 Interacting Proteins for Cellular Functions 73 2.4.4.1 Protein Interactions 73 2.4.4.2 Enzymatic Activity of Proteins 75 2.4.4.3 Molecular Motors 77 2.4.5 Self‐ Assembly and Auto‐Organization: Regulation of the Actin Cytoskeleton Assembly 78 2.4.5.1 Origin of the Actin Treadmilling 79 2.4.5.2 Regulation of Actin Treadmilling 83 2.4.5.3 Arp2/3 and Formin‐Initiated Actin Assembly to Generate Mechanical Forces 83 2.4.5.4 Self‐Organization Properties and Force Generation Understood Using In Vitro Reconstituted Actin‐Based Nanomovements 85 2.4.5.5 Applications in Bionanotechnologies 85 2.4.6 Conclusion 87 References 88 3 Functional Biomolecular Engineering 93 3.1 Nucleic Acid Engineering 95Enora Prado, Mónika Ádok‐Sipiczki and Corinne Nardin 3.1.1 Introduction 95 3.1.2 How to Synthetically Produce Nucleic Acids? 95 3.1.2.1 The Chemical Approach 95 3.1.2.2 Polymerase Chain Reaction 96 3.1.2.3 Combinatorial Synthesis of Oligonucleotides and Gene Libraries: Aptamers 100 3.1.3 Secondary Structures in Nanotechnologies 102 3.1.3.1 Watson–Crick H‐Bonds 102 3.1.3.1.1 Stem‐Loop 102 3.1.3.1.2 Kissing Complex 103 3.1.3.2 Other Kind of H‐Bonding 103 3.1.3.2.1 G‐Quartets 103 3.1.3.2.2 Origami: Nano‐architecture on Surface 105 3.1.4 Conclusion 108 References 108 3.2 Protein Engineering 113Agathe Urvoas, Marie Valerio‐Lepiniec and Philippe Minard 3.2.1 Synthesis of Polypeptides: Chemical or Biological Approach? 113 3.2.2 Proteins: From Natural to Artificial Sources 114 3.2.2.1 How to Get the Coding Sequence of the Protein of Interest? 114 3.2.2.2 E. coli: A Cheap “Protein Factory” with a Diversified Tool Box 114 3.2.2.3 Common Expression Plasmids 116 3.2.2.4 Limits of Recombinant Protein Expression in E. coli 117 3.2.2.5 Some Solutions Are Available to Solve these Expression Problems 118 3.2.3 Proteins: A Large Repertoire of Functional Objects 118 3.2.3.1 Looking for Natural Proteins with Desired Function 118 3.2.3.2 From Protein Engineering to Protein Design 119 3.2.3.2.1 Modified Proteins Are Often Destabilized 119 3.2.3.2.2 Natural or Engineered Proteins: From Small Step to Giant Leap in Sequence Space 120 3.2.3.2.3 Computational Protein Design 120 3.2.3.2.4 Directed Evolution: A Diverse Repertoire Combined with a Selection Process 121 3.2.3.3 Combining Chemistry with Biological Objects 123 3.2.3.3.1 Labeling Natural Amino Acids 123 3.2.3.3.2 Bioorthogonal Labeling 123 3.2.3.3.3 Tag‐Mediated Labeling and Enzymatic Coupling 125 3.2.3.3.4 Enzyme‐Mediated Ligation 126 3.2.3.3.5 Quality Control of Labeled Biomolecules 126 References 126 4 The Composite Approach 129 4.1 Inorganic Nanoparticles 131Carole Aimé and Thibaud Coradin 4.1.1 Introduction 131 4.1.2 Overview of Inorganic Nanoparticles 132 4.1.3 Synthesis of Inorganic Nanoparticles 132 4.1.3.1 Basic Principles 132 4.1.3.2 Nanoparticles from Solutions 138 4.1.3.2.1 Ionic Solids 138 4.1.3.2.2 Metals 139 4.1.3.2.3 Metal Oxides 140 4.1.3.2.4 Morphological Control 144 4.1.4 Some Specific Properties of Inorganic Nanoparticles 145 4.1.5 Concluding Remarks 149 References 149 4.2 Hybrid Particles: Conjugation of Biomolecules to Nanomaterials 153Nikola Ž. Knežević, Laurence Raehm and Jean‐Olivier Durand 4.2.1 General Considerations 153 4.2.2 Functionalization of Nanoparticle Surface 154 4.2.2.1 Functionalization of Hydroxylated Surfaces 154 4.2.2.2 Functionalization of Hydride‐Containing Surfaces 154 4.2.2.3 Functionalization of Metal‐Containing Nanoparticles 155 4.2.2.4 Functionalization of Carbon‐Based Nanomaterials 155 4.2.3 Linker‐Mediated Conjugation of Biomolecules to Nanoparticles 155 4.2.3.1 Conjugation through Carbodiimide Chemistry 155 4.2.3.2 Carbamate, Urea, and Thiourea Linkage 156 4.2.3.3 Schiff Base Linkage 158 4.2.3.4 Multicomponent Linkage Formation 159 4.2.3.5 Biofunctionalization through Alkylation 160 4.2.3.6 Bioorthogonal Linkage Formation 161 4.2.3.7 Conjugation through Host–Guest Interactions 162 4.2.3.8 Linkage through Metal Coordination 162 4.2.3.9 Ligation through Complementary Base Pairing 164 4.2.3.10 Electrostatic Interactions 164 4.2.4 Conclusions 164 Acknowledgments 165 References 165 4.3 Biocomposites from Nanoparticles: From 1D to 3D Assemblies 169Carole Aimé and Thibaud Coradin 4.3.1 General Considerations 169 4.3.2 One‐Dimensional Bionanocomposites 170 4.3.3 Two‐Dimensional Organization of Nanoparticles 175 4.3.4 Three‐Dimensional Organization of Particles 175 4.3.5 Conclusion and Perspectives 180 References 180 5 Applications 185 5.1 Optical Properties 187Cordt Zollfrank and Daniel Van Opdenbosch 5.1.1 Introduction 187 5.1.2 Interactions of Light with Matter 189 5.1.3 Optics at the Nanoscale 190 5.1.3.1 Nanoscale Optical Processes 190 5.1.3.2 Nanoscale Confinement of Matter 191 5.1.3.3 Nanoscale Confinement of Radiations 191 5.1.4 Optical Properties of Bionanocomposites 191 5.1.4.1 Absorption Properties of Bionanocomposites 192 5.1.4.2 Emission Properties of Bionanocomposites 195 5.1.4.3 Structural Colors with Bionanocomposites 200 5.1.5 Conclusions 201 References 202 5.2 Magnetic Bionanocomposites: Current Trends, Scopes, and Applications 205Wei Li, Yuehan Wu, Xiaogang Luo and Shilin Liu 5.2.1 Introduction 205 5.2.2 Construction Strategies for Magnetic Biocomposites 208 5.2.2.1 The Blending Method 208 5.2.2.2 In Situ Synthesis Method 209 5.2.2.3 Grafting‐onto Method 210 5.2.3 Applications of Magnetic Biocomposites 212 5.2.3.1 Environmental Applications 212 5.2.3.1.1 Removal of Toxic Metal Ions 212 5.2.3.1.2 Removal of Dyes 216 5.2.3.1.3 Biocatalysis and Bioremediation 216 5.2.3.2 Biomedical Applications 218 5.2.3.2.1 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) 218 5.2.3.2.2 Cellular Therapy and Labeling 219 5.2.3.2.3 Tissue Engineering Applications 221 5.2.3.2.4 Drug Delivery 221 5.2.3.2.5 Tissue Regeneration 224 5.2.3.3 Biotechnological and Bioengineering Applications 225 5.2.3.3.1 Biosensing 226 5.2.3.3.2 Magnetically Responsive Films 228 5.2.4 Concluding Remarks and Future Trends 228 Acknowledgments 229 References 229 5.3 Mechanical Properties of Natural Biopolymer Nanocomposites 235Biqiong Chen 5.3.1 Introduction 235 5.3.2 Overview of Mechanical Properties of Polymer Nanocomposites and Their Measurement Methods 237 5.3.3 Solid Biopolymer Nanocomposites 237 5.3.4 Porous Biopolymer Nanocomposites 245 5.3.5 Biopolymer Nanocomposite Hydrogels 247 5.3.6 Conclusions 249 References 251 5.4 Bionanocomposite Materials for Biocatalytic Applications 257Sarah Christoph and Francisco M. Fernandes 5.4.1 Bionanocomposites and Biocatalysis 257 5.4.2 Form and Function in Bionanocomposite Materials for Biocatalysis 260 5.4.2.1 Bionanocomposites Structure 260 5.4.2.1.1 Biopolymers 260 5.4.2.1.2 The Inorganic Fraction 264 5.4.2.2 Key Biocatalysts 269 5.4.2.2.1 Nucleotides and Amino Acids 269 5.4.2.2.2 Enzymes 272 5.4.2.2.3 Whole Cells 273 5.4.3 Applications 277 5.4.3.1 Biosynthesis 277 5.4.3.2 Sensing Applications 281 5.4.3.3 Environmental Applications 283 5.4.3.4 Energy Applications of Biocatalytic Bionanocomposites 286 5.4.4 Conclusions and Perspectives 289 References 290 5.5 Nanocomposite Biomaterials 299Gisela Solange Alvarez and Martín Federico Desimone 5.5.1 Introduction 299 5.5.2 Natural Nanocomposites 301 5.5.2.1 Cellulosic Materials 301 5.5.2.2 Chitosan 305 5.5.2.3 Alginate 305 5.5.2.4 Collagen 307 5.5.2.5 Gelatin 307 5.5.2.6 Silk Fibroin 309 5.5.3 Synthetic Nanocomposites 309 5.5.3.1 PLLA and PLGA 309 5.5.3.2 Polyethylene Glycol 312 5.5.3.3 Methacrylate 312 5.5.3.4 Polyvinyl Alcohol 314 5.5.3.5 Polyurethanes 314 5.5.4 Conclusions 315 Acknowledgments 317 References 317 6 A Combination of Characterization Techniques 321Carole Aimé and Thibaud Coradin 6.1 Introductory Remarks 321 6.2 Chemical Analyses 322 6.2.1 Inductively Coupled Plasma 322 6.2.2 Infrared Spectroscopy 323 6.2.3 X‐Ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy and Auger Electron Spectroscopy 324 6.2.4 Energy–Dispersive X‐Ray Spectroscopy and Electron–Energy Loss Spectroscopy 328 6.3 Determining Size and Structure 329 6.3.1 Imaging 329 6.3.1.1 Electron Microscopy 330 6.3.1.2 Atomic Force Microscopy 333 6.3.2 Scattering Techniques 335 6.3.2.1 Small Angle Scattering 337 6.3.2.2 Dynamic Light Scattering and Zetametry 337 6.3.3 Monitoring Particle–Biomolecule Interactions 339 6.3.3.1 Electrophoresis 339 6.3.3.2 Circular Dichroism Spectroscopy 340 6.3.3.3 Isothermal Titration Calorimetry and Surface Plasmon Resonance 342 6.4 Materials Properties 344 6.4.1 Optical Properties 344 6.4.2 Mechanical Testing 346 6.4.2.1 Rheology 346 6.4.2.2 Compression Tests 347 6.4.2.3 Tensile Tests 348 6.4.2.4 Relaxation Tests 348 6.4.2.5 Dynamic Mechanical Analysis 349 6.4.2.6 Indentation 349 6.4.2.7 Mechanical Testing of Hydrogels 349 6.4.3 Magnetic Measurements 350 6.4.4 Biological Properties 353 References 355 Index 359

Read more less

Book SynopsisSince the publication of the successful first edition of the book in 2010, the field has matured and a large number of advancements have been made to the science of polymer nanotube nanocomposites (PNT) in terms of synthesis, filler surface modification, as well as properties. Moreover, a number of commercial applications have been realized. The aim of this second volume of the book is, thus, to update the information presented in the first volume as well as to incorporate the recent research and industrial developments. This edited volume brings together contributions from a variety of senior scientists in the field of polymer nanotube composites technology to shed light on the recent advances in these commercially important areas of polymer technology. The book provides the following features: Reviews the various synthesis techniques, properties and applications of the polymer nanocomposite systems. Describes the functionalization strategies for singleTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Polymer Nanotube Nanocomposites: A Review of Synthesis Methods, Properties and Applications 1 Joel Fawaz and Vikas Mittal 1.1 Introduction 2 1.2 Methods of Nanotube Nanocomposites Synthesis 4 1.3 Properties of Polymer Nanotube Nanocomposites 18 1.4 Applications 38 References 40 2 Functionalization Strategies for Single-Walled Carbon Nanotubes Integration into Epoxy Matrices 45 J.M. González-Domínguez, A.M. Díez-Pascual, A. Ansón-Casaos, M.A. Gómez-Fatou, and M. T. Martínez 2.1 Introduction 46 2.2 Covalent Strategies for the Production of SWCNT 51 2.3 Non-covalent Strategies for the Production of SWCNT/Epoxy Composites 62 2.4 Effect of Functionalization on the Epoxy Physical Properties 76 2.5 Applications of Functionalized SWCNTs in Epoxy Composites 104 2.6 Concluding Remarks and Future Outlook 106 Acknowledgements 108 References 109 3 Multiscale Modeling of Polymer?Nanotube Nanocomposites 117 Maenghyo Cho and Seunghwa Yang 3.1 Introduction 117 3.2 Molecular Modeling and Simulation of CNT-Polymer Nanocomposites 121 3.3 Micromechanics Modeling and Simulation of CNT-Polymer Nanocomposites 132 3.4 Fully Integrated Multiscale Model for Elastoplastic Behavior with Imperfect Interface 145 3.5 Conclusion and Perspective on Future Trends 158 References 160 4 SEM and TEM Characterization of Polymer Nanotube Nanocomposites 167 Francisco Solá 4.1 Introduction 167 4.2 Imaging CNTs in Polymer Matrices by SEM 168 4.3 Mechanical Properties of CNT/Polymer Nanocomposites by In-Situ SEM 172 4.4 Imaging CNT in Polymer Matrices by TEM 176 4.5 Mechanical Properties of CNT/Polymer Nanocomposites by In-Situ TEM 180 4.6 Conclusions and Future Outlook 181 Acknowledgement 182 References 183 5 Polymer-Nanotube Nanocomposites for Transfemoral Sockets 187 S. Arun and S. Kanagaraj 5.1 Introduction 188 5.2 Materials Used for the Socket System 190 5.3 Summary 204 Acknowledgements 204 References 204 6 Micro-Patterning of Polymer Nanotube Nanocomposites 211 Naga S. Korivi 6.1 Introduction 211 6.2 Micro-Patterning Methods 213 6.3 Conclusions 230 Acknowledgments 231 References 231 7 Carbon Nanotube-Based Hybrid Materials and Their Polymer Composites 239 Tianxi Liu, Wei Fan, and Chao Zhang 7.1 Introduction 240 7.2 Structures and Properties of Carbon Nanomaterials 242 7.3 Strategies for the Hybridization of CNTs with Carbon Nanomaterials 247 7.4 Preparation of CNT-Based Hybrid Reinforced Polymer Nanocomposites 257 7.5 Physical Properties of CNT-Based Hybrid Reinforced Polymer Nanocomposites 262 7.6 Summary 272 Acknowledgements 273 References 273 8 Polymer-Carbon Nanotube Nanocomposite Foams 279 Marcelo Antunes and José Ignacio Velasco 8.1 Introduction 279 8.2 Basic Concepts of Polymer Nanocomposite Foams 281 8.3 Main Polymer Nanocomposite Foaming Technologies 282 8.4 Polymer-Carbon Nanotube Nanocomposite Foams 287 8.5 Recent Developments and New Applications of Polymer- Carbon Nanotube Nanocomposite Foams 312 8.6 Conclusions 320 Acknowledgements 322 References 323 9 Processing and Properties of Carbon Nanotube/Polycarbonate Composites 333 Shailaja Pande, Bhanu Pratap Singh, and Rakesh Behari Mathur 9.1 Introduction 333 9.2 Fabrication/ Processing of CNT/PC Composites 335 9.3 Mechanical Properties of CNT/PC Composites 344 9.4 Electrical Properties of CNT/PC Composites 355 9.5 Conclusions 359 References 361 10 Advanced Microscopy Techniques for a Better Understanding of the Polymer/Nanotube Composite Properties 365 K. Masenelli-Varlot, C. Gauthier, L. Chazeau, F. Dalmas, T. Epicier, and J.Y. Cavaillé 10.1 Introduction 365 10.2 Near-Field Microscopies 367 10.3 Transmission Electron Microscopy 372 10.4 Scanning Electron Microscopy 387 10.5 Focused Ion Beam Microscopy 395 10.6 Conclusions 396 Acknowledgements 398 References 398 11 Visualization of CNTs in Polymer Composites 405 Wenjing Li and Wolfgang Bauhofer 11.1 Introduction 405 11.2 Experimental 408 11.3 Visualization of CNTs at High Accelerating Voltage (5-15 kV) 408 11.4 Visualization of CNTs at Low Accelerating Voltage (0.3-5 kV) 417 11.5 Essential Requirements and Tips for CNT Visualization 423 11.6 Conclusion 424 Acknowledgement 425 References (with DOI) 425 Reference List 426 12 Polymer Nanotube Composites: Latest Challenges and Applications 429 Amal M. K. Esawi and Mahmoud M. Farag 12.1 Carbon Nanotubes 430 12.2 Case Studies 440 12.3 Conclusions 459 References 460 Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisAddressing a cutting-edge, multidisciplinary field, this book reviews nanomaterials and their biomedical applications. It covers regeneration, implants, adhesives, and biosensors and strategies for more efficient therapy, diagnosis, and drug delivery with the use of nanotechnology.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xi Preface xiii 1 Nanomaterials for Medicine 1 Mustafa O. Guler and Ayse B. Tekinay 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Nanoscale Material Properties 2 1.3 Nanomaterials for Understanding Disease Pathways 2 1.4 Nanomaterials for Therapy 3 1.5 Challenges and Future Prospects 5 2 Nanosized Delivery Systems for Tissue Regeneration 7 Goksu Cinar, Didem Mumcuoglu, Ayse B. Tekinay, and Mustafa O. Guler 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 Delivery of Protein Therapeutics with Nanocarriers for Tissue Regeneration 10 2.2.1 GFs and Cytokines 10 2.3 Gene and siRNA Delivery with Nanocarriers for Tissue Regeneration 13 2.3.1 Gene Delivery 13 2.3.2 siRNA Delivery 15 2.4 Systemic Targeting and Cellular Internalization Strategies for Tissue Regeneration 15 2.4.1 Targeted Delivery 15 2.4.2 Cellular Internalization Strategies 18 2.5 Future Perspectives 20 References 22 3 Nanomaterials for Neural Regeneration 33 Melike Sever, Busra Mammadov, Mevhibe Gecer, Mustafa O. Guler, and Ayse B. Tekinay 3.1 Introduction 33 3.1.1 Extracellular Matrix of Central Nervous System 33 3.1.2 ECM of Peripheral Nervous System 37 3.1.3 Urgent Need for Materials to Induce Regeneration in Nervous Tissue 39 3.2 Nanomaterials for Neural Regeneration 40 3.2.1 Physical Functionalization of Nanomaterials to Induce Neural Differentiation 40 3.2.2 Effects of Mechanical Stiffness on Cellular Behavior 40 3.2.3 Effects of Dimensionality on Cellular Behavior 42 3.2.4 Effects of Substrate Topography on Cell Behavior 43 3.2.5 Effects of Electrical Conductivity on Cell Behavior 44 3.3 Chemical and Biological Functionalization of Nanomaterials for Neural Differentiation 45 3.3.1 Effects of Biologically Active Molecules on Cell Behavior 45 3.3.2 Effects of Chemical Groups on Cellular Behavior 46 3.3.3 Effects of Biofunctionalization on Cellular Behavior Through ECM‐Derived Short Peptides 48 3.4 Conclusion 50 References 51 4 Therapeutic Nanomaterials for Cartilage Regeneration 59 Elif Arslan, Seher Ustun Yaylacı, Mustafa O. Guler, and Ayse B. Tekinay 4.1 Introduction 59 4.2 Current Treatment Methods for Cartilage Injuries 63 4.3 Tissue Engineering Efforts 66 4.3.1 Natural Polymers 67 4.3.2 Synthetic Polymers 69 4.3.3 Composite Materials 70 4.3.4 Physical Stimuli 71 4.4 Clinical Therapeutics for Cartilage Regeneration 72 4.5 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 73 References 78 5 Wound Healing Applications of Nanomaterials 87 Berna Senturk, Gozde Uzunalli, Rashad Mammadov, Mustafa O. Guler, and Ayse B. Tekinay 5.1 Introduction 87 5.1.1 The Structure of Healthy Mammalian Skin 88 5.1.2 The Mechanisms of Wound Healing 89 5.1.3 Repair Process in Chronic Wounds 94 5.2 Applications of Nanomaterials for the Enhancement of Wound Healing Process 95 5.2.1 Artificial Skin 96 5.2.2 Natural Nanomaterials for Wound Healing 97 5.2.3 Synthetic Nanomaterials for Wound Healing 100 5.2.4 Wound Dressings Containing Growth Factors 101 5.2.5 Biomimetic Materials 102 5.2.6 Current Challenges in the Design of Nanomaterials for Chronic Wound Management 103 5.3 Peptide Nanofiber Gels for Wound Healing 105 5.3.1 Relevance of Nanofibrous Structure of Peptide Gels for Wound Healing 106 5.3.2 Engineered PA Nanofiber Gels for Wound Healing and Insights into Various Designs 107 References 110 6 Nanomaterials for Bone Tissue Regeneration and Orthopedic Implants 119 Gulcihan Gulseren, Melis Goktas, Hakan Ceylan, Ayse B. Tekinay, and Mustafa O. Guler 6.1 Introduction 119 6.2 Bone Matrix 120 6.2.1 Organic Matrix and Bioactivity 120 6.3 Inorganic Matrix, Mineralization, and Bone Organization 122 6.3.1 Mechanical Properties and Structural Hierarchy of Bone Tissue 123 6.4 Regulation of Bone Matrix in Adult Tissue 125 6.4.1 Angiogenic Factors in Bone Remodeling 126 6.5 Strategies for Bone Tissue Regeneration 127 6.5.1 Hard Grafts for Bone Regeneration 127 6.6 Soft Grafts for Bone Regeneration 131 6.6.1 Peptide‐Based Bone Grafts 132 6.6.2 Polymer Nanocomposites as Bone Grafts 134 6.7 Future Perspectives 138 References 138 7 Nanomaterials for the Repair and Regeneration of Dental Tissues 153 Gulistan Tansık, Alper Devrim Ozkan, Mustafa O. Guler, and Ayse B. Tekinay 7.1 Introduction 153 7.2 Formation of Dental and Osseous Tissues 155 7.3 Dental Implants 156 7.3.1 Metallic Implants 158 7.3.2 Ceramic Implants 158 7.3.3 Polymeric Implants 159 7.4 Osseointegration of Dental Implants 159 7.5 Uses of Nanotechnology in the Development of Dental Implants 160 7.5.1 Enhancement of the Osseointegration Process 161 7.5.2 Pulp and Dentin Tissue Regeneration 162 7.5.3 Whole Tooth Regeneration 165 7.6 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 166 References 166 8 Nanomaterials as Tissue Adhesives 173 I. Ceren Yasa, Hakan Ceylan, Ayse B. Tekinay, and Mustafa O. Guler 8.1 Introduction 173 8.2 Tissue Adhesives Based on Synthetic Polymers 176 8.3 Naturally Derived Tissue Adhesives 180 8.4 Bioinspired Strategies 182 8.5 Nanoenabled Adhesives 186 8.6 Conclusion and Future Prospects 186 References 189 9 Advances in Nanoparticle‐Based Medical Diagnostic and Therapeutic Techniques 197 Melis Sardan, Alper Devrim Ozkan, Aygul Zengin, Ayse B. Tekinay, and Mustafa O. Guler 9.1 Introduction 197 9.2 NPs used in MRI 200 9.2.1 T1 CAs 201 9.2.2 T2 CAs 205 9.2.3 Dual Modal Contrast Agents 207 9.3 NPs used in Computed Tomography 208 9.3.1 Noble Metal‐Based NPs 209 9.3.2 Heavy Metal‐Based NPs 211 9.4 NPs used in Optical and Fluorescence Imaging 213 9.4.1 Quantum Dots 214 9.4.2 AuNPs 216 9.4.3 UCNPs 217 9.5 Theranostic Approaches and Multimodal Systems 218 9.6 Overlook and Future Directions 222 References 223 10 Biosensors for Early Disease Diagnosis 235 Ahmet E. Topal, Alper Devrim Ozkan, Aykutlu Dana, Ayse B. Tekinay, and Mustafa O. Guler 10.1 Introduction 235 10.2 Biosensor Elements 237 10.2.1 Recognition Elements 237 10.2.2 Output Type and Detection Techniques 239 10.2.3 Optical Biosensors 248 10.2.4 Electrical and Electrochemical Biosensors 250 10.2.5 Mechanical Biosensors 251 10.2.6 Other Biosensor Types 252 10.3 The Impact of Nanotechnology and Nanomaterials in Biosensor Design 253 10.4 Early Diagnosis and Biosensor‐Based Disease Detection 255 10.5 Conclusion and Future Directions 258 References 259 11 Safety of Nanomaterials 271 Nuray Gunduz, Elif Arslan, Mustafa O. Guler, and Ayse B. Tekinay 11.1 Introduction 271 11.2 Characterization, Design, and Synthesis of Nanomaterials 272 11.2.1 Chemical Identity and Physicochemical Properties 272 11.2.2 Biological Identity 275 11.3 Interactions at the Cell–Material Interface 277 11.3.1 Intracellular Activity 278 11.3.2 Cellular Uptake Mechanisms 283 11.4 Assays for Cell Viability/Proliferation 283 11.4.1 Assays for Oxidative Stress and Apoptosis Mechanisms 284 11.4.2 E valuation of Uptake and Accumulation of ENMs 284 11.4.3 Genotoxicity Assays 285 11.5 Animal Models and Long‐Term Risk Assessment 286 11.5.1 The Blood–Brain Barrier 286 11.6 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 290 References 291 Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisOver 170 contributions (invited talks, oral presentations, and posters) were presented by participants from universities, research institutions, and industry, which offered interdisciplinary discussions indicating strong scientific and technological interest in the field of nanostructured systems. This issue contains 23 peer-reviewed papers that cover various aspects and the latest developments related to nanoscaled materials and functional ceramics.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi MULTIFUNCTIONAL MATERIALS Oxynitride Glasses as Grain Boundary Phases in Silicon Nitride: Correlations of Chemistry and Properties 3Stuart Hampshire Preparation and Properties of Aluminosilicate Glasses Containing N and F 15Michael J. Pomeroy Comparison of Conventional and Microwave Sintering of Bioceramics 23Anne Leriche, Etienne Savary, Anthony Thuault, Jean-Christophe Hornez, Michel Descamps, and Sylvain Marinel A Novel Additive Manufacturing Technology for High-Performance Ceramics 33Johannes Homa and Martin Schwentenwein Characterization of Matrix Materials for Additive Manufacturing of Silicon Carbide-Based Composites 41Mrityunjay Singh, Michael C. Halbig, and Shirley X. Zhu An Industrial Microwave (Hybrid) System for In-Line Processing of High Temperature Ceramics 49Ramesh D. Peelamedu and Donald A. Seccombe Jr. Comparison of Properties of YSZ Prepared by Microwave and Conventional Processing 61Kanchan L. Singh, Anirudh P. Singh, Ajay Kumar, and S.S. Sekhon Diffusion Bonding and Interfacial Characterization of Sintered Fiber Bonded Silicon Carbide Ceramics using Boron–Molybdenum Interlayers 73H. Tsuda, S. Mori, M. C. Halbig, M. Singh, and R. Asthana Mechanical Behavior of Green Ceramic Tapes used in a Viscoelastic Shaping Process 81Ming-Jen Pan, Stephanie Wimmer, and Virginia DeGiorgi Mechanical Behavior of Foamed Insulating Ceramics 89Vania R. Salvini, Dirceu Spinelli, and Victor C. Pandolfelli Stress Estimation for Multiphase Ceramics Laminates during Sintering 101Kouichi Yasuda,Tadachika Nakayama, and Satoshi Tanaka Advanced Measurements of Indentation Fracture Resistance of Alumina by the Powerful Optical Microscopy for Small Ceramic Products 107Hiroyuki Miyazaki and Yu-ichi Yoshizawa The Microstructure and Dielectric Properties of Sm2O3 Doped Ba0.6Sr0.4TiO3-MgO Compound for Phase Shifters 115Xiaohong Wang, Mengjie Wang, and Wenzhong Lu Dielectric Properties of BaTiO3 Ceramics and Curie-Weiss and Modified Curie-Weiss Affected by Fractal Morphology 123 NANOSTRUCTURED MATERIALS Understanding Diamond Nanoparticle Evolution during Zirconia Spark Plasma Sintering 137Kathy Lu, Wenle Li, and George Li Influence of Ti4+ on the Energetics and Microstructure of SnO2 Nanoparticles 145Joice Miagava, Douglas Gouvêa, Ricardo H. R. Castro, and Alexandra NavrotskyAnnealing Effect on the Structural, Morphological, and Photovoltaic Properties of ZnO-CNTs Nanocomposite Thin Films 153Huda Abdullah, Azimah Omar, Izamarlina Asshaari, Mohd Ambar Yarmo, Mohd Zikri Razali, Sahbudin Shaari, Savisha Mahalingam, and Aisyah Bolhan Investigation of Multilayer Superhard Ti-Hf-Si-N/NbN/Al2O3 Coatings for High Performance Protection 163A. D. Pogrebnjak, A. S. Kaverina, V. M. Beresnev, Y. Takeda, K. Oyoshi, H. Murakami, A. P. Shypylenko, M. G. Kovaleva, M.S. Prozorova, O. V. Kolisnichenko, B. Zholybekov, and D. A. Kolesnikov Influence of the Structure and Elemental Composition on the Physical and Mechanical Properties of (TiZrHfVNb)N Nanostructured Coatings 173A. D. Pogrebnjak, I. V. Yakushchenko, O. V. Bondar, A. A. Bagdasaryan, V. M. Beresnev, D.A. Kolesnikov, G. Abadias, P. Chartier, Y. Takeda, and M. O. Bilokur Effects of Mg Contents on ZnAl2O4 Thin Films by Sol Gel Method and Its Application 185Huda Abdullah, Wan Nasarudin Wan Jalal, Mohd Syafiq Zulfakar, Badariah Bais, Sahbudin Shaari, Mohammad Tariqul Islam, and Sarada Idris Synthesis and Characterization of Si-Doped Carbon Nanotubes 197Qi Zhen, Shaoming Dong, Yanmei Kan, Yue Leng, Jianbao Hu Structural and Morphology of Zn1-xCuxS Films as Anti-Reflecting Coating (ARC) Affected the Cell Performance 205Huda Abdullah, Ili Salwani, and Sahbudin Saari Nanoceramics Processing: Revolutionizing Medicine 213Qi Wang and Thomas J. Webster Author Index 219

Read more less

Book SynopsisApplied Nanoindentation in Advanced Materials is a comprehensive, self-contained reference covering applied aspects of nanoindentation in advanced materials. With contributions from leading researchers in the field, this book is divided into three parts.Table of ContentsList of Contributors xvii Preface xxiii Part I 1 1 Determination of Residual Stresses by Nanoindentation 3P-L. Larsson 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Theoretical Background 5 1.3 Determination of Residual Stresses 12 1.3.1 Low Hardening Materials and Equi-biaxial Stresses 12 1.3.2 General Residual Stresses 13 1.3.3 Strain-hardening Effects 15 1.3.4 Conclusions and Remarks 15 References 16 2 Nanomechanical Characterization of Carbon Films 19Ben D. Beake and TomaszW. Liskiewicz 2.1 Introduction 19 2.1.1 Types of DLC Coatings and their Mechanical Properties 19 2.1.2 Carbon Films Processing Methods 20 2.1.3 Residual Stresses in Carbon Films 21 2.1.4 Friction Properties of Carbon Films 22 2.1.5 Multilayering Strategies 23 2.1.6 Applications of Carbon Films 24 2.1.7 Optimization/testing Challenges 24 2.2 Factors Influencing Reliable and Comparable Hardness and Elastic Modulus Determination 24 2.2.1 The International Standard for Depth-sensing Indentation: EN ISO 14577–4 : 2007 24 2.2.2 Challenges in Ultra-thin Films 27 2.2.3 Indenter Geometry 28 2.2.4 Surface Roughness 28 2.3 Deformation in Indentation Contact 30 2.3.1 The Relationship Between H/E and Plastic and ElasticWork in Nanoindentation 30 2.3.2 Variation in H/E and Plasticity Index for Different DLC Films 31 2.3.3 Cracking and Delamination 32 2.3.4 Coatings on Si: Si Phase Transformation 33 2.4 Nano-scratch Testing 34 2.4.1 Scan Speed and Loading Rate 35 2.4.2 Influence of Probe Radius 36 2.4.3 Contact Pressure 36 2.4.4 Role of the Si Substrate in Nano-scratch Testing 38 2.4.5 Failure Behaviour of ta-C on Si 40 2.4.6 Film Stress and Thickness 43 2.4.7 Repetitive Nano-wear by Multi-pass Nano-scratch Tests 44 2.4.8 Load Dependence of Friction 46 2.5 Impact and Fatigue Resistance of DLC Films Using Nano-impact Testing 46 2.5.1 Compositionally Graded a-C and a-C:H Coatings on M42 Tool Steel 49 2.5.2 DLC/Cr Coating on Steel 51 2.5.3 PACVD a-C:H Coatings on M2 Steel 51 2.5.4 DLC Films on Si-film Thickness, Probe Geometry, Impact Force and Interfacial Toughness 52 2.6 Wear Resistance of Amorphous Carbon Films Using Nano-fretting Testing 54 2.6.1 Nano-fretting: State-of-the-art 55 2.6.2 Nano-fretting of Thin DLC Films on Si 55 2.6.3 Nano-fretting of DLC Coatings on Steel 57 2.7 Conclusion 58 References 59 3 Mechanical Evaluation of Nanocoatings under Extreme Environments for Application in Energy Systems 69E.J. Rubio, G. Martinez, S.K. Gullapalli, M. Noor-A-Alam and C.V. Ramana 3.1 Introduction 69 3.2 Thermal Barrier Coatings 70 3.2.1 Nanoindentation Characterization of TBCs 72 3.2.2 Mechanical Properties of Hafnium-based TBCs 74 3.3 Nanoindentation Evaluation of Coatings for Nuclear Power Generation Applications 76 3.3.1 Evaluation ofW-based Materials for Nuclear Application 77 3.4 Conclusions and Outlook 80 Acknowledgments 81 References 81 4 Evaluation of the Nanotribological Properties of Thin Films 83ShojiroMiyake and MeiWang 4.1 Introduction 83 4.2 Evaluation Methods of Nanotribology 83 4.3 Nanotribology Evaluation Methods and Examples 84 4.3.1 Nanoindentation Evaluation 84 4.3.2 Nanowear and Friction Evaluation 88 4.3.2.1 Nanowear Properties 89 4.3.2.2 Frictional Properties with Different Lubricants 91 4.3.2.3 Nanowear and Frictional Properties, Evaluated with and without Vibrations 95 4.3.3 Evaluation of the Force Modulation 98 4.3.4 Evaluation of the Mechanical and Other Physical Properties 102 4.4 Conclusions 108 References 108 5 Nanoindentation on Tribological Coatings 111Francisco J.G. Silva 5.1 Introduction 111 5.2 Relevant Properties on Coatings for Tribological Applications 116 5.3 How can Nanoindentation Help Researchers to Characterize Coatings? 116 5.3.1 Thin Coatings Nanoindentation Procedures 118 5.3.2 Hardness Determination 120 5.3.3 Young’s Modulus Determination 123 5.3.4 Tensile Properties Determination 124 5.3.5 Fracture Toughness inThin Films 125 5.3.6 Coatings Adhesion Analysis 126 5.3.7 Stiffness and Other Mechanical Properties 127 5.3.8 Simulation and Models Applied to Nanoindentation 128 References 129 6 Nanoindentation of Macro-porous Materials for Elastic Modulus and Hardness Determination 135Zhangwei Chen 6.1 Introduction 135 6.1.1 Nanoindentation Fundamentals for Dense Materials 135 6.1.2 Introduction to Porous Materials 137 6.1.3 Studies of Elastic Properties of Porous Materials 138 6.2 Nanoindentation of Macro-porous Bulk Ceramics 140 6.3 Nanoindentation of Bone Materials 143 6.4 Nanoindentation of Macro-porous Films 144 6.4.1 Substrate Effect 145 6.4.2 Densification Effect 147 6.4.3 Surface Roughness Effect 149 6.5 Concluding Remarks 151 Acknowledgements 151 References 151 7 Nanoindentation Applied to DC Plasma Nitrided Parts 157Silvio Francisco Brunatto and CarlosMaurício Lepienski 7.1 Introduction 157 7.2 Basic Aspects of DC Plasma Nitrided Parts 160 7.2.1 The Potential Distribution for an Abnormal Glow Discharge 160 7.2.2 Plasma-surface Interaction in Cathode Surface 161 7.2.3 Electrical Configuration Modes in DC Plasma Nitriding 162 7.3 Basic Aspects of Nanoindentation in Nitrided Surfaces 163 7.4 Examples of Nanoindentation Applied to DC Plasma Nitrided Parts 167 7.4.1 Mechanical Polishing: Nanoindentation in Niobium 169 7.4.2 Surface Roughness: Nanoindentation in DC Plasma Nitrided Parts 170 7.4.2.1 Nanoindentation in DC Plasma Nitrided Niobium 170 7.4.2.2 Nanoindentation in DC Plasma Nitrided Titanium 174 7.4.2.3 Nanoindentation in DC Plasma Nitrided Martensitic Stainless Steel 175 7.4.3 Nitrogen-concentration Gradients: Nanoindentation in DC Plasma Nitrided Tool Steel 176 7.4.4 Crystallographic Orientation: Nanoindentation in DC Plasma Nitrided Austenitic Stainless Steels 177 7.5 Conclusion 178 Acknowledgements 179 References 179 8 Nanomechanical Properties of Defective Surfaces 183Oscar Rodríguez de la Fuente 8.1 Introduction 183 8.1.1 The Role of Surface Defects in Plasticity 183 8.1.2 Experimental Techniques for Visualization and Generation of Surface Defects 184 8.1.3 Approaches to Study and Probe Nanomechanical Properties 185 8.2 Homogeneous and Heterogeneous Dislocation Nucleation 186 8.2.1 Homogeneous Dislocation Nucleation 186 8.2.2 Heterogeneous Dislocation Nucleation 188 8.3 Surface Steps 190 8.3.1 Studies on Surface Steps 191 8.4 Subsurface Defects 194 8.4.1 Sub-surface Vacancies 195 8.4.2 Sub-surface Impurities and Dislocations 195 8.5 Rough Surfaces 197 8.6 Conclusions 200 Acknowledgements 200 References 200 9 Viscoelastic and Tribological Behavior of Al2O3 Reinforced Toughened Epoxy Hybrid Nanocomposites 205Mandhakini Mohandas and AlagarMuthukaruppan 9.1 Introduction 205 9.2 Experimental 206 9.2.1 Materials 206 9.2.2 FTIR Analysis 208 9.2.3 Results and Discussion 209 9.2.3.1 Viscoeleastic Properties 210 9.2.3.2 Hardness and Modulus by Nanoindentation 214 9.3 Conclusion 219 References 220 10 Nanoindentation of Hybrid Foams 223Anne Jung, Zhaoyu Chen and Stefan Diebels 10.1 Introduction 223 10.1.1 Motivation 223 10.1.2 State of the art of Nanoindentation of Metal and Metal Foam 226 10.2 Sample Material and Preparation 230 10.2.1 Al Material and Coating Process 230 10.2.2 Sample Preparation for Nanoindentation 231 10.3 Nanoindentation Experiments 232 10.3.1 Experimental Setup 232 10.3.2 Results and Discussion 232 10.4 Conclusions and Outlook 239 Acknowledgements 240 References 240 11 AFM-based Nanoindentation of Cellulosic Fibers 247Christian Ganser and Christian Teichert 11.1 Introduction 247 11.2 Experimental 248 11.2.1 AFM Instrumentation 248 11.2.2 AFM-based Nanoindentation 250 11.2.3 Comparison with Results of Classical NI 255 11.2.4 Sample Preparation 256 11.3 Mechanical Properties of Cellulose Fibers 257 11.3.1 Pulp Fibers 257 11.3.2 Swollen Viscose Fibers 259 11.4 Conclusions and Outlook 265 Acknowledgments 265 References 266 12 Evaluation of Mechanical and Tribological Properties of Coatings for Stainless Steel 269A.Mina, J.C. Caicedo,W. Aperador, M. Mozafari and H.H. Caicedo 12.1 Introduction 269 12.2 Experimental Details 270 12.3 Results and Discussion 271 12.3.1 Crystal Lattice Arrangement of β-TCP/Ch Coatings 271 12.3.2 Surface Coating Analysis 272 12.3.3 Morphological Analysis of the β-TCP-Ch Coatings 274 12.3.4 Mechanical Properties 276 12.3.5 Tribological Properties 279 12.3.6 SurfaceWear Analysis 280 12.3.7 Adhesion Behaviour 281 12.4 Conclusions 283 Acknowledgements 283 References 283 13 Nanoindentation in Metallic Glasses 287Vahid Nekouie, Anish Roy and Vadim V. Silberschmidt 13.1 Introduction 287 13.1.1 Motivation 287 13.1.2 Nanoindentation Studies of Metallic Glasses 288 13.1.2.1 Pile-up and Sink-in 291 13.1.2.2 Indentation Size Effect 293 13.2 Experimental Studies 296 13.2.1 Nano Test Platform III Indentation System 296 13.2.2 Calibration 297 13.2.2.1 Frame Compliance 298 13.2.2.2 Cross-hair Calibration 298 13.2.2.3 Indenter Area Function 298 13.2.3 Experimental Procedure 301 13.2.4 Results and Discussion 301 13.3 Conclusions 307 References 308 Part II 313 14 Molecular Dynamics Modeling of Nanoindentation 315C.J. Ruestes, E.M. Bringa, Y. Gao and H.M. Urbassek 14.1 Introduction 315 14.2 Methods 316 14.2.1 The Indentation Tip 318 14.2.2 Control Methods Used in Experiment and in MD Simulations 319 14.2.3 Penetration Rate 320 14.3 Interatomic Potentials 321 14.3.1 Elastic Constants 321 14.3.2 Generalized Stacking Fault Energies 322 14.4 Elastic Regime 324 14.5 The Onset of Plasticity 325 14.5.1 Evolution of the Dislocation Network 325 14.5.2 Contact Area and Hardness 327 14.5.3 Indentation Rate Effect 328 14.5.4 Tip Diameter Effect 329 14.6 The Plastic Zone: Dislocation Activity 329 14.6.1 Face-centered Cubic Metals 329 14.6.2 Body-centered Cubic Metals 330 14.6.3 Quantification of Dislocation Length and Density 331 14.6.4 Pile-up 333 14.6.5 Geometrically-necessary Dislocations and the Identification of Intrinsic Length-scales from Hardness Simulations 334 14.7 Outlook 336 Acknowledgements 337 References 337 15 Continuum Modelling and Simulation of Indentation in Transparent Single Crystalline Minerals and Energetic Solids 347J.D. Clayton, B.B. Aydelotte, R. Becker, C.D. Hilton and J. Knap 15.1 Introduction 347 15.2 Theory: MaterialModelling 349 15.2.1 General Multi-field Continuum Theory 349 15.2.2 Crystal Plasticity Theory 350 15.2.3 Phase FieldTheory for Twinning 351 15.3 Application: Indentation of RDX Single Crystals 352 15.3.1 Review of PriorWork 353 15.3.2 New Results and Analysis 354 15.4 Application: Indentation of Calcite Single Crystals 356 15.4.1 Review of PriorWork 359 15.4.2 New Results and Analysis 361 15.5 Conclusions 364 Acknowledgements 365 References 365 16 NanoindentationModeling: From Finite Element to Atomistic Simulations 369Daniel Esqué- de los Ojos and Jordi Sort 16.1 Introduction 369 16.2 Scaling and Dimensional Analysis Applied to IndentationModelling 370 16.2.1 Geometrical Similarity of Indenter Tips 370 16.2.2 Dimensional Analysis 371 16.2.3 Dimensional Analysis Applied to Extraction of Mechanical Properties 372 16.3 Finite Element Simulations of Advanced Materials 374 16.3.1 Nanocrystalline Porous Materials and Pressure-sensitive Models 375 16.3.2 Finite Element Simulations of 1D Structures: Nanowires 378 16.3.3 Continuum Crystal Plasticity Finite Element Simulations: Nanoindentation of Thin Solid Films 380 16.4 Nucleation and Interaction of Dislocations During Single Crystal Nanoindentaion: Atomistic Simulations 383 16.4.1 Dislocation Dynamics Simulations 383 16.4.2 Molecular Dynamics Simulations 385 References 386 17 Nanoindentation in silico of Biological Particles 393Olga Kononova, Kenneth A. Marx and Valeri Barsegov 17.1 Introduction 393 17.2 ComputationalMethodology of Nanoindentation in silico 395 17.2.1 Molecular Modelling of Biological Particles 395 17.2.2 Coarse-graining: Self-organized Polymer (SOP) Model 396 17.2.3 MultiscaleModeling Primer: SOP Model Parameterization for Microtubule Polymers 398 17.2.4 Using Graphics Processing Units as Performance Accelerators 399 17.2.5 Virtual AFM Experiment: Forced Indentation in silico of Biological Particles 401 17.3 Biological Particles 403 17.3.1 Cylindrical Particles: Microtubule Polymers 403 17.3.2 Spherical Particles: CCMV Shell 404 17.4 Nanoindentation in silico: Probing Reversible Changes in Near-equilibrium Regime 406 17.4.1 Probing Reversible Transitions 406 17.4.2 Studying Near-equilibrium Dynamics 407 17.5 Application of in silico Nanoindentation: Dynamics of Deformation of MT and CCMV 409 17.5.1 Long Polyprotein – Microtubule Protofilament 409 17.5.2 Cylindrical Particle – Microtubule Polymer 411 17.5.3 Spherical Particle – CCMV Protein Shell 416 17.6 Concluding Remarks 421 References 424 18 Modeling and Simulations in Nanoindentation 429Yi Sun and Fanlin Zeng 18.1 Introduction 429 18.2 Simulations of Nanoindention on Polymers 430 18.2.1 Models and Simulation Methods 430 18.2.2 Load-displacement Responses 431 18.2.3 Hardness and Young’s Modulus 433 18.2.4 The Mechanism of Mechanical Behaviours and Properties 437 18.3 Simulations of Nanoindention on Crystals 441 18.3.1 Models and Simulation Methods 442 18.3.2 The Load-displacement Responses 444 18.3.3 Dislocation Nucleation 446 18.3.4 Mechanism of Dislocation Emission 449 18.4 Conclusions 455 Acknowledgments 456 References 456 19 Nanoindentation of Advanced Ceramics: Applications to ZrO2 Materials 459Joan Josep Roa Rovira, Emilio Jiménez Piqué andMarc J. Anglada Gomila 19.1 Introduction 459 19.2 IndentationMechanics 460 19.2.1 Deformation Mechanics 460 19.2.2 Elastic Contact 461 19.2.3 Elasto/plastic Contact 462 19.3 Fracture Toughness 462 19.4 Coatings 463 19.4.1 Coating Hardness 463 19.4.2 Coating Elastic Modulus 464 19.5 Issues for Reproducible Results 464 19.6 Applications of Nanoindentation to Zirconia 465 19.6.1 Hardness and Elastic Modulus 466 19.6.2 Stress–strain Curve and Phase Transformation 467 19.6.3 Plastic Deformation Mechanisms 468 19.6.4 Mechanical Properties of Damaged Surfaces 468 19.6.5 Relation Between Microstructure and Local Mechanical Properties by Massive Nanoindentation Cartography 471 19.7 Conclusions 472 Acknowledgements 472 References 473 20 FEM Simulation of Nanoindentation 481F. Pöhl, W. Theisen and S. Huth 20.1 Introduction 481 20.2 Indentation of Isotropic Materials 482 20.3 Indentation of Thin Films 489 20.4 Indentation of a Hard Phase Embedded in Matrix 490 References 495 21 Investigations Regarding Plastic Flow Behaviour and Failure Analysis on CrAlN Thin Hard Coatings 501Jan Perne 21.1 Introduction 501 21.2 Description of the Method 501 21.2.1 Flow Curve Determination 502 21.2.1.1 Nanoindentation Step 502 21.2.1.2 Yield Strength Determination 502 21.2.1.3 Flow Curve Determination by Iterative Simulation 503 21.2.1.4 Determination of Strain Rate and Temperature Dependency 503 21.2.2 Failure Criterion Determination with Nano-scratch Analysis 503 21.3 Investigations into the CrAlN Coating System 504 21.3.1 Flow curve dependency on chemical composition and microstructure 504 21.3.2 Strain Rate Dependency of Different CrN-AlN Coating Systems 506 21.3.3 Failure criterion determination on a CrN/AlN nanolaminate 507 21.4 Concluding Remarks 509 References 511 22 Scale Invariant Mechanical Surface Optimization 513Norbert Schwarzer 22.1 Introduction 513 22.1.1 Interatomic Potential Description of Mechanical Material Behavior 513 22.1.2 The Effective Indenter Concept and Its Extension to Layered Materials 514 22.1.3 About Extensions of the Oliver and Pharr Method 514 22.1.3.1 Making the Classical Oliver and Pharr Method Fit for Time Dependent Mechanical Behavior 515 22.1.4 Introduction to the Physical Scratch and/or Tribological Test and its Analysis 515 22.1.5 Illustrative Hypothetical Example for Optimization Against Dust Impact 515 22.1.6 About the Influence of Intrinsic Stresses 516 22.2 Theory 517 22.2.1 First Principle Based Interatomic Potential Description of Mechanical Material Behavior 517 22.2.2 The Effective Indenter Concept 521 22.2.3 An Oliver and Pharr Method for Time Dependent Layered Materials 522 22.2.4 Theory for the Physical Scratch and/or Tribological Test 533 22.2.5 From Quasi-Static Experiments and Parameters to DynamicWear, Fretting and Tribological Tests 534 22.2.6 Including Biaxial Intrinsic Stresses 537 22.3 The Procedure 540 22.4 Discussion by Means of Examples 544 22.5 Conclusions 555 Acknowledgements 555 Referencess 556 23 Modelling and Simulations of Nanoindentation in Single Crystals 561Qiang Liu,Murat Demiral, Anish Roy and Vadim V. Silberschmidt 23.1 Introduction 561 23.2 Review of IndentationModelling 564 23.3 Crystal PlasticityModelling of Nanoindentation 565 23.3.1 Indentation of F.C.C. Copper Single Crystal 567 23.3.2 Indentation of B.C.C. Ti-64 569 23.3.3 Indentation of B.C.C. Ti-15-3-3 571 23.4 Conclusions 573 References 574 24 Computer Simulation and Experimental Analysis of Nanoindentation Technique 579A. Karimzadeh,M.R. Ayatollahi and A. Rahimi 24.1 Introduction 579 24.2 Finite Element Simulation for Nanoindentation 580 24.3 Finite Element Modeling 580 24.3.1 Geometry 580 24.3.2 Material Characteristics 581 24.3.3 Boundary Condition 582 24.3.4 Interaction 582 24.3.5 Meshing 582 24.4 Verification of Finite Element Simulation 583 24.4.1 Nanoindentation Experiment on Al 1100 584 24.4.2 Comparison Between Simulation and Experimental Results for Al 1100 584 24.4.2.1 Load-displacement 584 24.4.2.2 Hardness 588 24.5 Molecular Dynamic Modeling for Nanoindentation 591 24.5.1 Simulation Procedure 592 24.6 Results of Molecular Dynamic Simulation 595 24.7 Conclusions 597 References 597 25 Atomistic Simulations of Adhesion, Indentation andWear at Nanoscale 601Jun Zhong, Donald J. Siegel, Louis G. Hector, Jr. and James B. Adams 25.1 Introduction 601 25.2 Methodologies 604 25.2.1 Density FunctionalTheory 604 25.2.1.1 The Exchange–correlation Functional 605 25.2.1.2 PlaneWaves and Supercell 606 25.2.2 Pseudopotential Approximation 606 25.2.3 Molecular Dynamics 607 25.2.3.1 Equations of Motion 607 25.2.3.2 Algorithms 608 25.2.3.3 Statistical Ensembles 608 25.2.3.4 Interatomic Potentials 608 25.2.3.5 Ab initio Molecular Dynamics 609 25.2.4 Some Commercial Software 611 25.2.4.1 The VASP 611 25.2.4.2 The LAMMPS 611 25.3 Density Functional Study of Adhesion at the Metal/Ceramic Interfaces 612 25.3.1 Calculations 612 25.3.2 Effect of Surface Energies in theWsep 614 25.3.3 Conclusions 615 25.4 Molecular Dynamics Simulations of Nanoindentation 616 25.4.1 Empirical Modeling 616 25.4.1.1 Modeling Geometry and Simulation Procedures 617 25.4.1.2 Results and discussions 618 25.4.1.3 Conclusions 622 25.4.2 Ab initio Modeling 622 25.4.2.1 Modeling Geometry and Simulation Procedures 622 25.4.2.2 Results and Discussions 624 25.5 Molecular Dynamics Simulations of AdhesiveWear on the Al-substrate 628 25.5.1 Modeling Geometry and Simulation Procedures 629 25.5.2 Results and Discussions 630 25.5.2.1 One CommonWear Sequence 630 25.5.2.2 Thermal Analysis for theWear Sequence 631 25.5.2.3 Wear Rate Analyses 632 25.6 Summary and Prospect 636 Acknowledgments 638 References 638 26 Multiscale Model for Nanoindentation in Polymer and Polymer Nanocomposites 647Rezwanur Rahman 26.1 Introduction 647 26.2 Modeling Scheme 648 26.2.1 Details of the MD Simulation 649 26.3 Nanoindentation Test 650 26.4 Theoretically and Experimentally Determined Result 651 26.5 Multiscale of Complex Heterogeneous Materials 651 26.5.1 Introduction to Peridynamics 652 26.5.2 Nonlocal Multiscale Modeling using Peridynamics: Linking Macro- to Nano-scales 654 26.6 MultiscaleModeling for Nanoindentation in Epoxy: EPON 862 655 26.7 UnifiedTheory for MultiscaleModeling 658 26.8 Conclusion 658 References 659 Index 663

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive and interdisciplinary resource filled with strategic insights, tools, and techniques for the design and construction of hybrid materials. Hybrid materials represent the best of material properties being combined for the development for materials with properties otherwise unavailable for application requirements. Novel Nanoscale Hybrid Materials is a comprehensive resource that contains contributions from a wide range of noted scientists from various fields, working on the hybridization of nanomolecules in order to generate new materials with superior properties. The book focuses on the new directions and developments in design and application of new materials, incorporating organic/inorganic polymers, biopolymers, and nanoarchitecture approaches. This book delves deeply into the complexities that arise when characteristics of a molecule change on the nanoscale, overriding the properties of the individual nanomolecules and generating new properties and capabilities alTable of ContentsList of Contributors xiii 1 Silanols as Building Blocks for Nanomaterials 1Masafumi Unno and Hisayuki Endo 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Synthesis and Applications of Silanols 2 1.2.1 Silanetriols and Disiloxanetetraols 2 1.2.2 Cyclotetrasiloxanetetraol (Cyclic Silanols, All]cis Isomer) 5 1.2.3 Cyclotetrasiloxanetetraol (Cyclic Silanols, Other Isomers) 14 1.2.4 Cyclotrisiloxanetriol 15 1.3 Structures and Properties of Nanomaterials Obtained from Silanols 20 1.3.1 Structure of Laddersiloxanes 20 1.3.2 Thermal Property of Laddersiloxanes 23 1.3.3 Thermal Property of Other Silsesquioxanes 26 1.3.4 Refractive Indices of Silsesquioxanes 28 1.4 Summary and Outlook 29 References 29 2 Biomacromolecule]Enabled Synthesis of Inorganic Materials 33Kristina L. Roth and Tijana Z. Grove 2.1 Introduction 33 2.2 DNA 34 2.3 Proteins and Peptides 36 2.3.1 Cage Proteins 37 2.3.2 Bovine Serum Albumin (BSA) 38 2.3.3 Engineered Peptides 40 2.3.4 Engineered Protein Scaffolds 42 2.4 Polysaccharides 44 2.5 Methods of Characterization 46 2.6 Conclusion 50 References 50 3 Multilayer Assemblies of Biopolymers: Synthesis, Properties, and Applications 57Jun Chen, Veronika Kozlovskaya, Daniëlle Pretorius, and Eugenia Kharlampieva 3.1 Introduction 57 3.2 Assembly of Biopolymer Multilayers 58 3.2.1 Biopolymers and Their Properties 58 3.2.2 Growth and Thickness of Biopolymer Multilayers 59 3.2.3 Stability in Solutions and Enzymatic Degradation of Biopolymer Multilayers 74 3.2.3.1 Enzymatic Degradation 75 3.2.3.2 pH and Salt Stability 78 3.2.4 Hydration and Swelling of Biopolymer Multilayers 81 3.3 Properties of Biopolymer Multilayers 83 3.3.1 Surface Properties of Biopolymer Multilayers and Their Interaction with Cells 83 3.3.2 Antibacterial Properties 84 3.3.3 Immunomodulatory Properties 85 3.3.4 Mechanical Properties of Biopolymer Multilayers 87 3.3.5 Other Properties 90 3.4 Applications 91 3.5 Conclusion and Outlook 95 Acknowledgments 96 References 96 4 Functionalization of P3HT]Based Hybrid Materials for Photovoltaic Applications 107Michèle Chevrier, Riccardo Di Ciuccio, Olivier Coulembier, Philippe Dubois, Sébastien Richeter, Ahmad Mehdi, and Sébastien Clément 4.1 Introduction 107 4.2 Design and Synthesis of Regioregular Poly(3]Hexylthiophene) 109 4.2.1 Metal]Catalyzed Cross]Coupling Reactions 114 4.2.1.1 Nickel]Catalyzed Cross]Coupling Reactions 114 4.2.1.2 Palladium]Catalyzed Cross]Coupling Reactions 121 4.2.2 Functionalization of P3HT 126 4.2.2.1 End]Group Functionalization 127 4.2.2.2 Side]Chain Functionalization 130 4.3 Morphology Control of P3HT/PCBM Blend by Functionalization 132 4.3.1 Introduction 132 4.3.2 End]Group Functionalization 134 4.3.2.1 Fluorinated Chain Ends 135 4.3.2.2 Hydrophilic Chain Ends 139 4.3.2.3 Aromatic Chain Ends 139 4.3.2.4 Fullerene Chain Ends: Compatibilizer Case 141 4.3.3 Side]Chain Functionalization 144 4.3.3.1 Thermal and Photo]Cross]Linking 144 4.3.3.2 Fullerene Side]Functionalization on Polythiophene Block Copolymers 147 4.3.3.3 Cooperative Self]Assembling 149 4.4 Polymer–Metal Oxide Hybrid Solar Cells 154 4.4.1 Anchoring Method 156 4.4.2 Surface Modification Using End] and Side]Chain]Functionalized P3HT 158 4.4.2.1 End]Group Functionalization 158 4.4.2.2 Side]Chain Functionalization 161 4.5 Conclusion 163 Acknowledgments 164 References 164 5 Insights on Nanofiller Reinforced Polysiloxane Hybrids 179Debarshi Dasgupta, Alok Sarkar, Dieter Wrobel, and Anubhav Saxena 5.1 Properties of Silicone (Polysiloxane) 179 5.2 Nanofiller Composition and Chemistry 183 5.2.1 Fumed Silica 183 5.2.2 Aerogel Silica 185 5.2.3 Carbon Black 187 5.3 Polymer [Poly(dimethylsiloxane)]–Filler Interaction 187 5.4 Polymer– Filler Versus Filler–Filler Interactions 190 5.5 PDMS Nanocomposite with Anisotropic Fillers 194 5.6 PDMS– Molecular Filler Nanocomposite 196 Acknowledgment 198 References 198 6 Nanophotonics with Hybrid Nanostructures: New Phenomena and New Possibilities 201Noor Eldabagh, Jessica Czarnecki, and Jonathan J. Foley IV 6.1 Introduction 202 6.2 Theoretical Nanophotonics 204 6.2.1 Mie Theory for Spherical Nanostructures 205 6.2.2 Transfer Matrix Methods for Planar Structures 208 6.2.3 The Finite]Difference Time]Domain Method 214 6.2.4 The Discrete Dipole Approximation 215 6.3 Hybrid Nanostructures 216 6.3.1 Emergent Electrodynamics Phenomena: Inhomogeneous Surface Plasmon Polaritons 216 6.3.2 Advancing Imaging Beyond the Diffraction Limit with ISPPs 220 6.3.3 Emergent Material]Dependent Optical Response in Hybrid Nanostructures 222 6.3.4 Perspective on the Horizon of Health Applications of Hybrid Nanostructures 228 6.3.5 Photodynamic Therapy 228 6.3.6 In Vivo Light Sources 231 6.4 Concluding Remarks 233 References 233 7 Drug Delivery Vehicles from Stimuli]Responsive Block Copolymers 239Prajakta Kulkarni and Sanku Mallik 7.1 Introduction 239 7.2 Block Copolymers for Drug Delivery 241 7.3 Polymeric Nanoparticles 241 7.3.1 Micelles 241 7.3.2 Hydrogels 243 7.3.3 Polymersomes 244 7.4 Stimuli] Responsive Drug Delivery 245 7.4.1 Physical/External Stimuli]Responsive Polymers 246 7.4.1.1 Temperature 246 7.4.1.2 Electro]Responsive Polymers 247 7.4.1.3 Light]Responsive Polymers 247 7.4.1.4 Ultrasound]Responsive Polymers 248 7.4.2 Chemical/Internal Stimuli]Responsive Polymers 248 7.4.2.1 PH]Responsive Polymers 248 7.4.2.2 Ionic Strength]Responsive Polymers 251 7.4.2.3 Enzyme]Responsive Polymers 251 7.4.2.4 Reduction]Sensitive Polymers 251 7.5 Challenges and Prospects 252 7.6 Summary 252 References 253 8 Mechanical Properties of Rubber]Toughened Epoxy Nanocomposites 263B. Zewde, I. J. Zvonkina, A. Bagasao, K. Cassimere, K. Holloway, A. Karim, and D. Raghavan 8.1 Introduction 263 8.2 Epoxy Resins 265 8.3 Rubber] Toughened Epoxy Resin 266 8.4 Nanoparticle Filled Epoxy Nanocomposites 269 8.5 Carbon Nanotubes 270 8.6 Rubber]Toughened CNT Filled Epoxy Nanocomposites 275 8.7 Nanoclay Filled Epoxy Nanocomposites 277 8.8 Rubber]Toughened Nanoclay Filled Epoxy Nanocomposites 282 8.9 Silicon Dioxide Nanoparticles 284 8.10 Rubber]Toughened Nanosilica Filled Epoxy Nanocomposites 286 8.11 Conclusions 289 Acknowledgments 280 References 280 9 Metal Complexes in Reverse Micelles 301Marc A. Walters 9.1 Introduction 301 9.2 Location of Metal Complex Probes in the RM Core 302 9.3 Metal Complexes in Confinement 304 9.3.1 Substitution Reactions and Physical Methods 304 9.3.2 Redox Reactions in Reverse Micelles 309 9.3.3 Metal Ion Binding 311 9.4 Conclusions 320 References 320 10 Heterogenized Catalysis on Metals Impregnated Mesoporous Silica 323Fatima Abi Ghaida, Sébastien Clément, and Ahmad Mehdi 10.1 Introduction 323 10.2 Mesoporous Silica in Catalysis 327 10.3 Modified Mesoporous Silica 329 10.4 Recent Advances in SBA Applied to Catalysis 332 10.5 Conclusion 341 References 342 Index 351

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book highlights applications of hybrid materials in solar energy systems, lithium ion batteries, electromagnetic shielding, sensing of pollutants and water purification. A hybrid material is defined as a material composed of an intimate mixture of inorganic components, organic components, or both types of components. In the last few years, a tremendous amount of attention has been given towards the development of materials for efficient energy harvesting; nanostructured hybrid materials have also been gaining significant advances to provide pollutant free drinking water, sensing of environmental pollutants, energy storage and conservation. Separately, intensive work on high performing polymer nanocomposites for applications in the automotive, aerospace and construction industries has been carried out, but the aggregation of many fillers, such as clay, LDH, CNT, graphene, represented a major barrier in their development. Only very recently has this problem been overTable of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Hybrid Nanostructured Materials for Advanced Lithium Batteries 1Soumyadip Choudhury and Manfred Stamm 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Battery Requirements 4 1.3 Survey of Rechargeable Batteries 7 1.4 Advanced Materials for Electrodes 9 1.5 Future Battery Strategies 38 1.6 Limitations of Existing Strategies 59 1.7 Conclusions 62 Acknowledgments 63 References 63 2 High Performing Hybrid Nanomaterials for Supercapacitor Applications 79Sanjit Saha, Milan Jana and Tapas Kuila 2.1 Introduction 80 2.2 Scope of the Chapter 82 2.3 Characterization of Hybrid Nanomaterials 82 2.4 Hybrid Nanomaterials as Electrodes for Supercapacitor 91 2.5 Applications of Supercapacitor 130 2.6 Conclusions 134 References 135 3 Nanohybrid Materials in the Development of Solar Energy Applications 147Poulomi Roy 3.1 Introduction 147 3.2 Significance of Nanohybrid Materials 148 3.3 Synthetic Strategies 162 3.4 Application in Solar Energy Conversion 167 3.5 Summary 175 References 176 4 Hybrid Nanoadsorbents for Drinking Water Treatment: A Critical Review 199Ashok K. Gupta, Partha S. Ghosal and Brajesh K. Dubey 4.1 Introduction 199 4.2 Status and Health Effects of Different Pollutants 201 4.3 Removal Technologies 203 4.4 Hybrid Nanoadsorbent 208 4.5 Issues and Challenges 217 4.6 Conclusions 224 References 225 5 Advanced Nanostructured Materials in Electromagnetic Interference Shielding 241Suneel Kumar Srivastava and Vikas Mittal 5.1 Introduction 241 5.2 Theoretical Aspect of EMI Shielding 243 5.3 Experimental Methods in Measuring Shielding Effectiveness 247 5.4 Carbon Allotrope-Based Polymer Nanocomposites 248 Fillers-Based Polymer Nanocomposites 265 5.5 Intrinsically Conducting Polymer (ICP) Derived Nanocomposites 276 5.6 Summary 300 6 Preparation, Properties and the Application of Hybrid Nanomaterials in Sensing Environmental Pollutants 321R. Ajay Rakkesh, D. Durgalakshmi and S. Balakumar 6.1 Introduction 321 6.2 Hybrid Nanomaterials: Smart Material for Sensing Environmental Pollutants 323 6.3 Synthesis Methods of Hybrid Nanomaterials 326 6.4 Basic Mechanism of Gas Sensors Using Hybrid Nanomaterials 330 6.5 Hybrid Nanomaterials-Based Conductometric Gas Sensors for Environmental Monitoring 331 6.6 Conclusion 342 References 342 7 Development of Hybrid Fillers/Polymer Nanocomposites for Electronic Applications 349Mariatti Jaafar 7.1 Introduction 350 7.2 Factors Influencing the Properties of Filler/Polymer Composite 353 7.3 Hybridization of Fillers in Polymer Composites 355 7.4 Hybrid Fillers in Polymer Nanocomposites 358 7.5 Fabrication Methods of Hybrid Fillers/Polymer Composites 362 7.6 Applications of Hybrid Fillers/Polymer Composites 365 References 366 8 High Performance Hybrid Filler Reinforced Epoxy Nanocomposites 371Suman Chhetri, Tapas Kuila and Suneel Kumar Srivastava 8.1 Introduction 372 8.2 Reinforcing Fillers 373 8.3 Necessity of Hybrid Filler Systems 376 8.4 Epoxy Resin 379 8.5 Preparation of Hybrid Filler/Epoxy Nanocomposites 380 8.6 Characterization of Hybrid Filler/Epoxy Polymer Composites 381 8.7 Properties of the Hybrid Filler/Epoxy Nanocomposites 383 8.8 Summary and Future Prospect 408 References 413 9 Recent Developments in Elastomer/Hybrid Filler Nanocomposites 423Suneel Kumar Srivastava and Vikas Mittal 9.1 Introduction 423 9.2 Preparation Methods of Elastomer Nanocomposites 426 9.3 Hybrid Fillers in Elastomer Nanocomposites 427 9.4 Mechanical Properties of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposites 440 9.5 Dynamical Mechanical Thermal Analysis (DMA) of Elastomer Nanocomposites 452 9.6 Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposites 464 9.7 Differential Scanning Calorimetric (DSC) Analysis of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposites 468 9.8 Electrical Conductivity of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposites 476 9.9 Thermal Conductivity of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposites 477 9.10 Dielectric Properties of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposits 477 9.11 Shape Memory Property of Hybrid Filler Incorporated Elastomer Nanocomposites 478 9.12 Summary 478 Acknowledgment 479 References 479

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Ceramic Engineering and Science Proceeding has been published by The American Ceramic Society since 1980. This series contains a collection of papers dealing with issues in both traditional ceramics (i.e., glass, whitewares, refractories, and porcelain enamel) and advanced ceramics. Topics covered in the area of advanced ceramic include bioceramics, nanomaterials, composites, solid oxide fuel cells, mechanical properties and structural design, advanced ceramic coatings, ceramic armor, porous ceramics, and more.Table of ContentsPreface ix Introduction xi ADVANCED PROCESSING AND MANUFACTURING Development of High Temperature Joining and Thermomechanical Characterization Approaches for SiC/SiC Composites 3Michael C. Halbig, Mrityunjay Singh, and Jerry Lang Microstructural Observation of Interfaces in Diffusion Bonded Silicon Carbide Ceramics by TEM 13Hiroshi Tsuda, Shigeo Mori, Michael C. Halbig, Mrityunjay Singh, and Rajiv Asthana Preparation and Characterization of Rb-SiC Ceramics Fabricated from Phenolic Resin/SiC 21Akihiro Shimamura, Mikinori Hotta, Tatsuki Ohji, and Naoki Kondo New Combined Method of MPS and FEM for Simulating Friction Stir Processing 27Hisashi Serizawa and Fumikazu Miyasaka Novel Visualizing Technique of the Tips of the Cracks for Indentation Fracture Resistance Method 37H. Miyazaki and Y. Yoshizawa Slip-Casting by Water-Absorbing Resin Mold Enables Crack-Free Ceramic Molding System and Products with Partially Different Thicknesses 45Akio Matsumoto Influence of Lanthanoid Dopant and N/O Substitution on the Electronic Structure and Luminescent Properties of Lanthanum Silicon Oxynitride Phosphors 55I.A.M. Ibrahim, Z. Len éš, L. Benco, and P. Šajgalík Effect of Ti3SiC2 Particulates on the Mechanical and Tribological Behavior of Sn Matrix Composites 65T. Hammann, R. Johnson, M. F. Riyad, and S. Gupta Field Assisted Sintering of Silicate Glass-Containing Alumina 75Mattia Biesuz and Vincenzo M. Sglavo Modeling the First Activation Stages of the Fe(hfa)2TMEDA CVD Precursor on a Heated Growth Surface 83Gloria Tabacchi, Ettore Fois, Davide Barreca, Giorgio Carraro, Alberto Gasparotto, and Chiara Maccato Development of High Aspect Ratio Hexagonal Boron Nitride Filler by Mechanical Exfoliation 91Yuichi Tominaga, Kimiyasu Sato, Daisuke Shimamoto, Yusuke Imai, and Yuji Hotta Preparation and Characterization of Nanostructured Films: Study of Hydrophobicity and Antibacterial Properties for Surface Protection 101M. Barberio, S. Veltri, E. Sokullu, F. Xu, M.A. Gauthier, and P. Antici ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING AND 3D PRINTING 3-D Printing and Characterization of Polymer Composites with Different Reinforcements 115Anton Salem, Mrityunjay Singh, and Michael C. Halbig Additive Manufacturing of Drainage Segments for Cooling System of Crucible Melting Furnaces 123Miranda Fateri, Andreas Gebhardt, and Georg Renftle Additive Manufacturing of Silicon Carbide-Based Ceramics by 3-D Printing Technologies 133Shirley X. Zhu, Michael C. Halbig, and Mrityunjay Singh Additive Manufacturing of Light Weight Ceramic Matrix Composites for Gas Turbine Engine Applications 145Mrityunjay Singh, Michael C. Halbig, and Joseph E. Grady Application of Selective Separation Sintering in Ceramics 3D Printing 151J. Zhang and B. Khoshnevis Contour Crafting of Advanced Ceramic Materials 159Mahmood Shirooyeh, Mohammadaref Vali, David Shackleford, Payman Torabi, Paul W. Rehrig, Oh-Hun Kwon, and Behrokh Khoshnevis Author Index 169

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis unique multidisciplinary 8-volume set focuses on the emerging issues concerning synthesis, characterization, design, manufacturing and various other aspects of composite materials from renewable materials and provides a shared platform for both researcher and industry. The Handbook of Composites from Renewable Materials comprises a set of 8 individual volumes that brings an interdisciplinary perspective to accomplish a more detailed understanding of the interplay between the synthesis, structure, characterization, processing, applications and performance of these advanced materials. The Handbook comprises 169 chapters from world renowned experts covering a multitude of natural polymers/ reinforcement/ fillers and biodegradable materials. Volume 7 is solely focused on the Nanocomposites: Science and Fundamentals of renewable materials. Some of the important topics include but not limited to: Preparation, characterization, and applications of naTable of ContentsPreface xxi 1 Preparation, Characterization, and Applications of Nanomaterials (Cellulose, Lignin, and Silica) from Renewable (Lignocellulosic) Resources 1K.G. Satyanarayana, Anupama Rangan, V.S. Prasad and Washington Luiz Esteves Magalhaes 1.1 Introduction 2 1.1.1 Cellulose and Nanocellulose 3 1.1.1.1 Types of Nanocellulose 5 1.1.2 Lignin and Nanolignin 7 1.1.3 Silica and Nanosilica 7 1.2 Preparation of Nanomaterials 10 1.2.1 Nanocellulose from Lignocellulosic Materials 10 1.2.1.1 Mechanical Shearing and Grinding 11 1.2.1.2 Steam Explosion/High-Pressure Homogenization 12 1.2.1.3 Chemical Methods (Acid Hydrolysis, Alkaline Treatment and Bleaching) 16 1.2.1.4 Ultrasonication 17 1.2.1.5 Other Methods 18 1.2.1.6 Functionalized Nanocellulose from Fibers 20 1.2.2 Nanolignin 21 1.2.2.1 Precipitation Method 22 1.2.2.2 Chemical Modification 22 1.2.2.3 Electro Spinning Followed by Surface Modification 22 1.2.2.4 Freeze Drying Followed by Thermal Stabilization and Carbonization 22 1.2.2.5 Supercritical Antisolvent Technology 23 1.2.2.6 Chemomechanical Methods 23 1.2.2.7 Nanolignin by Self-Assembly 23 1.2.2.8 Lignin Nanocontainers by Miniemulsion Method 23 1.2.2.9 Template-Mediated Synthesis 24 1.2.3 Nanosilica 25 1.2.3.1 Nanosilica Obtained from Plants 25 1.2.3.2 Enzymatic Crystallization of Amorphous Nanosilica 27 1.3 Characterization of Nanomaterials 27 1.3.1 Characterization of Nanocellulose 29 1.3.1.1 Structure and Morphology of NC 29 1.3.1.2 Physical Properties (Dimensions, Density, Electrical, Crystallinity, and Any Other) 33 1.3.1.3 Mechanical Properties 36 1.3.2 Characterization of Lignin Nanoparticles 37 1.3.2.1 Morphology of Lignin Nanoparticles 38 1.3.2.2 Thermal Analysis 39 1.3.3 Other Methods 39 1.3.4 Characterization of Nanosilica 39 1.4 Applications and Market Aspects 45 1.4.1 Nanocellulose 45 1.4.1.1 Biomedical Applications 46 1.4.1.2 Dielectric Materials 46 1.4.1.3 In Composite Manufacturing for Various Applications 46 1.4.1.4 Advanced Functional Materials 47 1.4.2 Nanolignin 49 1.4.3 Nanosilica 51 1.4.3.1 In Composites 51 1.4.3.2 Nanosilica in Nacre Composite 52 1.4.3.3 Encapsulation of Living Cells by Nanosilica 52 1.5 Concluding Remarks and Challenges Ahead 54 Acknowledgments 55 References 55 2 Hydrogels and its Nanocomposites from Renewable Resources: Biotechnological and Biomedical Applications 67B. Manjula, A. Babul Reddy, T. Jayaramudu, E.R. Sadiku, S.J. Owonubi, Oluranti Agboola and Tauhami Mokrani 2.1 Introduction 67 2.2 Hydrogels from Renewable Resources 71 2.3 Hydrogel Technical Features 72 2.4 Nanocomposite Hydrogels 72 2.4.1 Polymer-Clay-Based Nanocomposite Hydrogels 75 2.4.2 Poly(ethylene Oxide)–Silicate Nanocomposite Hydrogels 76 2.4.3 Poly(acryl Amide) and Poly(vinyl Alcohol)–Silicate-Based Nanocomposite Hydrogels 77 2.5 Nanocomposite Hydrogels with Natural Polymers 79 2.6 Classifications of Hydrogels 80 2.7 Applications of Hydrogels as Biomaterials 82 2.7.1 Hydrogels for Drug Delivery Applications 82 2.7.2 Hydrogels for Tissue-Engineering Scaffolds 84 2.7.3 Hydrogels for Contact Lens 85 2.7.4 Hydrogels for Cell Encapsulation 85 2.7.5 Artificial Muscles and Nerve Regeneration 86 2.8 Conclusions 87 Acknowledgment 88 References 88 3 Preparation of Chitin-Based Nanocomposite Materials Through Gelation with Ionic Liquid 97Kazuya Yamamoto and Jun-ichi Kadokawa 3.1 Introduction 98 3.2 Dissolution and Gelation of Chitin with Ionic Liquid 100 3.3 Fabrication of Self-Assembled Chitin Nanofibers by Regeneration from the Chitin Ion Gels 103 3.4 Preparation of Nanocomposite Materials from Chitin Nanofibers 104 3.5 Conclusion 114 References 115 4 Starch-Based Bionanocomposites 121Abbas Dadkhah Tehrani, Masoumeh Parsamanesh and Ali Bodaghi 4.1 Introduction 121 4.2 Nanocomposites 122 4.3 Starch Structural Features 123 4.4 Starch-Based Bionanocomposites 124 4.4.1 Starch Silicate Nanocomposites 125 4.4.2 Starch/Chitosan Composites 126 4.4.3 Starch Cellulose Nanocomposites 128 4.4.4 Starch Nanocomposites with Other Nanofillers 129 4.5 Starch Nanocrystal, Nanoparticle, and Nanocolloid Preparation and Modification Methods 131 4.5.1 Starch Nanocrystals Preparation by Acid Hydrolysis Method 131 4.5.2 Starch Nanocrystal Modification Methods 133 4.5.2.1 Starch Nanocrystals Chemical Modification by Molecules with Low Molecular Weight 133 4.5.2.2 Modification of Starch Nanocrystals via Surface Grafting of Polymers 133 4.5.3 Starch Nanoparticle and Nanocolloid Preparation and Modification Methods 135 4.6 Nano Starch as Fillers in Other Nanocomposites 140 4.7 Biomedical Application 143 4.8 Conclusion 144 References 145 5 Biorenewable Nanofiber and Nanocrystal: Renewable Nanomaterials for Constructing Novel Nanocomposites 155Linxin Zhong and Xinwen Peng 5.1 Nanocellulose-Based and Nanocellulose-Reinforced Nanocomposite Hydrogels 156 5.1.1 Gelling Performances of Nanocelluloses 157 5.1.2 Nanocelluloses-Reinforced Nanocomposite Hydrogels 159 5.2 Nanocellulose-Based Aerogels 166 5.2.1 Preparation and Properties of Nanocellulose Aerogels 166 5.2.2 Nanocellulose–Polymer Composite Aerogels 171 5.2.3 Nanocellulose–Inorganic Nanocomposite Aerogels 176 5.2.4 Nanocellulose–Nanocarbon Hybrid Aerogels 179 5.3 Nanocellulose-Based Biomimetic and Conductive Nanocomposite Films 183 5.3.1 Nanocellulose–Polymer Biomimetic Nanocomposite Films 183 5.3.2 Nanocellulose–Inorganic Biomimetic Nanocomposite Films 187 5.3.3 Nanocellulose–Nanocarbon Conductive Nanocomposite Films 190 5.4 Chiral Nematic Liquid Crystal and its Nanocomposites with Unique Optical Properties 196 5.4.1 CNC Chiral Nematic Performances 196 5.4.2 CNC–Polymer Photonic Nanocomposites 199 5.4.3 CNC–Inorganic Photonic Nanocomposites 202 5.4.4 CNC-Templated Chiral Nematic Nanomaterials 204 5.5 Spun Fibers from Nanocelluloses 207 5.5.1 Spinning Performances of Nanocelluloses and Properties 207 5.5.2 Nanocellulose–Polymer Spinning Nanocomposite Fibers 210 5.5.3 Nanocellulose–Nanocarbons Spinning Nanocomposite Fibers 212 5.6 Summary and Outlook 213 References 215 6 Investigation of Wear Characteristics of Dental Composite Reinforced with Rice Husk–Derived Nanosilica Filler Particles 227I.K. Bhat, Amar Patnaik and Shiv Ranjan Kumar 6.1 Introduction 227 6.2 Materials and Method 229 6.2.1 Synthesis of Nanosilica Powder 229 6.2.2 Materials and Fabrication Details 230 6.2.3 Determination of Hardness 230 6.2.4 Determination of Flexural Strength 231 6.2.5 Determination of Wear 231 6.2.6 Field Emission Scanning Electron Microscope 232 6.3 Results and Discussion 232 6.3.1 Effect of Vickers Hardness on the Dental Composite Filled with Silane-Treated Nanosilica 232 6.3.2 Effect of Flexural Strength on the Dental Composite Filled with Silane-Treated Nanosilica 233 6.3.3 Steady-State Condition for Wear Characterization in Food Slurry and Acidic Medium 233 6.3.3.1 Effect of Chewing Load on Volumetric Wear Rate on Dental Composite 233 6.3.3.2 Effect of Profile Speed on Volumetric Wear Rate of Dental Composite 235 6.3.3.3 Effect of Chamber Temperature on Volumetric Wear Rate of Dental Composite 236 6.3.4 Wear Analysis of Experimental Results by Taguchi Method and ANOVA Analysis 237 6.3.4.1 Wear Analysis of Silane-Treated Nanosilica-Filled Dental Composite in Food Slurry Using Taguchi and ANOVA 237 6.3.4.2 Wear Analysis of Silane-Treated Nanosilica-Filled Dental Composite in Citric Acid Using Taguchi and ANOVA 240 6.3.5 Surface Morphology of Worn Surfaces Under Food Slurry and Citric Acid Condition 241 6.3.6 Confirmation Experiment of Proposed Composites 243 6.4 Conclusions 244 Acknowledgments 245 Nomenclature 245 References 245 7 Performance of Regenerated Cellulose Nanocomposites Fabricated via Ionic Liquid Based on Halloysites and Vermiculite 249Nurbaiti Abdul Hanid, Mat Uzir Wahit and Qipeng Guo 7.1 Introduction 250 7.1.1 Overview 250 7.1.2 Cellulose Structure and Properties 250 7.1.3 Regenerated Cellulose 251 7.1.4 Conventional Solvent for Cellulose 251 7.1.5 Dissolution of Cellulose in NMMO 252 7.1.6 Cellulose Dissolution in Ionic Liquid 253 7.1.7 Regenerated Cellulose Nanocomposites 255 7.1.8 Halloysites 255 7.1.9 Vermiculite 255 7.2 Experimental 256 7.2.1 Materials 256 7.2.2 Sample Preparation 257 7.2.2.1 The Preparation of Regenerated Cellulose via Ionic Liquid 257 7.2.2.2 Preparation of Regenerated Cellulose Nanocomposites via Ionic Liquids 257 7.2.3 Characterization of the Nanocomposites Films 257 7.3 Results and Discussions 258 7.3.1 XRD Patterns of RC Nanocomposites 258 7.3.2 FTIR Spectra of RC Nanocomposites 259 7.3.3 Mechanical Properties of RC Nanocomposites 261 7.3.4 Morphology Analysis of the RC Nanocomposites 263 7.3.4.1 Transmission Electron Micrographs Images Analysis 263 7.3.4.2 Scanning Electron Microscopy Images Analysis 264 7.3.5 Thermal Stability Analysis of RC Nanocomposites 265 7.3.6 Water Absorption of RC Nanocomposites 267 7.4 Conclusion 268 Acknowledgments 269 References 269 8 Preparation, Structure, Properties, and Interactions of the PVA/Cellulose Composites 275Bai Huiyu 8.1 PVA and Cellulose 275 8.1.1 Polyvinyl Alcohol 275 8.1.1.1 Molecular Weight and the Degree of Alcoholysis 275 8.1.1.2 The Advantages and Disadvantages of PVA 276 8.1.2 Cellulose 277 8.1.2.1 Structure and Chemistry of Cellulose 277 8.1.2.2 Source of Cellulose 278 8.1.2.3 The Particle Types of Cellulose 278 8.1.2.4 Properties of Cellulose 279 8.1.2.5 Application of Cellulose 280 8.1.3 PVA/Cellulose Composites 280 8.1.3.1 The Properties of PVA/Cellulose Composites 280 8.1.3.2 Application of PVA/Cellulose Composites 281 8.2 The Bulk and Surface Modification of Cellulose Particles 281 8.2.1 The Bulk Modification of Cellulose Particles 281 8.2.1.1 Complex Modification 281 8.2.1.2 Graft Polymerization 282 8.2.2 The Surface Modification of Cellulose 283 8.2.2.1 Chemical Surface Modification 283 8.2.2.2 Physical Surface Modification 284 8.3 The Methods and Technology of Preparation of the PVA/Cellulose Composites 284 8.3.1 Solvent Casting 284 8.3.2 Melt Processing 285 8.3.3 Electrospun Fiber 285 8.3.4 In Situ Production 286 8.4 The Relationship between Structure and Properties of PVA/Cellulose Composites 286 8.4.1 Interpenetrating Polymer Network 286 8.4.2 Hydrogen-Bonding or Bond Network 287 8.4.3 Chemical Cross-Linked Network 287 8.5 The Effect of the Interaction between PVA and Cellulose on Properties of PVA/Cellulose Composites 288 8.5.1 Characterization Methods for the Interaction between PVA and Cellulose 288 8.5.1.1 Raman Spectroscopy 288 8.5.1.2 Differential Scanning Calorimetry 288 8.5.1.3 X-Ray Powder Diffraction 289 8.5.1.4 Fourier Transform Infrared 289 8.5.2 Interaction between PVA and Cellulose 290 8.5.2.1 Molecular Interactions 290 8.5.2.2 Covalent Interactions 290 8.5.2.3 Nucleation of Cellulose 290 8.6 Conclusions and Outlook 291 References 291 9 Green Composites with Cellulose Nanoreinforcements 299Denis Mihaela Panaitescu, Adriana Nicoleta Frone and Ioana Chiulan 9.1 Introduction 299 9.2 A Short Overview on Nanosized Cellulose 300 9.3 General Aspects on Green Composites with Cellulose Nanoreinforcements 304 9.4 Green Composites from Biopolyamides and Cellulose Nanoreinforcements 305 9.5 Green Composites from Polylactide and Cellulose Nanoreinforcements 309 9.5.1 General Aspects 309 9.5.2 Processing Methods 310 9.5.2.1 Solution Casting 310 9.5.2.2 Melt Processing 311 9.5.2.3 Other Processing Techniques 314 9.5.3 Mechanical, Thermal, and Morphological Properties 314 9.5.4 Applications 318 9.6 Microbial Polyesters Nanocellulose Composites 319 9.6.1 PHAs Biosynthesis 319 9.6.2 General Overview on PHAs–Nanocellulose Composites 321 9.6.3 Processing Strategies for the Preparation of PHAs–Cellulose Nanocomposites 321 9.6.4 Morphological, Thermal, and Mechanical Characteristics of PHAs/Nanocellulose 323 9.6.5 Biodegradability and Biocompatibility 327 9.6.6 Applications 328 9.7 Conclusions 328 Acknowledgment 329 References 329 10 Biomass Composites from Bamboo-Based Micro/Nanofibers 339Haruo Nishida, Keisaku Yamashiro and Takayuki Tsukegi 10.1 Introduction 339 10.2 Bamboo Microfiber and Microcomposites 340 10.2.1 Bamboo Fibrovascular Bundle Structure 340 10.2.2 Preparation Methods of Short Bamboo Microfiber 341 10.2.3 Preparation of sBμF with Super-Heated Steam 342 10.2.3.1 SHS Treatment 342 10.2.3.2 Characterization Methods of sBμF 342 10.2.3.3 Changes in Surface Morphology of SHS-Treated Bamboo 344 10.2.3.4 Changes in Chemical and Physical Properties of SHS-Treated Bamboo 345 10.2.3.5 Classification of sBμF 348 10.2.4 Preparation of sBμF/Plastic Microcomposites 349 10.2.4.1 Mechanical and Physical Properties of sBμF/Plastic Microcomposites 349 10.2.4.2 Melt Processability of sBμF/Plastic Microcomposites 350 10.2.4.3 Electrical Properties of sBμF/Plastic Microcomposites 350 10.3 Bamboo Lignocellulosic Nanofiber and Nanocomposite 352 10.3.1 Nanofibrillation Technologies of Cellulose 352 10.3.2 Nanofibrillation Technologies of Lignocellulose 352 10.3.3 Reactive Processing for Nanofibrillation 353 10.3.4 Changes in Cellulose Crystalline Structure after Nanofibrillation 355 10.3.5 Preparation of BLCNF/Plastic Nanocomposites 355 10.3.6 Properties of BLCNF/Plastic Nanocomposites 356 10.4 Conclusions 357 References 358 11 Synthesis and Medicinal Properties of Polycarbonates and Resins from Renewable Sources 363Selvaraj Mohana Roopan, T.V. Surendra and G. Madhumitha 11.1 Introduction 363 11.2 Synthesis 365 11.2.1 Chemical Synthesis of Polycarbonates 365 11.2.2 Synthesis of Polycarbonate from Eugenol 365 11.2.3 Synthesis of Renewable Bisphenols from 2,3-Pentanedione 366 11.2.4 Synthesis of Mesoporous PC–SiO2 367 11.2.5 Synthesis of Fluorinated Epoxy-Terminated Bisphenol A Polycarbonate (FBPA-PC EP) 367 11.2.6 Synthesis of Eugenol-Based Epoxy Resin (DEU-EP) 368 11.3 Polycarbonates from Renewable Resources 368 11.3.1 Ethylene from Biomass 368 11.3.2 Synthesis of Dianols via Microwave Degradation 369 11.3.3 Glycerol Carbonates from Recyclable Catalyst 369 11.3.4 Alternative to Phosgene for Aromatic Polycarbonate and Isocyanate Syntheses 370 11.3.5 Liquid-Phase Synthesis of Polycarbonate 371 11.4 Medicinal Properties 372 11.4.1 Polycarbonates in Drug Delivery 372 11.4.2 Polycarbonates in Gene Transformation 372 11.4.3 Cytotoxicity Test of Polycarbonates 373 11.4.4 Polycarbonates in Autoimmunity 374 11.4.5 Activation of Hyperprolactinemia and Immunostimulatory Response by Polycarbonates 375 11.5 Conclusion 376 References 376 12 Nanostructured Polymer Composites with Modified Carbon Nanotubes 381A.P. Kharitonov, A.G. Tkachev, A.N. Blohin, I.V. Burakova, A.E. Burakov, A.E. Kucherova and A.A. Maksimkin 12.1 Introduction 382 12.1.1 Polymer Materials and Their Application 382 12.1.2 Carbon Nanotubes Application and Their Main Properties 387 12.2 Experimental Methods 390 12.2.1 Investigation of the CNTs Synthesis 390 12.2.2 CNTs Treatment 395 12.2.3 Composites Fabrication 395 12.2.4 Testing Procedures 395 12.3 Results and Discussion 396 12.3.1 FTIR Spectroscopy 396 12.3.2 Influence of Fluorination on the CNTs Specific Surface 396 12.3.3 X-Ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy Study 396 12.3.4 TGA of Virgin and Fluorinated CNTs 397 12.3.5 SEM Data of Composites Fracture 397 12.3.6 TGA and DSC of Composites 401 12.3.7 Mechanical Properties of Composites 402 12.3.7.1 Tensile Strength 402 12.3.7.2 Flexural Strength 403 12.4 Conclusion 403 Acknowledgments 404 References 404 13 Organic–Inorganic Nanocomposites Derived from Polysaccharides: Challenges and Opportunities 409Ana Barros-Timmons, Fabiane Oliveira and José A. Lopes-da-Silva 13.1 Introduction 409 13.2 Constituents 412 13.2.1 Polysaccharides 412 13.2.2 Inorganic Nanofillers 413 13.3 Preparation of Polysaccharide-Derived Nanocomposites 414 13.3.1 Surface Modification 414 13.3.2 Addition of Components 416 13.3.3 In Situ Preparation of Nanoparticles via Precursors 419 13.4 Processing 421 13.4.1 Plasticizers 422 13.4.2 Conventional Processing Methods to Prepare Inorganic–Polysaccharide Nanocomposites 422 13.4.3 Emerging Methods to Prepare Inorganic–Polysaccharide Nanocomposites 424 13.5 Trends and Perspectives 426 Acknowledgments 426 References 427 14 Natural Polymer-Based Nanocomposites: A Greener Approach for the Future 433Prasanta Baishya, Moon Mandal, Pankaj Gogoi and Tarun K. Maji 14.1 Introduction 433 14.2 Wood Polymer Nanocomposite 435 14.3 Basic Components of Wood Polymer Nanocomposite 436 14.4 Natural Polymer/Raw Material Used in Preparation of WPNC 436 14.4.1 Starch 436 14.4.2 Gluten 437 14.4.3 Chitosan 438 14.4.4 Vegetable Oil 439 14.4.4.1 Chemical Modification of Vegetable Oil 440 14.5 Wood 442 14.6 Cross-Linker 443 14.7 Modification of Natural Polymers 443 14.7.1 Grafting of Starch 443 14.7.2 Modification of Starch by Other Methods 444 14.7.3 Plasticizer 445 14.7.4 Nano-Reinforcing Agents 446 14.7.4.1 Montmorillonite 446 14.7.4.2 Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 447 14.7.4.3 Carbon Nanotubes 448 14.7.4.4 Nanocellulose 448 14.8 Properties of Natural Polymer-Based Composites 449 14.8.1 Mechanical Properties 449 14.8.2 Thermal Properties 450 14.8.3 Water Uptake and Dimensional Stability 450 14.9 Conclusion and Future Prospects 451 References 452 15 Cellulose Whisker-Based Green Polymer Composites 461Silviya Elanthikkal, Tania Francis, C. Sangeetha and G. Unnikrishnan 15.1 Cellulose: Discovery, Sources, and Microstructure 462 15.1.1 Sources of Cellulose 462 15.1.2 Microstructure of Cellulose 463 15.2 Nanocellulose 466 15.2.1 Acid Hydrolysis 467 15.2.2 Mechanical Processes 470 15.2.3 TEMPO-Mediated Oxidation 471 15.2.4 Steam Explosion Method 472 15.2.5 Enzymatic Hydrolysis 473 15.2.6 Hydrolysis with Gaseous Acid 474 15.2.7 Treatment with Ionic Liquid 474 15.3 Polymer Composites 475 15.3.1 Polymer Composite Fabrication Techniques 476 15.3.1.1 Casting Evaporation Technique 476 15.3.1.2 Extrusion 476 15.3.1.3 Compression Molding 477 15.3.1.4 Injection Molding 478 15.3.2 Cellulose Whisker Composites: Literature-Based Discussion 478 15.3.2.1 Latex-Based Composites 478 15.3.2.2 Polar Polymer-Based Composites 479 15.3.2.3 Nonpolar Polymer-Based Composites 479 15.4 Applications of Cellulose Whisker Composites 483 15.4.1 Packaging 484 15.4.2 Automotive and Toys 484 15.4.3 Electronics 484 15.4.4 Biomedical Applications 485 References 486 16 Poly(Lactic Acid) Nanocomposites Reinforced with Different Additives 495Ravi Babu Valapa, G. Pugazhenthi and Vimal Katiyar 16.1 Introduction 495 16.2 Biopolymers 497 16.2.1 Classification of Biopolymers 497 16.3 PLA Nanocomposites 502 16.3.1 PLA–Clay Nanocomposites 502 16.3.2 PLA–Carbonaceous Nanocomposites 507 16.3.3 PLA-Bio Filler Composites 510 16.3.4 PLA–Silica Nanocomposites 516 16.4 Summary 516 References 516 17 Nanocrystalline Cellulose: Green, Multifunctional and Sustainable Nanomaterials 523Samira Bagheri, Nurhidayatullaili Muhd Julkapli and Negar Mansouri 17.1 Introduction: Natural Based Products 523 17.2 Nanocellulose 524 17.2.1 Nanocellulose: Properties 524 17.2.1.1 Nanocellulose: Mechanical Properties 526 17.2.1.2 Nanocellulose: Physical Properties 526 17.2.1.3 Nanocellulose: Surface Chemistry Properties 529 17.2.2 Nanocellulose: Synthesis Process 529 17.2.2.1 Conventional Acid Hydrolysis Process 529 17.2.3 Nanocellulose: Limitations 530 17.2.3.1 Single Particles Dispersion 530 17.2.3.2 Barrier Properties 530 17.2.3.3 Permeability Properties 531 17.3 Nanocellulose: Chemical Functionalization 531 17.3.1 Organic Compounds Functionalization 532 17.3.1.1 Molecular Functionalization 532 17.3.1.2 Macromolecular Functionalization 536 17.3.2 Nanocellulose: Inorganic Compounds Functionalization 539 17.3.2.1 Nanocellulose-Titanium Oxide Functionalization 539 17.3.2.2 Nanocellulose-Fluorine Functionalization 539 17.3.2.3 Nanocellulose-Gold Functionalization 540 17.3.2.4 Nanocellulose-Silver Functionalization 540 17.3.2.5 Nanocellulose-Pd Functionalization 540 17.3.2.6 Nanocellulose-CdS Functionalization 541 17.4 Applications of Functionalized Nanocellulose 541 17.4.1 Wastewater Treatment 541 17.4.2 Biomedical Applications 542 17.4.3 Biosensor and Bioimaging 542 17.4.4 Catalysis 543 17.5 Conclusion 543 Acknowledgment 544 References 544 18 Halloysite-Based Bionanocomposites 557Giuseppe Lazzara, Marina Massaro, Stefana Milioto and Serena Riela 18.1 Introduction 557 18.2 Biodegradable Polymers 559 18.2.1 Cellulose 559 18.2.2 Chitosan 560 18.2.3 Starch 561 18.2.4 Alginate 562 18.2.5 Pectin 562 18.3 Natural Inorganic Filler: Halloysite Nanotubes 563 18.3.1 Functionalization of HNTs 565 18.3.1.1 Functionalization of External Surface 565 18.3.1.2 Functionalization of the Lumen 567 18.3.2 Composites Structured with Halloysite 568 18.4 Bionanocomposites 569 18.4.1 HNT-Biopolymer Nanocomposite Formation 569 18.4.2 Properties of HNTs-Biopolymer Nanocomposites 570 18.4.2.1 Bionanocomposites Surface Morphology 571 18.4.2.2 Bionanocomposites Mechanical and Thermal Response 573 18.5 Applications of HNT/Polysaccharide Nanocomposites 576 18.6 Conclusions 578 References 579 19 Nanostructurated Composites Based on Biodegradable Polymers and Silver Nanoparticles 585Oana Fufă, George Mihail Vlăsceanu, Georgiana Dolete, Daniela Cabuzu, Rebecca Alexandra Puiu, Andreea Cîrjă, Bogdan Nicoară and Alexandru Mihai Grumezescu 19.1 Introduction 585 19.2 Silver Nanoparticles 586 19.3 Applications of Silver Nanoparticles 588 19.4 Silver Nanoparticle Composites 594 19.4.1 In situ and ex situ Strategies for AgNPs-Based Composites with Polymer Matrix 594 19.4.2 Other AgNPs Composites 599 19.5 Applications of Silver Nanoparticles Composites 600 19.5.1 Active Substance Delivery Composites 600 19.5.2 Antimicrobial Composites 603 19.6 Conclusions and Future Prospectives 607 Acknowledgments 608 References 608 20 Starch-Based Biomaterials and Nanocomposites 623Arantzazu Valdés and María Carmen Garrigós 20.1 Introduction 623 20.2 Starch: Structure and Characteristics 625 20.3 Applicability of Starch in Food Industry 627 20.3.1 Starch Biomaterials: Films, Coatings, and Blends 629 20.3.2 Reinforced Materials 631 20.3.3 Starch Nanoparticles 632 20.4 Conclusion 632 References 633 21 Green Nanocomposites-Based on PLA and Natural Organic Fillers 637Roberto Scaffaro, Luigi Botta, Francesco Lopresti, Andrea Maio and Fiorenza Sutera 21.1 Introduction 637 21.2 Poly(lactic acid) (PLA) 638 21.3 Natural Organic Nanofillers 640 21.3.1 Cellulose 641 21.3.1.1 Main Derivatization Methods Used to Increase Cellulose Affinity to PLA 643 21.3.2 Chitin 645 21.3.3 Starch 646 21.4 Bionanocomposites Based on PLA 648 21.4.1 PLA/cellulose Nanocomposites 648 21.4.1.1 Preparation 648 21.4.1.2 Properties 651 21.4.1.3 Degradation 653 21.4.2 PLA/chitin Nanocomposites 654 21.4.2.1 Preparation 654 21.4.2.2 Properties 655 21.4.3 PLA/starch Nanocomposites 656 21.4.3.1 Preparation 656 21.4.3.2 Properties 657 21.5 Conclusions 659 References 659 22 Chitin and Chitosan-Based (NANO) Composites 671André R. Fajardo, Antonio G. B. Pereira, Alessandro F. Martins, Alexandre T. Paulino, Edvani C. Muniz and You-Lo Hsieh 22.1 Introduction 672 22.1.1 Chitin 672 22.1.2 Chitosan 673 22.2 Chitin and Chitosan Properties and Processing 674 22.3 Preparation and Characterization of Ct and Cs Composites: An Overview 675 22.4 Ct- and Cs-Metal Composites 679 22.5 Ct and Cs-Inorganic Composites 685 22.5.1 Food Packaging 685 22.5.2 Membranes 685 22.5.3 Biomedical Uses 685 22.5.4 Environmental Remediation 686 22.6 Composites Based on Ct and Cs Whiskers 687 22.7 Overview, Perspectives, and Conclusion 690 References 691 Index 701

Read more less

Book SynopsisOverall, this book presents a detailed and comprehensive overview of the state-of-the-art development of different nanoscale intelligent materials for advanced applications. Apart from fundamental aspects of fabrication and characterization of nanomaterials, it also covers key advanced principles involved in utilization of functionalities of these nanomaterials in appropriate forms. It is very important to develop and understand the cutting-edge principles of how to utilize nanoscale intelligent features in the desired fashion. These unique nanoscopic properties can either be accessed when the nanomaterials are prepared in the appropriate form, e.g., composites, or in integrated nanodevice form for direct use as electronic sensing devices. In both cases, the nanostructure has to be appropriately prepared, carefully handled, and properly integrated into the desired application in order to efficiently access its intelligent features. These aspects are reviewed in detail in three themed sTable of ContentsPreface xvii Part 1 Nanomaterials, Fabrication and Biomedical Applications 1 Electrospinning Materials for Skin Tissue Engineering 3 Beste Kinikoglu 1.1 Skin Tissue Engineering Scaffolds 4 1.2 Conclusions 14 References 15 2 Electrospinning: A Versatile Technique to Synthesize Drug Delivery Systems 21 Xueping Zhang, Dong Liu and Tianyan You 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 The Types of Delivered Drugs 22 2.3 Polymers Used in Electrospinning 29 2.4 The Development of Electrospinning Process for Drug Delivery 36 2.5 Conclusions 41 Acknowledgment 42 References 42 3 Electrospray Jet Emission: An Alternative Interpretation Invoking Dielectrophoretic Forces 51 Francesco Aliotta, Oleg Gerasymov and Pietro Calandra 3.1 Introduction 52 3.2 Electrospray: How It Works? 54 3.3 Historical Background 63 3.4 How the Current (and Wrong) Description of the Electrospray Process Has Been Generated? 65 3.5 What Is Wrong in the Current Description? 68 3.6 Some Results Shedding More Light 70 3.7 Discriminating between Electrophoretic and Dielectrophoretic Forces 72 3.8 Some Theoretical Aspects of Dielectrophoresis 76 3.9 Conclusions 83 References 86 4 Advanced Silver and Oxide Hybrids of Catalysts During Formaldehyde Production 91 Anita Kovač Kralj 4.1 Introduction 92 4.2 The Catalysis 93 4.3 Case Study 95 4.4 Limited Hybrid Catalyst Method for Formaldehyde Production 97 4.5 Conclusion 104 4.6 Nomenclatures 105 References 105 5 Physico-chemical Characterization and Basic Research Principles of Advanced Drug Delivery Nanosystems 107 Natassa Pippa, Stergios Pispas and Costas Demetzos 5.1 Introduction 108 5.2 Basic Research Principles and Techniques for the Physicochemical Characterization of Advanced Drug Delivery Nanosystems 108 5.3 Conclusions 122 References 122 6 Nanoporous Alumina as an Intelligent Nanomaterial for Biomedical Applications 127 Moom Sinn Aw and Dusan Losic 6.1 Introduction 127 6.2 Nanoporous Anodized Alumina as a Drug Nano-carrier 129 6.3 Biocompatibility of NAA and NNAA Materials 138 6.4 NAA for Diabetic and Pancreatic Applications 143 6.5 NAA Applications in Orthopedics 144 6.6 NAA Applications for Heart, Coronary, and Vasculature Treatment 148 6.7 NAA in Dentistry 150 6.8 Conclusions and Future Prospects 152 Acknowledgment 153 References 154 7 Nanomaterials: Structural Peculiarities, Biological Effects, and Some Aspects of Applications 161 N.F. Starodub, M.V. Taran, A.M. Katsev, C. Bisio and M. Guidotti 7.1 Introduction 162 7.2 Physicochemical Properties Determining the Bioavailability and Toxicity of NPS 164 7.3 Current Nanoecotoxicological Knowledge 168 7.4 Modern Direction of the Application of Nanocomposites as Basis for Detoxication Process 187 7.5 Conclusions 189 Acknowledgments 190 References 190 8 Biomedical Applications of Intelligent Nanomaterials 199 M. D. Fahmy, H. E. Jazayeri, M. Razavi, M. Hashemi, M. Omidi, M. Farahani, E. Salahinejad, A. Yadegari, S. Pitcher and Lobat Tayebi 8.1 Introduction 200 8.2 Polymeric Nanoparticles 202 8.3 Lipid-based Nanoparticles 206 8.4 Carbon Nanostructures 213 8.5 Nanostructured Metals 219 8.6 Hybrid Nanostructures 223 8.7 Concluding Remarks 228 References 229 Part 2 Nanomaterials for Energy, Electronics, and Biosensing 9 Phase Change Materials as Smart Nanomaterials for Thermal Energy Storage in Buildings 249 M. Kheradmand, M. Abdollahzadeh, M. Azenha and J.L.B. de Aguiar 9.1 Introduction 250 9.2 Phase Change Materials: Definition, Principle of Operation, and Classifications 252 9.3 PCM-enhanced Cement-based Materials 254 9.4 Hybrid PCM for Thermal Storage 255 9.5 Numerical Simulations 267 9.6 Thermal Modeling of Phase Change 269 9.7 Nanoparticle-enhanced Phase Change Material 280 9.8 Conclusions (General Remarks) 288 References 289 10 Nanofluids with Enhanced Heat Transfer Properties for Thermal Energy Storage 295 Manila Chieruzzi, Adio Miliozzi, Luigi Torre and José Maria Kenny 10.1 Introduction 296 10.2 Thermal Energy Storage 298 10.3 Nanofluids for Thermal Energy Storage 313 10.4 Nanofluids Based on Molten Salts: Enhancement of Thermal Properties 330 10.5 Conclusions 349 References 351 11 Resistive Switching of Vertically Aligned Carbon Nanotubes for Advanced Nanoelectronics Devices 361 O.A. Ageev, Yu. F. Blinov, M.V. Il’ina, B.G. Konoplev and V.A. Smirnov 11.1 Introduction 362 11.2 Theoretical Description of Resistive Switching Mechanism of Structures Based on VACNT 363 11.3 Techniques for Measuring the Electrical Resistivity and Young’s Modulus of VACNT Based on Scanning Probe Microscopy 377 11.4 Experimental Studies of Resistive Switching in Structures Based on VACNT Using Scanning Tunnel Microscopy 384 References 391 12 Multi-objective Design of Nanoscale Double Gate MOSFET Devices Using Surrogate Modeling and Global Optimization 395 T. Bentrcia, F. Djeffal and E. Chebaki 12.1 Introduction 396 12.2 Downscaling Parasitic Effects 400 12.3 Modeling Framework 405 12.4 Simulation and Results 412 12.5 Concluding Remarks 422 References 422 13 Graphene-based Electrochemical Biosensors: New Trends and Applications 427 Georgia-Paraskevi Nikoleli, Stephanos Karapetis, Spyridoula Bratakou, Dimitrios P. Nikolelis, Nikolaos Tzamtzis and Vasillios N. Psychoyios 13.1 Introduction 428 13.2 Scope of This Review 429 13.3 Graphene and Sensors 430 13.4 Graphene Nanomaterials Used in Electrochemical (Bio)sensors Fabrication 430 13.5 Graphene-based Enzymatic Electrodes 432 13.6 Graphene-based Electrochemical DNA Sensors 437 13.7 Graphene-based Electrochemical Immunosensors 439 13.8 Commercial Activities in the Field of Graphene Sensors 442 13.9 Recent Developments in the Field of Graphene Sensors 442 13.10 Conclusions and Future Prospects 443 Acknowledgments 445 References 445 Part 3 Smart Nanocomposites, Fabrication, and Applications 14 Carbon Fibers-based Silica Aerogel Nanocomposites 451 Agnieszka Ślosarczyk 14.1 Introduction to Nanotechnology 451 14.2 Chemistry of Sol–gel Process 454 14.3 Types of Silica Aerogel Nanocomposites 462 14.4 Carbon Fiber-based Silica Aerogel Nanocomposites 476 14.5 Conclusions 493 References 494 15 Hydrogel–carbon Nanotubes Composites for Protection of Egg Yolk Antibodies 501 Bellingeri Romina, Alustiza Fabrisio, Picco Natalia, Motta Carlos, Grosso Maria C, Barbero Cesar, Acevedo Diego and Vivas Adriana 15.1 Introduction 502 15.2 Polymeric Hydrogels 504 15.3 Carbon Nanotubes 507 15.4 Polymer–CNT Composites 511 15.5 Egg Yolk Antibodies Protection 515 15.6 In Vitro Evaluation of Nanocomposite Performance 517 15.7 In Vivo Evaluation of Nanocomposite Performance 518 15.8 Concluding Remarks and Future Trends 521 References 522 16 Green Fabrication of Metal Nanoparticles 533 Anamika Mubayi, Sanjukta Chatterji and Geeta Watal 16.1 Introduction 533 16.2 Development of Herbal Medicines 535 16.3 Green Synthesis of Nanoparticles 536 16.4 Characterization of Phytofabricated Nanoparticles 539 16.5 Impact of Plant-mediated Nanoparticles on Therapeutic Efficacy of Medicinal Plants 540 16.6 Conclusions 550 References 551

Read more less

Book SynopsisDetails the source, release, exposure, adsorption, aggregation, bioavailability, transport, transformation, and modeling of engineered nanoparticles found in many common products and applications Covers synthesis, environmental application, detection, and characterization of engineered nanoparticles Details the toxicity and risk assessment of engineered nanoparticles Includes topics on the transport, transformation, and modeling of engineered nanoparticles Presents the latest developments and knowledge of engineered nanoparticles Written by world leading experts from prestigious universities and companies Table of ContentsSERIES PREFACE vii PREFACE ix LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS xi PART 1 SYNTHESIS, ENVIRONMENTAL APPLICATION, DETECTION, AND CHARACTERIZATION OF ENGINEERED NANOPARTICLES 1 1 Challenges Facing the Environmental Nanotechnology Research Enterprise 3Stacey M. Louie, Amy L. Dale, Elizabeth A. Casman, and Gregory V. Lowry 2 Engineered Nanoparticles for Water Treatment Application 20Jeehye Byun and Cafer T. Yavuz 3 Mass Spectrometric Methods for Investigating the Influence of Surface Chemistry on the Fate of Core–Shell Nanoparticles in Biological and Environmental Samples 31Sukru Gokhan Elci, Alyssa L. M. Marsico, Yuqing Xing, Bo Yan, and Richard W. Vachet 4 Separation and Analysis of Nanoparticles (NP) in Aqueous Environmental Samples 53Ralf Kaegi 5 Nanocatalysts for Groundwater Remediation 75Kimberly N. Heck, Lori A. Pretzer, and Michael S. Wong PART 2 ENVIRONMENTAL RELEASE, PROCESSES, AND MODELING OF ENGINEERED NANOPARTICLES 93 6 Properties, Sources, Pathways, and Fate of Nanoparticles in the Environment 95Yon Ju-Nam and Jamie Lead 7 Environmental Exposure Modeling Methods for Engineered Nanomaterials 118Niall J. O’Brien and Enda J. Cummins 8 Aggregation Kinetics and Fractal Dimensions of Nanomaterials in Environmental Systems 139Navid B. Saleh, A. R. M. Nabiul Afrooz, Nirupam Aich, and Jaime Plazas-Tuttle 9 Adsorption of Organic Compounds by Engineered Nanoparticles 160Bo Pan and Baoshan Xing 10 Sorption of Heavy Metals by Engineered Nanomaterials 182Gangfen Miao, Kun Yang, and Daohui Lin 11 Emission, Transformation, and Fate of Nanoparticles in the Atmosphere 205Prashant Kumar and Abdullah N. Al-Dabbous 12 Nanoparticle Aggregation and Deposition in Porous Media 224Yao Xiao and Mark R. Wiesner 13 Interfacial Charge Transfers of Surface-Modified TiO2 Nanoparticles in Photocatalytic Water Treatment 245Hyunwoong Park 14 Chemical Transformations of Metal, Metal Oxide, and Metal Chalcogenide Nanoparticles in the Environment 261Thomas R. Kuech, Robert J. Hamers, and Joel A. Pedersen PART 3 TOXICITY OF ENGINEERED NANOPARTICLES AND RISK ASSESSMENT 293 15 Fate, Behavior, and Biophysical Modeling of Nanoparticles in Living Systems 295Emppu Salonen, Feng Ding, and Pu Chun Ke 16 Subchronic Inhalation Toxicity Study in RatsWith Carbon Nanofibers: Need for Establishing a Weight-of-Evidence Approach for Setting no Observed Adverse Effect Levels (NOAELs) 314David B. Warheit, Ken L. Reed, and Michael P. DeLorme 17 Toxicity of Manufactured Nanomaterials to Microorganisms 320Yuan Ge, Allison M. Horst, Junyeol Kim, John H. Priester, Zoe S. Welch, and Patricia A. Holden 18 Toxicity of Engineered Nanoparticles to Fish 347Wei Liu, Yanmin Long, Nuoya Yin, Xingchen Zhao, Cheng Sun, Qunfang Zhou, and Guibin Jiang 19 Toxicity of Engineered Nanoparticles to Aquatic Invertebrates 367Denisa Cupi, Sara N. Sørensen, Lars M. Skjolding, and Anders Baun 20 Effects and Uptake of Nanoparticles in Plants 386Arnab Mukherjee, Jose R. Peralta-Videa, Jorge Gardea-Torresdey, and Jason C. White 21 Feasibility and Challenges of Human Health Risk Assessment for Engineered Nanomaterials 409Karin Aschberger, Frans M. Christensen, Kirsten Rasmussen, and Keld A. Jensen 22 Ecotoxicological Risk of Engineered Nanomaterials (ENMs) for the Health of the Marine Environment 442Xiaoshan Zhu, Shengyan Tian, Chao Wang, Lihong Zhao, Jin Zhou, and Zhonghua Cai INDEX 475

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis issue contains 9 papers from The American Ceramic Society's 40th International Conference on Advanced Ceramics and Composites, held in Daytona Beach, Florida, January 24-29, 2016. This issue includes papers presented in the 10th International Symposium on Advanced Processing and Manufacturing Technologies for Structural and Multifunctional Materials and Systems (Symposium 8), Additive Manufacturing and 3D Printing Technologies (Focused Session 4), and Field Assisted Sintering (Focused Session 5).Table of ContentsPreface vii Introduction ix FIELD ASSISTED SINTERING Flash Sintering of Alumina and Its Microstructural Evolution 3Mattia Biesuz and Vincenzo M. Sglavo Enhancements on FAST Sintering Systems Promote Transfer from the Lab to Industrial Applications 11J. Hennicke, T. Kessel, and J. Raethel Combining Flash Sintering/Sinterforging with Hybrid FAST/SPS Technology for Oxide and Non-Oxide Materials 21J. Hennicke, T. Kessel, and J. Raethel Low Temperature Fabrication of Transparent Magnesium Aluiminate Spinel by High Pressure Spark Plasma Sintering 27M. Sokol, S. Kalabukhov, and N. Frage ADVANCED PROCESSING AND MANUFACTURING Defect Control of SiC Polycrystalline Fiber Aiming for Higher Strength 39Toshihiro Ishikawa and Hiroshi Oda TEM Analysis of Interfaces in Diffusion-Bonded Silicon Carbide Ceramics Joined Using Metallic Interlayers 49T. Ozaki, Y. Hasegawa, H. Tsuda, S. Mori, M. C. Halbig, M. Singh, and R. Asthana Micro-Computed Tomography Characterization of Isotropic Filler Distribution in Magnetorheological Elastomeric Composites 57Sneha Samal, Jarmil Vlach, Marcela Kolinova, and Pavel Kavan ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING Development of Advanced Ceramic Fuel Cells Using Additive Manufacturing Technology (I): Design and Modeling 73Yanhai Du, Aliaa Maar, and Kai Zhao Rapid Manufacturing of Ceramic Parts 81Wang Xiufeng, Wang Jia, Fan Xiaopu, Yu Chenglong, Jiang Hongtao, Yang Yang, Li Hui, Cao Xinqiang, and Zhang Juanjuan ADVANCED MATERIALS AND INNOVATIVE PROCESSING IDEAS FOR THE INDUSTRIAL ROOT TECHNOLOGY Nano Technology in Development of Functional Coatings 91A.S. Khanna, Shalini Dolai, and Karanveer Aneja Tailoring the Functional Properties of Niobium Carbide 101Mathias Woydt, Hardy Mohrbacher, Jef Vleugels, and Shuigen Huang Author Index 115

Read more less

Book SynopsisIn this book, we have summarized recent progresses due to novel nanomaterials for sustainable water resources. Book provides a summary of the state of the art knowledge to scientists, engineers and policy makers, about recent developments due to nanotechnology for sustainable water resources arena. The advances in sustainable water resources technologies in the context of modern society's interests will be considered preferably which allow to identify grand challenges and directions for future research. The book contributors have been selected from all over the world and the essential functions of the nanotechnologies have presented rather than their anticipated applications. Moreover, up to date knowledge on economy, toxicity and regulation related to nanotechnology are presented in detail. In the end, role of nanotechnology for green and sustainable future has also been briefly debated.Table of ContentsPreface xix Part I Nanotechnology for Natural Resources 1 Application of Nanotechnology in Water Treatment, Wastewater Treatment and Other Domains of Environmental Engineering Science –A Broad Scientific Perspective and Critical Review 3SukanchanPalit 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 The Vision of the Study 5 1.3 The Need and the Rationale of the Study 6 1.4 The Scope of the Study 7 1.5 Environmental Sustainability, the Vision to Move Forward and the Immense Challenges 7 1.6 Water and Wastewater Treatment – The Scientific Doctrine and Immense Scientific Cognizance 7 1.6.1 Nanotechnology and Drinking Water Treatment 8 1.6.2 Nanotechnology and Industrial Wastewater Treatment 8 1.7 The Scientific Vision of Membrane Science 9 1.7.1 Classification of Membrane Separation Processes 9 1.7.2 A Review of Water Treatment Membrane Technologies 9 1.8 Recent Scientific Endeavour in the Field of Membrane Separation Processes 11 1.9 Recent Scientific Pursuit in the Field of Application of Nanotechnology in Water Treatment 11 1.10 Scientific Motivation and Objectives in Application of Nanotechnology in Wastewater Treatment 15 1.11 Desalination and the Future of Human Society 16 1.11.1 Recent Scientific Endeavour in the Field of Desalination Procedure 16 1.11.2 Scientific Motivation and Objectives in Desalination Science 18 1.12 NanofiltrationTechnologies, the Future of Reverse Osmosis and the Scientific Vision of Global Water Issues 19 1.13 Recent Advances in Membrane Science and Technology in Seawater Desalination 19 1.14 Recent Scientific Endeavour in the Field of Nanofiltration, Reverse Osmosis, Forward Osmosis and Other Branches of Membrane Science 20 1.14.1 Scientific Motivation and Technological Objectives in the Field of Nanofiltration, Reverse Osmosis and the Innovative World of Forward Osmosis 21 1.15 Current and Potential Applications for Water and Wastewater Treatment 22 1.15.1 Vision of Adsorption Techniques 22 1.15.2 Potential Application in Water Treatment 22 1.15.3 The Avenues of Membranes and Membrane Processes 23 1.15.4 The Science of Disinfection and Microbial Control 23 1.15.5 Potential Applications in Water Treatment 24 1.16 Water Treatment Membrane Technologies 24 1.17 Non-Traditional Advanced Oxidation Techniques and its Wide Vision 25 1.17.1 Ozonation Technique and its Broad Application in Environmental Engineering Science 25 1.17.2 Scientific Motivation and Objectives in Ozonation Technique 26 1.18 Scientific Cognizance, Scientific Vision and the Future Avenues of Nanotechnology 26 1.18.1 The True Challenge and Vision of Industrial Wastewater Treatment 26 1.19 Advanced Oxidation Processes, Non-Traditional Environmental Engineering Techniques and its Vision for the Future 27 1.19.1 Scientific Research Endeavour in the Field of Advanced Oxidation Processes 27 1.20 Environmental Sustainability, the Futuristic Technologies and the Wide Vision of Nanotechnology 30 1.20.1 Vision of Science, Avenues of Nanotechnology and the Future of Industrial Pollution Control 30 1.20.2 Technological Validation, the Science of Industrial Wastewater Treatment and the Vision Towards Future 31 1.21 Integrated Water Quality Management System and Global Water Issues 31 1.21.1 Groundwater Remediation and Global Water Initiatives 31 1.21.2 Arsenic Groundwater Remediation, the Future of Environmental Engineering Science and the Vision for the Future 32 1.21.3 Scientific Motivation and Objectives in the Field of Arsenic Groundwater Remediation 32 1.21.4 Vision of Application of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology in Tackling Global Groundwater Quality Issues 33 1.21.5 Heavy Metal Groundwater Contamination and Solutions 33 1.21.6 Arsenic Groundwater Contamination and Vision for the Future 34 1.22 Integrated Groundwater Quality Management System and the Vision for the Future 34 1.23 Membrane Science and Wastewater Reclamation 34 1.24 Future of Groundwater Heavy Metal Remediation and Application of Nanotechnology 35 1.25 Future Research and Development Initiatives in the Field of Nanotechnology Applications in Wastewater Treatment 36 1.26 Futuristic Vision, the World of Scientific Validation and the Scientific Avenues for the Future 36 1.27 Future Research and Development Needs 37 1.28 Conclusions 37 References 37 2 Nanotechnology Solutions for Public Water Challenges 41Ankita Dhillon and Dinesh Kumar 2.1 Introduction 42 2.2 Application of Nanotechnology in Water and Wastewater Treatment 44 2.2.1 Photocatalysis 45 2.2.2 Nanofiltration 49 2.2.3 Nanosorbents 53 2.3 Effects of Nanotechnology 57 2.4 Conclusions 58 Acknowledgements 59 References 59 3 Nanotechnology: An Emerging Field for Sustainable Water Resources 73Pradeep Pratap Singh and Ambika 3.1 Introduction 73 3.2 Classification of Nanomaterials for Wastewater Treatment 74 3.2.1 Nanoadsorbents 74 3.2.2 Nanocatalysts 75 3.2.3 Nanomembranes 75 3.3 Synthesis of Nanomaterials 77 3.3.1 Conventional Approach for the Production of NPs 77 3.3.2 Precipitation of Nanoparticles 77 3.3.3 Nanoparticles from Emulsions 77 3.3.4 Green Approach for the Synthesis of Nanoparticles 78 3.4 Application of Nanotechnology in Wastewater Treatment 78 3.4.1 Nanoadsorbents 78 3.4.2 Nanocatalysts 81 3.4.3 Nanomembranes 86 3.4.4 Miscellaneous Nanomaterials 88 3.5 Risk of Nanotechnology 89 3.6 Conclusions 89 References 90 4 Removal of Hazardous Contaminants from Water or Wastewater Using Polymer Nanocomposites Materials 103Felycia Edi Soetaredjo, Suryadi Ismadji, Kuncoro Foe and Gladdy L. Woworuntu 4.1 Introduction 103 4.2 Adsorption of Heavy Metals 104 4.3 Adsorption of Dyes 106 4.4 Adsorption of Antibiotics and Other Organic Contaminants 111 4.5 Processing of Polymer-Based Nanocomposites as Adsorbents 113 4.5.1 Exfoliation Adsorption 113 4.5.2 Melt Intercalation 114 4.5.3 Template Synthesis 115 4.5.4 In-Situ Polymerization 115 4.6 Clay–Polymer Nanocomposites 116 4.7 Carbon Nanotube Polymer Nanocomposites 119 4.8 Magnetic Polymer Nanocomposites 119 4.9 Adsorption Equilibrium Studies 120 4.9.1 Langmuir Isotherm 120 4.9.2 Freundlich Isotherm 126 4.9.3 Dubinin Radushkevich 126 4.9.4 Temkin Adsorption Equation 128 4.9.5 Sips Isotherm Equation 129 4.9.6 Toth Adsorption Equation 130 4.10 Adsorption Kinetic Studies 130 4.11 Summary 132 Acknowledgment 133 References 133 5 Sustainable Nanocarbons as Potential Sensor for Safe Water 141Kumud Malika Tripathi, Anupriya Singh, Yusik Myung, TaeYoung Kim, and Sumit Kumar Sonkar 5.1 Introduction 141 5.2 Recent Advancement in Sustainable Nanocarbons 144 5.3 Sustainable Nanocarbons for Safe Water 149 5.3.1 Sensing of Toxic Metal Ions 150 5.3.2 Sensing of Inorganic Pollutants 156 5.3.3 Sensing of Organic Pollutants 161 5.3.4 Sensing of Nanomaterials 165 5.3.5 Sensing of Byproducts 166 5.4 Concluding Remarks and Future Trend 166 Acknowledgment 167 References 167 Part 2 Nanosensors as Tools for Water Resources 6 Nanosensors as Tools for Water Resources 179Ephraim Vunain and A. K. Mishra 6.1 Introduction 180 6.1.1 Water Resources Contamination Due to Heavy Metals 181 6.1.2 Water Resources Contamination Due to Nutrients 182 6.2 Contaminant Monitoring Procedures 183 6.2.1 Electrochemical-Based Sensors 184 6.2.2 Graphene and Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs)-Based Sensors 188 6.2.3 Biosensors 189 6.2.4 Nanoparticles- and Nanocomposites-Based Sensors 189 6.3 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 190 References 191 7 Emerging Nanosensing Strategies for Heavy Metal Detection 199S. Varun and S.C.G. Kiruba Daniel 7.1 Introduction 199 7.2 Recent Trends in Nanosensing Strategies: An Overview 201 7.2.1 Nanosensors Based on Biosensing Principle 201 7.2.2 Nanoparticle-Mediated Electrodes 208 7.2.3 Interference Sensing: A New Paradigm 213 7.3 Microfluidic Nanotechnology: Emerging Platform for Sensing 214 7.3.1 Microfluidic Sensors 214 7.3.2 Paper-Based Microfluidic Sensors 214 7.4 Summary and Outlook 220 Acknowledgement 220 References 220 8 Capture of Water Contaminants by a New Generation of Sorbents Based on Graphene and Related Materials 227Ana L. Cukierman and Pablo R. Bonelli 8.1 Introduction 228 8.2 Characterization of Physicochemical, Mechanical, and Magnetic Properties of Graphene-Based Materials 229 8.3 Removal of Inorganic and Water-Soluble Organic Contaminants with Graphene-Based Sorbents 231 8.3.1 Removal of Inorganic Contaminants: Heavy Metal and Nonmetal Ions 232 8.3.2 Removal of Water-Soluble Organic Contaminants: Dyes and Pharmaceuticals 241 8.4 Cleanup of Oil Spills and Other Water-Insoluble Organic Contaminants 255 8.5 Summary and Outlook 267 Acknowledgment 268 References 269 9 Design and Analysis of Carbon-Based Nanomaterials for Removal of Environmental Contaminants 277Yoshitaka Fujimoto 9.1 Introduction 277 9.2 Methodology 278 9.2.1 First Principles Total Energy Calculation 278 9.2.2 Formation Energy 279 9.2.3 Adsorption Energy 280 9.2.4 Charge Density Difference 280 9.2.5 Work Function 280 9.2.6 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy Image 280 9.2.7 Computational Details 281 9.3 Substitutionally Doped Graphene Bilayer 281 9.3.1 Structure 281 9.3.2 Energetics 282 9.3.3 Energy Band Structure 284 9.3.4 Work Function 285 9.3.5 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy Image 285 9.4 Gas Adsorption Effect 287 9.4.1 Structure and Energetics 287 9.4.2 Energy-Band Structures and Electron States 289 9.4.3 Total Charge Density 291 9.4.4 Work Function 293 9.4.5 Scanning Tunnelling Microscopy Image 294 9.5 Conclusions 295 Acknowledgment 295 References 296 10 Nanosensors: From Chemical to Green Synthesis for Wastewater Remediation 301Priyanka Joshi and Dinesh Kumar 10.1 Introduction 302 10.2 Synthesis of Nanomaterials 303 10.2.1 Physical Methods 303 10.2.2 Chemical Method 305 10.3 Biological Methods 309 10.3.1 Biomolecule 309 10.3.2 Microorganism 310 10.3.3 Plant Materials 311 10.4 Application of Nanoparticles 311 10.5 Conclusions and Future Prospects 315 Acknowledgment 316 References 316 11 As-Prepared Carbon Nanotubes for Water Purification: Pollutant Removal and Magnetic Separation 329Jie Ma, Yao Ma and Fei Yu 11.1 Introduction 330 11.2 Experimental Method 331 11.2.1 Materials 331 11.2.2 Preparation of Magnetic Carbon Nanotube 331 11.2.3 Batch Adsorption Experiments 333 11.2.4 Characterization Method 335 11.3 Removal of Dye from Aqueous Solution by NaClO-Modified Magnetic Carbon Nanotube 336 11.3.1 Characterization of Adsorbents 336 11.3.2 Adsorption Properties 340 11.4 Removal of Toluene, Ethylbenzene, and Xylene from Aqueous Solution by KOH-Activated Magnetic Carbon Nanotube 343 11.4.1 Characterization of Adsorbents 343 11.4.2 Adsorption Properties 348 11.5 Removal of Organic Pollutants from Aqueous Solution by Chitason-Grafted Magnetic Carbon Nanotube 358 11.5.1 Characterization of Adsorbents 358 11.5.2 Adsorption Properties 359 11.6 Summary and Outlook 367 Reference 367 12 Nanoadsorbents: An Approach Towards Wastewater Treatment 371Rekha Sharma and Dinesh Kumar 12.1 Introduction 372 12.2 Classification of Nanomaterials as Nanoadsorbents 375 12.3 Importance of Nanomaterials in the Preconcentration Process 376 12.4 Properties and Mechanisms of Nanomaterials as Adsorbents 377 12.4.1 Innate Surface Properties 377 12.4.2 External Functionalization 378 12.5 Nanoparticles for Water and Wastewater Remediation 379 12.5.1 Nanoparticles of Metal Oxide 379 12.5.2 Metallic Nanoparticles 380 12.5.3 Magnetic Nanoparticles 381 12.5.4 Carbonaceous Nanomaterials 382 12.5.5 Silicon Nanomaterials 383 12.5.6 Nanofibers (NFs) 384 12.6 Applications in Aqueous Media 384 12.6.1 Nanoparticles 385 12.6.2 Nanostructured Mixed Oxides 387 12.6.3 Carbonaceous Nanomaterials 388 12.6.4 Silicon Nanomaterials 389 12.6.5 Nanofibers (NFs) 391 12.7 Conclusions 391 12.8 Future Scenario 392 Acknowledgment 393 References 393 Part 3 Nano-Separation Techniques for Water Resources 13 Hybrid Clay Mineral for Anionic Dye Removal and Textile Effluent Treatment 409Fadhila Ayari 13.1 Introduction 410 13.2 Experimental 411 13.2.1 Clay Adsorbent 411 13.3 Result and Discussion 413 13.3.1 Characterizations of Collected Clay 413 13.3.2 Characterizations of Hybrid Material 420 13.3.3 Adsorption Studies 436 13.3.4 Application to Natural Effluent 451 13.4 Conclusions 452 References 456 14 Nano-Separation Techniques for Water Resources 461Pashupati Pokharel and Mahesh Joshi 14.1 Current Progress in Nanotechnologies for Water Resources and Wastewater Treatment Processes 462 14.2 Nanomaterials in Nano-Separation Techniques for Water Treatment Process 464 14.3 Biochar-Based Nanocomposites for the Purification of Water Resources and Wastewater 467 14.3.1 Surface Chemistry and Functionalization of Biochar Material 468 14.3.2 Pretreatment of Biomass Using Iron/Ion Oxide, Nanometal Oxide/Hydroxide, and Functional Nanoparticles 468 14.3.3 Post-Treatment of Biochar Using Iron Ion/Oxide, Functional Nanoparticles, Nanometal Oxide/Hydroxide 470 14.3.4 Adsorption of Heavy Metals 470 14.3.5 Interaction of Biochar-Based Nanocomposites with Organic Contaminants 471 14.3.6 Adsorption of Inorganic Contaminants Other than Heavy Metals 472 14.3.7 Adsorption and Instantaneous Degradation of Organic Contaminants 472 14.4 Conclusions 473 References 473 15 Recent Advances in Nanofiltration Membrane Techniques for Separation of Toxic Metals from Wastewater 477Akil Ahmad, David Lokhat, Yang Wang, Mohd Rafatullah 15.1 Introduction 478 15.2 Membrane Technology 480 15.3 Nanofiltration Membrane for Metal Removal/Rejection 483 15.4 Summary and Outlook 492 Acknowledgment 493 References 493 16 Bacterial Cellulose Nanofibers for Efficient Removal of Hg2+ from Aqueous Solutions 501Emel Tamahkar, Deniz Turkmen, Semra Akgonullu, Tahira Qureshi and Adil Denizli 16.1 Introduction 502 16.2 Experimental Method 508 16.2.1 Materials 508 16.2.2 Production of BC Nanofibers 508 16.2.3 Preparation of Cibacron Blue F3GA Attached-Bacterial Cellulose (BC–CB) Nanofibers 508 16.2.4 Characterization Studies 509 16.2.5 Batch Adsorption Studies 509 16.2.6 Competitive Adsorption Studies 510 16.2.7 Desorption and Reusability Studies 510 16.3 Results and Discussion 511 16.3.1 Characterization of Bacterial Cellulose Nanofibers 511 16.3.2 Effect of pH 512 16.3.3 Effect of Initial Concentration of Hg2+ 512 16.3.4 Competitive Adsorption 515 16.3.5 Regeneration of BC–CB Nanofibers 515 16.4 Conclusions 516 References 518 Part 4 Sustainable Future with Nanotechnology 17 Nanotechnology Based Separation Systems for Sustainable Water Resources 525Susmita Dey Sadhu, Meenakshi Garg and Prem Lata Meena 17.1 Introduction and Background 526 17.2 Nanotechnology in Water Treatment 530 17.3 Nanofiltration—A Membranous Technique 533 17.3.1 What is Filtration? 533 17.3.2 Membrane Filtration Technology 533 17.3.3 Nanofiltration 534 17.3.4 Role of Nanofiltration 535 17.3.5 Different Polymers and Their Membranes in Nanofiltration 536 17.4 Nanoadsorbents 539 17.4.1 Types of Adsorbents 539 17.4.2 Heavy Metal Removal from Wastewater 540 17.4.3 Organic Waste Removal 541 17.5 Nanoparticles 547 17.5.1 Dendrimer 548 17.5.2 Metals and Their Oxides 549 17.5.3 Zeolites 550 17.5.4 Carbaneous and Carbon Nanotubes 551 17.6 Recent Researches in Nanoseparation Techniques of Wastewater 552 17.6.1 Graphene from Sugar and its Application in Water Purification 552 17.6.2 Understanding the Degradation Pathway of the Pesticide, Chlorpyrifos by Noble Metal Nanoparticles 552 17.6.3 Measuring and Modelling Adsorption of PAHs to Carbon Nanotubes Over a Six Order of Magnitude Wide Concentration Range 553 17.6.4 “SOS Water” Mobile Water Purifier 553 17.6.5 An Electrochemical Carbon Nanotube Filter for Water Treatment Applications 554 17.6.6 High Speed Water Sterilization System for Developing Countries 554 17.6.7 Metal Nanoparticles on Hierarchical Carbon Structures: New Architecture for Robust Water Purifiers 554 17.7 Conclusions 555 References 555 Index 559

Read more less

Book SynopsisTable of Contents List of contributors Preface Part I Introduction 1 Metal Oxides and Specific Functional Properties at the Nanoscale Oliver Diwald 1.1 A Cross-Sectional Topic in Materials Science and Technology 1.2 Metal Oxides: Bonding and Characteristic Features 1.3 Regimes of Size-Dependent Property Changes and Confinement Effects 1.4 Distribution of Nanoparticle Properties 1.5 Structure and Morphology 1.5.1 Confinement and Structural Disorder 1.5.2 Surface Free Energy Contributions and Metastability 1.5.3 Shape 1.6 Electronic Structure and Defects 1.6.1 Size-Dependent Defect Formation Energies and Their Impact on Surface Reactivity 1.7 Surface Chemistry 1.8 Metal Oxide Nanoparticle Ensembles as Dynamic Systems 1.9 Organization of This Book 2 Application of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles and their Economic Impact Karl-Heinz Haas 2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 Nanomaterials and Nanoobjects 2.1.2 Selection of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 2.2 Scientific and Patent Landscape 2.3 Types of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles, Properties, and Application Overview 2.4 Use Forms of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles and Related Processing 2.4.1 Metal Oxide Nanoparticle Powders for Ceramics 2.4.2 Metal Oxide Nanoparticle Dispersions 2.4.3 Composites 2.4.3.1 Polymer Based (Bulk and Coatings) 2.4.3.2 Metal Reinforcement 2.4.4 Combination with Powders of Micrometer Sized particles 2.5 Application Fields of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 2.5.1 Agriculture 2.5.2 Sensors and Analytics 2.5.3 Automotive 2.5.4 Biomedical/Dental 2.5.4.1 Therapy 2.5.5 Catalysis 2.5.6 Consumer Products: Cosmetics, Food, Textiles 2.5.7 Construction 2.5.8 Electronics Including Magnetics 2.5.9 Energy 2.5.10 Environment, Resource Efficiency, Processing 2.5.11 Oil Field Chemicals and Petroleum Industries 2.5.12 Optics/Optoelectronics and Photonics 2.6 Economic Impact 2.7 Conclusion and Outlook Part II Particle Synthesis: Principles of Selected Bottom-up Strategies 3 Nanoparticle Synthesis in the Gas Phase Matthias Niedermaier, Thomas Schwab, and Oliver Diwald 3.1.Introduction 3.2.Some Key Issues of Particle Formation in the Gas Phase and in Liquids 3.3.Gas Phase Chemistry, Particle Dynamics, and Agglomeration 3.4.Gas-to-Particle Conversion 3.4.1.Physical Processes 3.4.2.Chemical Processes 3.5.Particle-to-Particle Conversion 3.5.1 Approaches and Precursors 3.5.2.Particle Formation 3.5.3.Experimental Realization 3.5.4.Spray Pyrolysis and Flame-Assisted Spray Pyrolysis 3.6.Gas Phase Functionalization Approaches 4 Liquid-Phase Synthesis of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles Andrea Feinle and Nicola Hüsing 4.1 Introduction 4.2 General Aspects 4.2.1 Liquid-Phase Chemistry 4.2.2 Nucleation, Growth, and Crystallization 4.3 Synthetic Procedures 4.3.1 (Co)Precipitation 4.3.2 Sol–Gel Processing 4.3.3 Polyol-Mediated Synthesis/Pechini Method 4.3.4 Hot-Injection Method 4.3.5 Hydrothermal/Solvothermal Processing 4.3.6 Microwave-Assisted Synthesis 4.3.7 Sonication-Assisted Synthesis 4.3.8 Synthesis in Confined Spaces 4.4 Summary 5 Controlled Impurity Admixture: From Doped Systems to Composites Alessandro Lauria and Markus Niederberger 5.1 Introduction 5.2 Liquid-Phase Synthesis of Doped Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 5.3 Gas-Phase Synthesis of Doped Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 5.4 Solid-State Synthesis of Doped Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 5.5 Phase Segregation: Formation of Heterostructures 5.6 Core/Shell and Heteromultimers 5.7 Summary and Conclusions Part III Nanoparticle Formulation: A Selection of Processing and Application Routes 6 Colloidal Processing Thomas Berger 6.1 Towards Complex Shaped and Compositionally Well-Defined Ceramics: The Need for Colloidal Processing 6.2 Colloidal Processing Fundamentals 6.2.1 Interparticle Forces 6.2.1.1 Electric Double Layer Forces 6.2.1.2 Polymer-Induced Forces 6.2.2 Forming and Consolidation Techniques 6.2.2.1 Drained Casting Techniques 6.2.2.2 Tape-Casting Techniques 6.2.2.3 Constant Volume Techniques 6.2.2.4 Drying and Cracking 6.3 Rheology of Suspensions 6.4 Electrostatic Heteroaggregation of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 6.4.1 Modification of Colloidal Stability by Heteroaggregation 6.4.2 Structure Evolution upon Heteroaggregation in Binary Nanoparticle Dispersions 6.4.3 Rheological Properties of Binary Heterocolloids 6.4.4 Functional Properties of Heteroaggregates 6.5 Ice-Templating-Enabled Porous Ceramic Structures: A Case Example of the Impact of Nanoparticles on Colloidal Processes and Material Properties 6.5.1 Ice-Templating of Colloidal Particles 6.5.2 Capabilities of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles in Ice-Templating 6.5.2.1 Optimization of the Mechanical Properties of Green Bodies and Sintered Parts 6.5.2.2 Hierarchical Porosity and High Surface Area Materials 6.5.2.3 Triple Phase Boundaries Between Entangled Percolating Networks Consisting of Two Inorganic Phases and a Hierarchical Pore System 6.6 From Colloidal Processing to Nanoparticle Assembly: Towards the Control of Particle Arrangement Over Several Length Scales 7 Fabrication of Metal Oxide Nanostructures by Materials Printing Petr Dzik, Michal Veselý, and Oliver Diwald 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Traditional Coating and Printing Techniques 7.3 Inkjet Printing 7.3.1 A Brief Introduction into IJP Technology and the Process Scheme 7.3.2 Functional Ink Formulation Issues 7.3.3 Drop Generation 7.3.4 Drop Interaction with the Substrate 7.3.5 Drop Drying and Pattern Formation 7.3.6 Printing Quality 7.3.7 Equipment and Printing Devices 7.4 Printing of Metal Oxide Structures: The Materials Aspect 7.4.1 Insulating Metal Oxides 7.4.2 Semiconducting Metal Oxides 7.4.3 Conducting Metal Oxides 7.5 Examples for Complex Printed Functional Structures: The Device Aspect 7.5.1 Printed Photoelectrochemical Cell 7.5.2 Flexible pH Sensors by Large Scale Layer-by-layer Inkjet Printing 7.6 Conclusions and Outlook 8 Nanoscale Sintering Kathy Lu and Kaijie Ning 8.1 Background 8.2 Challenges and New Aspects of Nanoparticle Material Sintering 8.3 Questionable Nature of Existing Sintering Theories 8.4 3D Reconstruction 8.4.1 Focused Ion Beam Cross-Sectioning and SEM Imaging 8.4.2 X-ray Microtomography 8.5 Functions of Pores 8.6 Sintering of Small Features 8.6.1 New Sintering Questions 8.6.2 Role of Pore Number in Small Feature Sintering 8.6.3 Grain Boundary Diffusion vs. Grain Boundary Migration in Small Feature Sintering 8.6.4 Ceramic Type Effect on Small Feature Sintering 8.6.5 Atmosphere Effect on Small Feature Sintering 8.7 Summary Part IV Metal Oxide Nanoparticle Characterization at Different Length Scales 9 Structure: Scattering Techniques Günther J. Redhammer 9.1 Introduction 9.1.1 Scattering and Diffraction 9.1.2 What to Learn from a Diffraction Experiment? 9.2 Theoretical Background 9.2.1 Crystal Lattice, Planes, and Bragg’s Law 9.2.1.1 Crystal Planes and Interplanar Distance 9.2.1.2 The Reciprocal Lattice 9.2.1.3 Bragg’s Law 9.2.2 The Intensity of a Bragg Peak 9.2.3 The Profile of a Bragg Peak 9.2.3.1 Instrumental Broadening 9.2.3.2 Sample Broadening 9.2.3.3 Analytical Description of Peak Shapes 9.3 Experimental Setup 9.3.1 Single vs. Polycrystalline Samples 9.3.2 Powder Diffraction Methods 9.3.2.1 Reflection Geometry 9.3.2.2 Transmission Geometry 9.3.2.3 Grazing Incident Diffraction (GID) 9.3.2.4 Sample Preparation 9.4 Some Selected Applications 9.4.1 Qualitative Phase Analysis 9.4.2 Quantitative Phase Analysis – The Rietveld Method 9.4.3 Microstructure Analysis: Size and Strain 9.5 X-ray Diffraction on Magnetite Nanoparticles 9.6 Conclusion 10 Morphology, Structure, and Chemical Composition: Transmission Electron Microscopy and Elemental Analysis Joanna Gryboś, Paulina Indyka, and Zbigniew Sojka 10.1 Size, Shape, and Composition of Oxide Nanoparticles 10.2 Interaction of the Incident Electrons with a Specimen 10.3 The Transmission Electron Microscope 10.3.1 Microscope Design and Operation Modes 10.3.2 Contrast Type and Image Formation 10.3.3 Resolution Limits of TEM Images 10.4 Imaging and Analysis of Morphology 10.4.1 Sample Preparation 10.4.2 Shape Retrieving 10.4.2.1 Aligned Nanocrystals 10.4.2.2 Randomly Oriented Nanocrystals 10.4.3 Particle Size Determination 10.5 Crystallographic Phase Identification – Electron Diffraction 10.5.1 Bragg Condition – Kinematical and Dynamical Diffraction 10.5.2 Selected Area Electron Diffraction (SAED) 10.5.3 Nanodiffraction 10.6 Chemical Composition Mapping – EDX and EELS Nanospectroscopy 10.6.1 Correlating Image with Spectroscopic EDX and EELS Information – Data Cubes 10.6.2 Composition Mapping with EDX Spectroscopy 10.6.3 Chemical State Imaging with EELS Spectroscopy 11 Electronic and Chemical Properties: X-ray Absorption and Photoemission Paolo Dolcet and Silvia Gross 11.1 Introduction and Scope of the Chapter 11.2 Basics of X-rays – Matter Interaction 11.3 X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (XPS) 11.3.1 Theoretical Background 11.3.2 Features and Analysis of X-ray Photoelectron Spectra 11.3.3 XPS Investigation of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles and Metal Oxide Colloidal Suspensions 11.3.3.1 Solid–Liquid Interfaces and Nanoparticles in Suspension: Liquid-Jet and Ambient Pressure XPS 11.3.3.2 Valence Band XPS for the Investigation of Oxides 11.3.4 XPS Spectrometer Equipment: Components and Sources 11.3.5 Performing XPS Experiments 11.3.5.1 Planning of the Analysis and Sample Preparation 11.3.6 XPS Qualitative and Quantitative Data Analysis and Fitting 11.4 X-ray Absorption Spectroscopy (XAS) 11.4.1 X-ray Absorption Theory 11.4.2 XAS for the Investigation of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 11.4.2.1 Materials for Oxygen Evolution Reaction 11.4.2.2 Point Defects and Ferromagnetism 11.4.3 Anatomy of a XAS Beamline 11.4.4 The XAS Experiment: Obtaining Beamtime, Sample Preparation 11.5 Case Studies for the Combined Use of XPS and XAS in Oxide Analysis 11.6 Concluding Remarks: Complementarities and Differences of XPS and XAS 12 Optical Properties: UV/Vis Diffuse Reflectance Spectroscopy and Photoluminescence Thomas Berger and Anette Trunschke 12.1 Interaction of Metal Oxide Particle-Based Materials with Light 12.2 Spectroscopic Techniques 12.2.1 Transmission Spectroscopy 12.2.2 Diffuse Reflectance Spectroscopy 12.2.2.1 Kubelka–Munk Theory 12.2.2.2 Measurement of Absorption Spectra in Diffuse Reflectance 12.2.2.3 Experimental Constraints and Sources of Error 12.2.2.4 Optical Accessories 12.2.3 Photoluminescence Spectroscopy 12.2.3.1 Principles of Photoluminescence Spectroscopy 12.2.3.2 Inorganic Luminescent Particles 12.2.4 In Situ Cells and Measurement Configurations 12.3 Types of Transitions 12.3.1 UV Region (5.0–2.5 eV) 12.3.1.1 Charge Transfer (CT) Transitions 12.3.1.2 Band-to-Band Transitions 12.3.1.3 Excitonic Surface States in Highly Dispersed Insulating Metal Oxides 12.3.1.4 Organic Ligands and Adsorbates 12.3.2 Visible Region (3.5–1.5 eV) 12.3.2.1 Metal Centered Transitions 12.3.2.2 Localized Surface Plasmon Resonance 12.3.3 Near-Infrared Region (1.5–0.5 nm) 12.3.3.1 Intraband Transitions: Free Carrier Absorption 12.3.3.2 Vibrational Transitions 12.3.3.3 Localized Surface Plasmon Resonance in Degenerately Doped Metal Oxide Semiconductor Nanocrystals 12.4 Case Studies 12.4.1 Heterogeneous Catalysis 12.4.2 Adsorption and Reaction of Porphyrins on Highly Dispersed MgO Nanocube Powders 13 Vibrational Spectroscopies Christian Hess 13.1 Introduction 13.2 Basic Principles of Vibrational Spectroscopies 13.2.1 IR Spectroscopy 13.2.2 Raman Spectroscopy 13.2.3 Inelastic Neutron Scattering (INS) 13.2.4 In Situ/Operando Characterization 13.3 Vibrational Properties of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles 13.3.1 Structural Identification and Phase Transitions 13.3.2 Particle Size 13.3.3 Strain and Defects 13.3.4 Surface Hydroxyl Groups 13.3.5 Surface Oxygen Species 13.4 Case Study: Ceria Nanoparticles 13.5 Characterization of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles Under Working Conditions 13.6 Conclusions 14 Solid State Magnetic Resonance Spectroscopy of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles Yamini S. Avadhut and Martin Hartmann 14.1 Introduction 14.2 Basics of Solid-state NMR Spectroscopy 14.2.1 Magic Angle Spinning 14.2.2 Cross-Polarization 14.2.3 Multiple Quantum Magic Angle Spinning 14.3 Selected Examples 14.4 Basics of Electron Paramagnetic Resonance Spectroscopy 14.4.1 The Spin Hamiltonian of Paramagnetic Systems 14.4.2 Defects 14.4.3 Transition Metal Ions 14.5 Selected Example 15 Characterization of Surfaces and Interfaces Thomas Berger and Oliver Diwald 15.1 Interfaces Determine Stability and Functional Properties: From Manufactured Metal Oxide Nanoparticles to Surface Science Studies 15.2 From Crystal Faces to Nanocrystals: Surface Energetics and Wulff Constructions 15.2.1 Surface Tension, Surface Stress, and Surface Energy 15.2.2 Wulff Construction: A Starting Point for Modelling 15.2.3 Free Energies of Particle Formation and Particle Surfaces 15.3 Changing Interfaces and Microstructures 15.4 The Solid–Vacuum Interface 15.5 Solid–Vapor Interfaces: Thin Water Films as Reactive Environments 15.6 Solid–Liquid Interfaces 15.7 Solid–Solid Interfaces 15.8 Experimental Approaches for Surface and Interface Characterization 15.8.1 Gas Adsorption 15.8.2 He Pycnometry 15.8.3 Nonlinear Optics and Surface Specific Optical Probes 15.8.4 Atomic Force Microscopy (AFM) 15.8.5 Zeta Potential, Ambient Pressure X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy (AP-XPS), and Electrochemistry 15.8.6 Surface and Interface Energies 16 Adsorption and Chemical Reactivity Oliver Diwald and Martin Hartmann 16.1 Introduction 16.2 Some Principles and Key Issues of Adsorption 16.2.1 Physisorption, Chemisorption, and Potential Energy Diagrams 16.2.2 Sticking Probability, Surface Residence Time, and Adsorption Isotherms 16.3 Adsorption in Metal Oxide Nanoparticle Ensembles 16.3.1 Microstructure and Porosity 16.3.2 Adsorption and Diffusion 16.4 Thermal Techniques to Characterize Sorption 16.4.1 Thermogravimetric Analysis (TGA) 16.4.2 Differential Thermal Analysis (DTA) 16.4.3 Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC) 16.4.4 Calorimetry 16.5 Temperature-Programmed Techniques 16.5.1 Temperature-Programmed Desorption (TPD) 16.5.2 Temperature-Programmed Reduction (TPR) and Oxidation (TPO) 16.5.3 Temperature-Programmed Surface Reaction (TPSR) 16.6 Adsorption in Liquids – Nanoparticle Dispersions 16.6.1 General Aspects of Adsorption in Solution 16.6.2 Adsorption and Exchange of Ligands at the Colloidal Interface 16.6.3 Grafting of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles with Surfactants 16.7 Nature and Abundance of Catalytically Active Centers 16.8 Probes to Characterize Strength and Activity of Catalytic Sites 16.9 Catalytic Test Reactions 16.9.1 Acidic and Basic Catalysts 16.9.2 Redox Reactions 16.9.3 Bifunctional Catalysis 16.10 Stability and Aging of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles in Catalysis 17 Particle Characterization Technology Alfred P. Weber 17.1 Introduction 17.2 Sampling and Sample Preparation 17.2.1 Sampling 17.2.2 Sampling from the Gas Phase 17.2.3 Sampling from a Suspension and Sample Preparation 17.3 Image Analysis Techniques 17.3.1 Point operations 17.3.2 Linear Filter 17.3.3 Nonlinear Filter 17.3.4 Morphological Filtering 17.4 Counting Techniques for Single Suspended Nanoparticles 17.4.1 Wide Angle Laser Light Collector 17.4.2 Nano-Laser Doppler Anemometry (NanoLDA) 17.4.3 Condensation Particle Counter (CPC) 17.4.4 Nanoparticle Tracking Analysis (NTA) 17.4.5 Comparison of NTA and Dynamic Light Scattering (DLS) 17.5 Separation Techniques 17.5.1 Field-Flow-Fractionation (FFF) 17.5.2 Analytical Ultracentrifugation 17.5.3 Differential Mobility Analyzer (DMA) 17.5.4 Low Pressure Impactor (LPI) 17.6 Multiparametric Particle Characterization 17.6.1 Aerosol Photoemission Spectroscopy (APES) 17.6.2 Multidimensional NTA on Nanosuspensions 17.6.3 Inductively Coupled Plasma-Mass Spectrometry (ICP-MS) 17.7 Summary Part V Characterization of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles with Modelling 18 Atomistic Modeling of Oxide Nanoparticles Keith McKenna 18.1 Introduction 18.2 Methods 18.2.1 Interatomic Potentials 18.2.2 First Principles Methods 18.2.3 QM/MM (or Embedded Cluster) Methods 18.3 Structure of Nanoparticles 18.3.1 Kinetic vs. Thermodynamic Approaches 18.3.2 0D, 1D, 2D, and 3D Defects in Nanoparticles 18.3.3 Interfaces Between Nanoparticles 18.4 Electronic Properties 18.4.1 Density of States 18.4.2 Ionization Energies and Electron Affinities 18.4.3 Optical Absorption Spectra 18.4.4 Electron Paramagnetic Resonance 18.5 Summary 19 Modeling of Reactions at Oxide Surfaces Henrik Grönbeck 19.1 Introduction 19.2 Computational Considerations 19.2.1 First Principles Calculations 19.2.2 Ab Initio Thermodynamics 19.2.3 Kinetic Modeling of Surface Reactions 19.3 Some Features of Reactions on Metal Oxide Surfaces 19.4 Adsorbate Pairing 19.4.1 Cooperative Adsorption 19.4.2 Effects of Electronic-Pairing in Modeling of Surface Reactions 19.4.3 Kinetic Modeling of Reactions at Oxide Surfaces 19.4.4 Trans-Ligand Effects 19.5 Reactions at Nanoparticles 19.5.1 Trends in Adsorption Properties 19.6 Conclusions 20 Mesoscale Modelling of Nanoparticle Formation Eirini Goudeli 20.1 Introduction 20.2 Nanoparticle Characterization 20.2.1 Agglomerate Radii 20.2.2 Fractal Dimension and Mass-Mobility Exponent 20.2.3 Dynamic Shape Factor 20.2.4 Relative Shape Anisotropy 20.3 Coarse-Grained Molecular Dynamics 20.4 Monte Carlo Simulations 20.5 Discrete Element Method 20.5.1 Collision Frequency Function 20.6 Particle Dynamics 20.7 Concluding Remarks Part IV Nanoparticles in Biological Environments 21 Biological Activity of Metal Oxide Nanoparticles Martin Himly, Mark Geppert, and Albert Duschl 21.1 Bio-Nano Interaction 21.2 Interaction of Nanoparticles with Cells 21.2.1 Recognition of Nanoparticles by Cells 21.2.1.1 Uptake of Nanoparticles into Cells 21.2.1.2 Intracellular Fate and Interactions 21.3 Uptake Routes of Nanoparticles into the Body and Their Fate There 21.4 Biological Test Methods for Assessing Biological Activities and Hazards of Nanoparticles 21.4.1 In Vitro Methods 21.4.2 In Vivo Methods 21.4.3 Biological Endpoints 21.5 Exposure of Humans 21.5.1 Intentional Exposure 21.5.2 Unintentional Exposure 21.6 Nanoparticles in the Environment 21.7 Understanding and Regulating Risk Part VII Case Studies 22 The Properties of Iron Oxide Nanoparticle Pigments Robin Klupp Taylor 22.1 Introduction 22.2 Properties of Pigments with a Focus on Iron Oxides 22.2.1 Introduction by Way of a Commercial Pigment Example 22.2.2 Colorimetric Properties of Pigment Films 22.2.3 Pigments as Particle Based Optical Materials: General Considerations 22.2.4 Radiative Transfer in a Pigment Film: Kubelka–Munk Theory 22.2.5 Optical Properties of Metal Oxides for Color Pigments 22.2.5.1 Defining the Complex Refractive Index 22.2.5.2 Measuring the Complex Refractive Index 22.2.6 Microscopic Models for Light Scattering 22.2.6.1 Particles Much Smaller Than the Wavelength of Light 22.2.6.2 Spherical Particles Similar in Size or Larger Than the Wavelength of Light (Lorenz–Mie Theory) 22.2.6.3 Simulating Pigment Color Based on Spherical Particles 22.2.6.4 Simulating Pigment Color Based on Nonspherical Particles 23 Zinc Oxide Nanoparticles for Varistors Oliver Diwald 23.1 Introduction 23.2 Principle of Operation and Microstructure 23.3 Varistor Manufacturing: The Conventional Approach in Industry 23.4 Why Use Synthetic ZnO Nanoparticle Powders as Raw Materials 23.5 Defect Engineering and Electronic Properties 23.6 Impurity Admixture for Microstructure Engineering 23.7 Synthesis of Varistor Nanoparticle Powders 23.8 Formulation and Shaping of ZnO Powders and Dispersions 23.9 Sintering 23.9.1 Alternative Approaches for the Sintering of Nanostructured ZnO Green Bodies 23.10 Cold Sintering and Ceramic–Polymer Composite Varistors 23.11 Concluding Remarks 24 Metal Oxide Nanoparticle-Based Conductometric Gas Sensors Thomas Berger 24.1 Introduction 24.2 Working Principle of Metal Oxide Particle-Based Conductometric Gas Sensors 24.3 Porous Layers Consisting of Loaded and Doped Metal Oxide Particles 24.3.1 Loaded Metal Oxide Particles 24.3.2 Doped Metal Oxide Particles 24.4 Metal Oxide Nanoparticle-Based Sensing Layers 24.5 Fabrication of Nanoparticle-Based Porous Thick Film Sensing Layers 24.5.1 Layer Deposition Involving Particle Dispersions 24.5.1.1 Synthesis of Sensing Materials 24.5.1.2 Screen Printing 24.5.1.3 Inkjet Printing 24.5.1.4 Drop Coating 24.5.2 Flame Spray Pyrolysis 24.6 Nanostructured Conductometric Gas Sensors for Breath Analysis

Read more less

Book SynopsisServes as a guide for seasoned researchers and students alike, who wish to learn about the cross-fertilization between biology and materials that is driving this emerging area of science This book covers the most relevant topics in basic research and those having potential technological applications for the field of biopolymer brushes. This area has experienced remarkable increase in development of practical applications in nanotechnology and biotechnology over the past decade. In view of the rapidly growing activity and interest in the field, this book covers the introductory features of polymer brushes and presents a unifying and stimulating overview of the theoretical aspects and emerging applications. It immerses readers in the historical perspective and the frontiers of research where our knowledge is increasing steadilyproviding them with a feeling of the enormous potential, the multiple applications, and the many up-and-coming trends behind the developmenTable of ContentsVolume 1 Preface xxi List of Contributors xxiii 1 Functionalization of Surfaces Using Polymer Brushes: An Overview of Techniques, Strategies, and Approaches 1Juan M. Giussi,M. Lorena Cortez,Waldemar A. Marmisoll´e, and Omar Azzaroni 1.1 Introduction: Fundamental Notions and Concepts 1 1.2 Preparation of Polymer Brushes on Solid Substrates 4 1.3 Preparation of Polymer Brushes by the “Grafting-To” Method 5 1.4 Polymer Brushes by the “Grafting-From” Method 9 1.4.1 Surface-Initiated Atom Transfer Radical Polymerization 9 1.4.2 Surface-Initiated Reversible-Addition Fragmentation Chain Transfer Polymerization 10 1.4.3 Surface-Initiated Nitroxide-Mediated Polymerization 13 1.4.4 Surface-Initiated Photoiniferter-Mediated Polymerization 13 1.4.5 Surface-Initiated Living Ring-Opening Polymerization 15 1.4.6 Surface-Initiated Ring-Opening Metathesis Polymerization 17 1.4.7 Surface-Initiated Anionic Polymerization 18 1.5 Conclusions 20 Acknowledgments 21 References 21 2 Polymer Brushes by AtomTransfer Radical Polymerization 29Guojun Xie, Amir Khabibullin, Joanna Pietrasik, Jiajun Yan, and KrzysztofMatyjaszewski 2.1 Structure of Brushes 29 2.2 Synthesis of Polymer Brushes 31 2.2.1 Grafting through 31 2.2.2 Grafting to 32 2.2.3 Grafting from 32 2.3 ATRP Fundamentals 33 2.4 Molecular Bottlebrushes by ATRP 38 2.4.1 Introduction 38 2.4.2 Star-Like Brushes 40 2.4.3 Blockwise Brushes 42 2.4.4 Brushes with Tunable Grafting Density 45 2.4.5 Brushes with Block Copolymer Side Chains 46 2.4.6 Functionalities and Properties of Brushes 50 2.5 ATRP and Flat Surfaces 55 2.5.1 Chemistry at Surface 55 2.5.2 Grafting Density 55 2.5.3 Architecture 56 2.5.4 Applications 57 2.6 ATRP and Nanoparticles 58 2.6.1 Chemistry 58 2.6.2 Architecture 59 2.6.3 Applications 61 2.7 ATRP and Concave Surfaces 63 2.8 ATRP and Templates 63 2.8.1 Templates from Networks 63 2.8.2 Templates from Brushes 64 2.9 Templates from Stars 65 2.10 Bio-Related Polymer Brushes 66 2.11 Stimuli-Responsive Polymer Brushes 74 2.11.1 Stimuli-Responsive Solutions 76 2.11.2 Stimuli-Responsive Surfaces 78 2.12 Conclusion 79 Acknowledgments 80 References 80 3 Polymer Brushes by Surface-Mediated RAFT Polymerization for Biological Functions 97Tuncer Caykara 3.1 Introduction 97 3.2 Polymer Brushes via the Surface-Initiated RAFT Polymerization Process 99 3.3 Polymer Brushes via the Interface-Mediated RAFT Polymerization Process 101 3.3.1 pH-Responsive Brushes 102 3.3.2 Temperature-Responsive Brushes 106 3.3.3 Polymer Brushes on Gold Surface 110 3.3.4 Polymer Brushes on Nanoparticles 114 3.3.5 Micropatterned Polymer Brushes 115 3.4 Summary 117 References 119 4 Electro-Induced Copper-Catalyzed Surface Modification with Monolayer and Polymer Brush 123Bin Li and Feng Zhou 4.1 Introduction 123 4.2 “Electro-Click” Chemistry 124 4.3 Electrochemically Induced Surface-Initiated Atom Transfer Radical Polymerization 129 4.4 Possible Combination of eATRP and “e-Click” Chemistry on Surface 136 4.5 Surface Functionality 136 4.6 Summary 137 Acknowledgments 138 References 138 5 Polymer Brushes on Flat and Curved Substrates:What Can be Learned fromMolecular Dynamics Simulations 141K. Binder, S.A. Egorov, and A.Milchev 5.1 Introduction 141 5.2 Molecular Dynamics Methods: A Short “Primer” 144 5.3 The Standard Bead Spring Model for Polymer Chains 148 5.4 Cylindrical and Spherical Polymer Brushes 150 5.5 Interaction of Brushes with Free Chains 152 5.6 Summary 153 Acknowledgments 156 References 157 6 Modeling of Chemical Equilibria in Polymer and Polyelectrolyte Brushes 161Rikkert J. Nap,Mario Tagliazucchi, Estefania Gonzalez Solveyra, Chun-lai Ren, Mark J. Uline, and Igal Szleifer 6.1 Introduction 161 6.2 Theoretical Approach 163 6.3 Applications of the Molecular Theory 177 6.3.1 Acid–Base Equilibrium in Polyelectrolyte Brushes 178 6.3.1.1 Effect of Salt Concentration and pH 178 6.3.1.2 Effect of Polymer Density and Geometry 184 6.3.2 Competition between Chemical Equilibria and Physical Interactions 186 6.3.2.1 Brushes of Strong Polyelectrolytes 186 6.3.2.2 Brushes ofWeak Polyelectrolytes: Self-Assembly in Charge-Regulating Systems 189 6.3.2.3 Redox-Active Polyelectrolyte Brushes 193 6.3.3 End-Tethered Single Stranded DNA in Aqueous Solutions 195 6.3.4 Ligand–Receptor Binding and Protein Adsorption to Polymer Brushes 201 6.3.5 Adsorption Equilibrium of Polymer Chains through Terminal Segments: Grafting-to Formation of Polymer Brushes 207 6.4 Summary and Conclusion 212 Acknowledgments 216 References 216 7 Brushes of Linear and Dendritically Branched Polyelectrolytes 223E. B. Zhulina, F. A. M. Leermakers, and O. V. Borisov 7.1 Introduction 223 7.2 Analytical SCF Theory of Brushes Formed by Linear and Branched Polyions 224 7.2.1 Dendron Architecture and System Parameters 225 7.2.2 Analytical SCF Formalism 226 7.3 Planar Brush of PE Dendrons with an Arbitrary Architecture 229 7.3.1 Asymptotic Dependences for Brush Thickness H 231 7.4 Planar Brush of Star-Like Polyelectrolytes 232 7.5 Threshold of Dendron Gaussian Elasticity 234 7.6 Scaling-Type Diagrams of States for Brushes of Linear and Branched Polyions 235 7.7 Numerical SF-SCF Model of Dendron Brush 236 7.8 Conclusions 238 References 239 8 Vapor Swelling of Hydrophilic Polymer Brushes 243Casey J. Galvin and Jan Genzer 8.1 Introduction 243 8.2 Experimental 245 8.2.1 General Methods 245 8.2.2 Synthesis of Poly((2-dimethylamino)ethyl methacrylate) Brushes with a Gradient in Grafting Density 245 8.2.3 Synthesis of Poly(2-(diethylamino)ethyl methacrylate) Brushes 245 8.2.4 Chemical Modification of Poly((2-dimethylamino)ethyl methacrylate) Brushes 246 8.2.5 Bulk Synthesis of PDMAEMA 246 8.2.6 Preparation of Spuncast PDMAEMA Films 246 8.2.7 Chemical Modification of Spuncast PDMAEMA Film 247 8.2.8 Spectroscopic EllipsometryMeasurements under Controlled Humidity Conditions 247 8.2.9 Spectroscopic EllipsometryMeasurements of Alcohol Exposure 247 8.2.10 Fitting Spectroscopic Ellipsometry Data 248 8.2.11 Infrared Variable Angle Spectroscopic Ellipsometry 248 8.3 Results and Discussion 248 8.3.1 Comparing Polymer Brush and Spuncast Polymer Film Swelling 250 8.3.2 Influence of Side Chain Chemistry on Polymer Brush Vapor Swelling 252 8.3.3 Influence of Solvent Vapor Chemistry on Polymer Brush Vapor Swelling 256 8.3.4 Influence of Grafting Density on Polymer Brush Vapor Swelling 259 8.4 Conclusion 262 8.A.1 Appendix 263 8.A.1.1 Mole Fraction Calculation 263 8.A.1.2 Water Cluster Number Calculation 264 Acknowledgments 265 References 265 9 Temperature Dependence of the Swelling and Surface Wettability of Dense Polymer Brushes 267Pengyu Zhuang, Ali Dirani, Karine Glinel, and AlainM. Jonas 9.1 Introduction 267 9.2 The Swelling Coefficient of a Polymer Brush Mirrors Its Volume Hydrophilicity 269 9.3 The Cosine of the Contact Angle ofWater on aWater-Equilibrated Polymer Brush Defines Its Surface Hydrophilicity 270 9.4 Case Study: Temperature-Dependent Surface hydrophilicity of Dense PNIPAM Brushes 272 9.5 Case Study: Temperature-Dependent Swelling and Volume Hydrophilicity of Dense PNIPAMBrushes 274 9.6 Thermoresponsive Poly(oligo(ethylene oxide)methacrylate) Copolymer Brushes: Versatile Functional Alternatives to PNIPAM 277 9.7 Surface and Volume Hydrophilicity of Nonthermoresponsive Poly(oligo(ethylene oxide)methacrylate) Copolymer Brushes 279 9.8 Conclusions 282 Acknowledgments 283 References 283 10 Functional Biointerfaces Tailored by “Grafting-To”Brushes 287Eva Bittrich, Manfred Stamm, and Petra Uhlmann 10.1 Introduction 287 10.2 Part I: Polymer Brush Architectures 288 10.2.1 Design of Physicochemical Interfaces by Polymer Brushes 288 10.2.1.1 Stimuli-Responsive Homopolymer Brushes 288 10.2.1.2 Combination of Responses Using Mixed Polymer Brushes 290 10.2.1.3 Stimuli-Responsive Gradient Brushes 293 10.2.2 Modification of Polymer Brushes by Click Chemistry 293 10.2.2.1 Definition of Click Chemistry 293 10.2.2.2 Modification of End Groups of Grafted PNIPAAm Chains 295 10.2.3 Hybrid Brush Nanostructures 297 10.2.3.1 Nanoparticles Immobilized at Polymer Brushes 298 10.2.3.2 Sculptured Thin Films Grafted with Polymer Brushes 300 10.3 Part II: Actuating Biomolecule Interactions with Surfaces 303 10.3.1 Adsorption of Proteins to Polymer Brush Surfaces 303 10.3.1.1 Calculation of the Adsorbed Amount of Protein from Ellipsometric Experiments 305 10.3.1.2 Preventing Protein Adsorption 306 10.3.1.3 Adsorption at Polyelectrolyte Brushes 310 10.3.2 Polymer Brushes as Interfaces for Cell Adhesion and Interaction 313 10.3.2.1 Cell Adhesion on Stimuli-Responsive Polymer Surfaces Based on PNIPAAm Brushes 315 10.3.2.2 Growth Factors on Polymer Brushes 318 10.4 Conclusion and Outlook 320 Acknowledgments 321 References 321 11 Glycopolymer Brushes Presenting Sugars in Their Natural Form: Synthesis and Applications 333Kai Yu and Jayachandran N. Kizhakkedathu 11.1 Introduction and Background 333 11.2 Results and Discussion 334 11.2.1 Synthesis of Glycopolymer Brushes 334 11.2.1.1 Synthesis of N-Substituted Acrylamide Derivatives of Glycomonomers 334 11.2.1.2 Synthesis and Characterization of Glycopolymer Brushes on Gold Chip and SiliconWafer 334 11.2.1.3 Synthesis and Characterization of Glycopolymer Brushes on Polystyrene Particles 335 11.2.1.4 Synthesis and Characterization of Glycopolymer Brushes with Variation in the Composition of Carbohydrate Residues on SPR Chip 338 11.2.1.5 Preparation of Glycopolymer Brushes-Modified Particles with Different Grafting Density (Conformation) 338 11.2.2 Applications of Glycopolymer Brushes 341 11.2.2.1 Antithrombotic Surfaces Based on Glycopolymer Brushes 341 11.2.2.2 Glycopolymer Brushes Based Carbohydrate Arrays to Modulate Multivalent Protein Binding on Surfaces 345 11.2.2.3 Modulation of Innate Immune Response by the Conformation and Chemistry of Glycopolymer Brushes 351 11.3 Conclusions 356 Acknowledgments 357 References 357 12 Thermoresponsive Polymer Brushes for Thermally Modulated Cell Adhesion and Detachment 361Kenichi Nagase and Teruo Okano 12.1 Introduction 361 12.2 Thermoresponsive Polymer Hydrogel-Modified Surfaces for Cell Adhesion and Detachment 362 12.3 Thermoresponsive Polymer Brushes Prepared Using ATRP 363 12.4 Thermoresponsive Polymer Brushes Prepared by RAFT Polymerization 368 12.5 Conclusions 372 Acknowledgments 372 References 372 Volume 2 Preface xxi List of Contributors xxiii 13 Biomimetic Anchors for Antifouling Polymer Brush Coatings 377Dicky Pranantyo, Li Qun Xu, En-Tang Kang, Koon-Gee Neoh, and Serena Lay-Ming Teo 13.1 Introduction to Biofouling Management 377 13.2 Polymer Brushes for Surface Functionalization 378 13.3 Biomimetic Anchors for Antifouling Polymer Brushes 379 13.3.1 Mussel Adhesive-Inspired Dopamine Anchors 379 13.3.1.1 Antifouling Polymer Brushes Prepared via the “Grafting-To” Approach on (poly)Dopamine Anchor 383 13.3.1.2 Antifouling Polymer Brushes Prepared via the “Grafting-From” Approach on (poly)Dopamine Anchor 386 13.3.1.3 Direct Grafting of Antifouling Polymer Brushes Containing Anchorable Dopamine-Derived Functionalities 389 13.3.2 (Poly)phenolic Anchors for Antifouling Polymer Brushes 391 13.3.3 Biomolecular Anchors for Antifouling Polymer Brushes 393 13.4 Barnacle Cement as Anchor for Antifouling Polymer Brushes 397 13.5 Conclusion and Outlooks 399 References 400 14 Protein Adsorption Process Based on Molecular Interactions at Well-Defined Polymer Brush Surfaces 405Sho Sakata, Yuuki Inoue, and Kazuhiko Ishihara 14.1 Introduction 405 14.2 Utility of Polymer Brush Layers as Highly Controllable Polymer Surfaces 406 14.3 Performance of Polymer Brush Surfaces as Antifouling Biointerfaces 408 14.4 Elucidation of Protein Adsorption Based on Molecular Interaction Forces 412 14.5 Concluding Remarks 416 References 417 15 Are Lubricious Polymer Brushes Antifouling? Are Antifouling Polymer Brushes Lubricious? 421Edmondo M. Benetti and Nicholas D. Spencer 15.1 Introduction 421 15.2 Poly(ethylene glycol) Brushes 422 15.3 Beyond Simple PEG Brushes 424 15.4 Conclusion 429 References 429 16 Biofunctionalized Brush Surfaces for Biomolecular Sensing 433Shuaidi Zhang and Vladimir V. Tsukruk 16.1 Introduction 433 16.2 Biorecognition Units 435 16.2.1 Antibodies 435 16.2.2 Antibody Fragments 435 16.2.3 Aptamers 437 16.2.4 Peptide Aptamers 438 16.2.5 Enzymes 438 16.2.6 Peptide Nucleic Acid, Lectin, and Molecular Imprinted Polymers 439 16.3 Immobilization Strategy 439 16.3.1 Through Direct Covalent Linkage 440 16.3.1.1 Thiolated Aptamers on Noble Metal 440 16.3.1.2 General Activated Surface Chemistry 442 16.3.1.3 Diels–Alder Cycloaddition 444 16.3.1.4 Staudinger Ligation 444 16.3.1.5 1,3-Dipolar Cycloaddition 446 16.3.2 Through Affinity Tags 447 16.3.2.1 Biotin–Avidin/Streptavidin Pairing 447 16.3.2.2 NTA–Ni2+–Histidine Pairing 448 16.3.2.3 Protein A/Protein G – Fc Pairing 449 16.3.2.4 Oligonucleotide Hybridization 450 16.4 Microstructure and Morphology of Biobrush Layers 451 16.4.1 Grafting Density Control 451 16.4.2 Conformation and Orientation of Recognition Units 453 16.5 Transduction Schemes Based upon Grafted Biomolecules 462 16.5.1 Electrochemical-Based Sensors 462 16.5.2 Field Effect Transistor Based Sensors 463 16.5.3 SPR-Based Sensors 465 16.5.4 Photoluminescence-Based Sensors 466 16.5.5 SERS Sensors 468 16.5.6 Microcantilever Sensors 469 16.6 Conclusions 471 Acknowledgments 472 References 472 17 Phenylboronic Acid and Polymer Brushes: An Attractive Combination with Many Possibilities 479Solmaz Hajizadeh and Bo Mattiasson 17.1 Introduction: Polymer Brushes and Synthesis 479 17.2 Boronic Acid Brushes 481 17.3 Affinity Separation 483 17.4 Sensors 487 17.5 Biomedical Applications 492 17.6 Conclusions 494 References 494 18 Smart Surfaces Modified with Phenylboronic Acid Containing Polymer Brushes 497Hongliang Liu, ShutaoWang, and Lei Jiang 18.1 Introduction 497 18.2 Molecular Mechanism of PBA-Based Smart Surfaces 498 18.3 pH-Responsive Surfaces Modified with PBA Polymer Brush and Their Applications 501 18.4 Sugar-Responsive SurfacesModified with PBA Polymer Brush and Their Applications 503 18.5 PBA Polymer Brush–Based pH/Sugar Dual-Responsive OR Logic Gates and Their Applications 504 18.6 PBA Polymer Brush-Based pH/Sugar Dual-Responsive AND Logic Gates and Their Applications 506 18.7 PBA-Based Smart Systems beyond Polymer Brush and Their Applications 509 18.8 Conclusion and Perspective 511 References 512 19 Polymer Brushes andMicroorganisms 515Madeleine Ramstedt 19.1 Introduction 515 19.1.1 Societal Relevance for Surfaces Interacting with Microbes 515 19.1.2 Microorganisms 516 19.2 Brushes and Microbes 519 19.2.1 Adhesive Surfaces 529 19.2.2 Antifouling Surfaces 530 19.2.2.1 PEG-Based Brushes 531 19.2.2.2 Zwitterionic Brushes 533 19.2.2.3 Brush Density 533 19.2.2.4 Interactive Forces 535 19.2.2.5 Mechanical Interactions 537 19.2.3 Killing Surfaces 537 19.2.3.1 Antimicrobial Peptides 540 19.2.4 Brushes and Fungi 543 19.2.5 Brushes and Algae 546 19.3 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 549 Acknowledgments 551 References 552 20 Design of Polymer Brushes for Cell Culture and Cellular Delivery 557Danyang Li and Julien E. Gautrot Abbreviations 557 20.1 Introduction 559 20.2 Protein-Resistant Polymer Brushes for Tissue Engineering and In Vitro Assays 561 20.2.1 Design of Protein-Resistant Polymer Brushes 561 20.2.2 Cell-Resistant Polymer Brushes 565 20.2.3 Patterned Antifouling Brushes for the Development of Cell-Based Assays 567 20.3 Designing Brush Chemistry to Control Cell Adhesion and Proliferation 570 20.3.1 Polyelectrolyte Brushes for Cell Adhesion and Culture 570 20.3.2 Control of Surface Hydrophilicity 573 20.3.3 Surfaces with Controlled Stereochemistry 574 20.3.4 Switchable Brushes Displaying Responsive Behavior for Cell Harvesting and Detachment 576 20.4 Biofunctionalized Polymer Brushes to Regulate Cell Phenotype 581 20.4.1 Protein Coupling to Polymer Brushes to Control Cell Adhesion 581 20.4.2 Peptide-Functionalized Polymer Brushes to Regulate Cell Adhesion, Proliferation, Differentiation, and Migration 583 20.5 Polymer Brushes for Drug and Gene Delivery Applications 586 20.5.1 Polymer Brushes in Drug Delivery 586 20.5.2 Polymer Brushes in Gene Delivery 590 20.6 Summary 593 Acknowledgments 593 References 593 21 DNA Brushes: Self-Assembly, Physicochemical Properties, and Applications 605Ursula Koniges, Sade Ruffin, and Rastislav Levicky 21.1 Introduction 605 21.2 Applications 605 21.3 Preparation 607 21.4 Physicochemical Properties of DNA Brushes 610 21.5 Hybridization in DNA Brushes 613 21.6 Other Bioprocesses in DNA Brushes 618 21.7 Perspective 619 Acknowledgments 620 References 621 22 DNA Brushes: Advances in Synthesis and Applications 627Renpeng Gu, Lei Tang, Isao Aritome, and Stefan Zauscher 22.1 Introduction 627 22.2 Synthesis of DNA Brushes 628 22.2.1 Grafting-to Approaches 628 22.2.1.1 Immobilization on Gold Thin Films 628 22.2.1.2 Immobilization on Silicon-Based Substrates 632 22.2.2 Grafting-from Approaches 634 22.2.2.1 Surface-Initiated Enzymatic Polymerization 634 22.2.2.2 Surface-Initiated Rolling Circle Amplification 634 22.2.2.3 Surface-Initiated Hybridization Chain Reaction 634 22.2.3 Synthesis of DNA Brushes on Curved Surfaces 637 22.3 Properties and Applications of DNA Brushes 637 22.3.1 The Effect of DNA-Modifying Enzymes on the DNA Brush Structure 637 22.3.2 Stimulus-Responsive Conformational Changes of DNA Brushes 639 22.3.3 DNA Brush for Cell-Free Surface Protein Expression 643 22.3.4 DNA Brush-Modified Nanoparticles for Biomedical Applications 645 22.4 Conclusion and Outlook 649 References 649 23 Membrane Materials Form Polymer Brush Nanoparticles 655Erica Green, Emily Fullwood, Julieann Selden, and Ilya Zharov 23.1 Introduction 655 23.2 Colloidal Membranes Pore-Filled with Polymer Brushes 657 23.2.1 Preparation of Silica Colloidal Membranes 657 23.2.2 PAAM Brush-Filled Silica Colloidal Membranes 658 23.2.3 PDMAEMA Brush-Filled Silica Colloidal Membranes 659 23.2.4 PNIPAAM brush-filled silica colloidal membranes 664 23.2.5 Polyalanine Brush-Filled Silica Colloidal Membranes 666 23.2.6 PMMA Brush-Filled SiO2@Au Colloidal Membranes 670 23.2.7 Colloidal Membranes Filled with Polymers Brushes Carrying Chiral Groups 672 23.2.8 pSPM and pSSA Brush-Filled Colloidal Nanopores 673 23.3 Self-Assembled PBNPs Membranes 676 23.3.1 PDMAEMA/PSPM Membranes 676 23.3.2 PHEMA Membranes 678 23.3.3 pSPM and pSSA Membranes 680 23.4 Summary 683 References 683 24 Responsive Polymer Networks and Brushes for Active Plasmonics 687Nestor Gisbert Quilis, Nityanand Sharma, Stefan Fossati,Wolfgang Knoll, and Jakub Dostalek 24.1 Introduction 687 24.2 Tuning Spectrum of Surface Plasmon Modes 688 24.3 Polymers Used for Actuating of Plasmonic Structures 692 24.3.1 Temperature-Responsive Polymers 692 24.3.2 Optical Stimulus 694 24.3.3 Electrochemical Stimulus 695 24.3.4 Chemical Stimulus 696 24.4 Imprinted Thermoresponsive Hydrogel Nanopillars 697 24.5 Thermoresponsive Hydrogel Nanogratings Fabricated by UV Laser Interference Lithography 699 24.6 Electrochemically Responsive Hydrogel Microgratings Prepared by UV Photolithography 702 24.7 Conclusions 705 Acknowledgments 706 References 706 25 Polymer Brushes as Interfacial Materials for Soft Metal Conductors and Electronics 709Casey Yan and Zijian Zheng 25.1 Introduction 709 25.2 Mechanisms of Polymer-Assisted Metal Deposition 712 25.3 Role of Polymer Brushes 716 25.4 Selection Criterion of Polymer Brushes Enabling PAMD 716 25.5 Strategies to Fabricate Patterned Metal Conductors 717 25.6 PAMD on Different Substrates and Their Applications in Soft Electronics 720 25.6.1 On Textiles 720 25.6.2 On Plastic Thin films 721 25.6.3 On Elastomers 724 25.6.4 On Sponges 728 25.7 Conclusion, Prospects, and Challenges 731 References 732 26 Nanoarchitectonic Design of Complex Materials Using Polymer Brushes as Structural and Functional Units 735M. Lorena Cortez, Gisela D´ýaz,Waldemar A. Marmisoll´e, Juan M. Giussi, and Omar Azzaroni 26.1 Introduction 735 26.2 Nanoparticles at Spherical Polymer Brushes: Hierarchical Nanoarchitectonic Construction of Complex Functional Materials 736 26.3 Nanotube and Nanowire Forests Bearing Polymer Brushes 737 26.3.1 Polymer Brushes on Surfaces DisplayingMicrotopographical Hierarchical Arrays 738 26.3.2 Environmentally Responsive Electrospun Nanofibers 740 26.4 Fabrication of Free-Standing “Soft” Micro- and Nanoobjects Using Polymer Brushes 741 26.5 Solid-State Polymer Electrolytes Based on Polymer Brush–Modified Colloidal Crystals 743 26.6 Proton-Conducting Membranes with Enhanced Properties Using Polymer Brushes 745 26.7 Hybrid Architectures Combining Mesoporous Materials and Responsive Polymer Brushes: Gated Molecular Transport Systems and Controlled Delivery Vehicles 747 26.8 Ensembles of Metal NanoparticlesModified with Polymer Brushes 750 26.9 Conclusions 754 Acknowledgments 755 References 755 Index 759

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe most comprehensive reference on fluorescent nanodiamond physical and chemical properties and contemporary applications Fluorescent nanodiamonds (FNDs) have drawn a great deal of attention over the past several years, and their applications and development potential are proving to be manifold and vast. The first and only book of its kind, Fluorescent Nanodiamonds is a comprehensive guide to the basic science and technical information needed to fully understand the fundamentals of FNDs and their potential applications across an array of domains. In demonstrating the importance of FNDs in biological applications, the authors bring together all relevant chemistry, physics, materials science and biology. Nanodiamonds are produced by powerful cataclysmic events such as explosions, volcanic eruptions and meteorite impacts. They also can be created in the lab by high-pressure high-temperature treatment of graphite or detonating an explosive in a reactor vessel. A single imperfection canTable of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgements xv Part I Basics 1 1 Introduction to Nanotechnology 3 1.1 Nanotechnology: From Large to Small 3 1.1.1 Feynman: Plenty of Room at the Bottom 3 1.1.2 Nanotechnology Today 6 1.1.3 The Bottom‐Up Approach 7 1.2 Nanocarbons: Now and Then 8 1.2.1 Classification 9 1.2.2 Fullerenes 9 1.2.3 Carbon Nanotubes 11 1.2.4 Graphenes 13 References 15 2 Nanodiamonds 19 2.1 Ah, Diamonds, Eternal Beautiful 19 2.2 Diamonds: From Structure to Classification 22 2.2.1 Structure 22 2.2.2 Classification 24 2.3 Diamond Synthesis 26 2.3.1 HPHT 27 2.3.2 CVD 29 2.3.3 Detonation 30 2.4 Nanodiamonds: A Scientist’s Best Friend 30 References 33 3 Color Centers in Diamond 37 3.1 Nitrogen Impurities 37 3.2 Crystal Defects 40 3.3 Vacancy‐Related Color Centers 41 3.3.1 GR1 and ND1 41 3.3.2 NV0 and NV− 44 3.3.3 H3 and N3 46 3.3.4 SiV− 46 3.4 The NV− Center 47 References 50 4 Surface Chemistry of Nanodiamonds 55 4.1 Functionalization 56 4.2 Bioconjugation 61 4.2.1 Noncovalent Conjugation 61 4.2.2 Covalent Conjugation 64 4.3 Encapsulation 66 4.3.1 Lipid Layers 66 4.3.2 Silica Shells 67 References 69 5 Biocompatibility of Nanodiamonds 73 5.1 Biocompatibility Testing 73 5.1.1 Cytotoxicity 74 5.1.2 Genotoxicity 76 5.1.3 Hemocompatibility 76 5.2 In Vitro Studies 77 5.2.1 HPHT‐ND 77 5.2.2 DND 80 5.3 Ex Vivo Studies 82 5.4 In Vivo Studies 83 References 86 Part II Specific Topics 91 6 Producing Fluorescent Nanodiamonds 93 6.1 Production 93 6.1.1 Theoretical Simulations 93 6.1.2 Electron/Ion Irradiation 96 6.1.3 Size Reduction 99 6.2 Characterization 101 6.2.1 Fluorescence Intensity 101 6.2.2 Electron Spin Resonance 104 6.2.3 Fluorescence Lifetime 105 6.2.4 Magnetically Modulated Fluorescence 107 References 110 7 Single Particle Detection and Tracking 113 7.1 Single Particle Detection 113 7.1.1 Photostability 113 7.1.2 Spectroscopic Properties 117 7.1.3 Color Center Numbers 118 7.2 Single Particle Tracking 120 7.2.1 Tracking in Solution 120 7.2.2 Tracking in Cells 122 7.2.3 Tracking in Organisms 127 References 130 8 Cell Labeling and Fluorescence Imaging 135 8.1 Cell Labeling 135 8.1.1 Nonspecific Labeling 136 8.1.2 Specific Labeling 139 8.2 Fluorescence Imaging 142 8.2.1 Epifluorescence and Confocal Fluorescence 142 8.2.2 Total Internal Reflection Fluorescence 144 8.2.3 Two‐Photon Excitation Fluorescence 146 8.2.4 Time‐Gated Fluorescence 147 References 150 9 Cell Tracking and Deep Tissue Imaging 155 9.1 Cellular Uptake 155 9.1.1 Uptake Mechanism 155 9.1.2 Entrapment 158 9.1.3 Quantification 159 9.2 Cell Tracking 161 9.2.1 Tracking In Vitro 161 9.2.2 Tracking In Vivo 163 9.3 Deep Tissue Imaging 165 9.3.1 Wide‐Field Fluorescence Imaging 165 9.3.2 Optically Detected Magnetic Resonance Imaging 169 9.3.3 Time‐Gated Fluorescence Imaging 170 9.3.4 Magnetically Modulated Fluorescence Imaging 170 References 171 10 Nanoscopic Imaging 175 10.1 Diffraction Barrier 176 10.2 Superresolution Fluorescence Imaging 177 10.2.1 Stimulated Emission Depletion Microscopy 177 10.2.2 Saturated Excitation Fluorescence Microscopy 181 10.2.3 Deterministic Emitter Switch Microscopy 182 10.2.4 Tip‐Enhanced Fluorescence Microscopy 183 10.3 Cathodoluminescence Imaging 184 10.4 Correlative Light‐Electron Microscopy 188 References 191 11 Nanoscale Quantum Sensing 195 11.1 The Spin Hamiltonian 196 11.2 Temperature Sensing 197 11.2.1 Ultrahigh Precision Temperature Measurement 197 11.2.2 Time‐Resolved Nanothermometry 200 11.2.3 All‐Optical Luminescence Nanothermometry 203 11.2.4 Scanning Thermal Imaging 205 11.3 Magnetic Sensing 207 11.3.1 Continuous‐Wave Detection 207 11.3.2 Relaxometry 210 References 211 12 Hybrid Fluorescent Nanodiamonds 215 12.1 Silica/Diamond Nanohybrids 215 12.2 Gold/Diamond Nanohybrids 217 12.2.1 Photoluminescence Enhancement 217 12.2.2 Dual‐Modality Imaging 218 12.2.3 Hyperlocalized Hyperthermia 220 12.2.4 NV‐Based Nanothermometry 224 12.3 Silver/Diamond Nanohybrids 226 12.4 Iron Oxide/Diamond Nanohybrids 228 12.4.1 Single‐Domain Magnetization 228 12.4.2 Magnetic Resonance Imaging 229 References 232 13 Nanodiamond‐Enabled Medicine 235 13.1 NDs as Therapeutic Carriers 236 13.2 Drug Delivery 237 13.2.1 Small Molecules 237 13.2.2 Proteins 241 13.3 Gene Therapy 244 13.3.1 RNA 244 13.3.2 DNA 245 13.4 Animal Experiments 247 References 249 14 Diamonds in the Sky 253 14.1 Unidentified Infrared Emission 253 14.2 Extended Red Emission 258 14.3 Cosmic Events at Home on Earth 264 References 267 Further Reading 271 Index 273

Read more less

Book SynopsisNANOMATERIALS IN CLINICAL THERAPEUTICS In this rapidly developing field, the book focuses on the practical elements of nanomaterial creation, characterization, and development, as well as their usage in clinical research. Nanotechnology-based applications is a rapidly growing field encompassing a diverse range of disciplines that impact our daily lives. Nanotechnology is being used to carry out large-scale reactions in practically every field of biotechnology and healthcare. The incredible progress being made in these applications is particularly true for the healthcare sector, where they are used in cancer detection and treatment, medical implants, tissue engineering, and so forth. Expansions in this discipline are expected to continue in the future, resulting in the creation of a variety of life-saving medical technology and treatment procedures. The primary goal of this book is to disseminate information on nanotechnology's applications in the biological scieTable of ContentsPreface xix Part 1: History and Basic Principles of Nanotechnology 1 1 Introduction to Nanotechnology 3 Rekha Sharma, Kritika S. Sharma and Dinesh Kumar 1.1 Introduction 4 1.2 Nanoscale Materials: Importance 5 1.3 Nanotechnology: Historical Advances 8 1.4 Nanofabrication Methods in Nanotechnology 9 1.4.1 Top-Down Method 10 1.4.2 Bottom-Up Method 11 1.5 Carbon Nanoallotropes 13 1.5.1 Fullerene 13 1.5.2 Carbon Nanotubes 14 1.5.3 Graphene 15 1.6 Classification of the Nanomaterials 16 1.6.1 Based on Dimensions 16 1.6.2 Based on the Structural Configuration 17 1.7 Applications of Nanotechnology 18 1.7.1 Chip-Based Plasmonic Sensors 18 1.7.2 Nanoparticle-Based Colorimetric Sensors 20 1.7.3 Colloidal Nanoparticle-Based Plasmonic Sensors 21 1.8 Conclusions and Future Perspectives 23 Acknowledgment 23 References 24 2 Functional Principal of Nanotechnology in Clinical Research 33 Kalyanee Bera, Biva Ghosh and Mainak Mukhopadhyay 2.1 Introduction 34 2.2 Nanoparticles 36 2.3 Carbon-Based Nanoparticles 37 2.4 Metal Nanoparticles 37 2.4.1 Gold Nanoparticles 38 2.4.2 Silver Nanoparticles 39 2.4.3 Zinc Nanoparticles 39 2.5 Magnetic Nanoparticles 40 2.6 Ceramic Nanoparticles 41 2.7 Lipid Nanoparticles 41 2.8 Polymeric Nanoparticles (Nanoparticles Made of Polymers) 42 2.8.1 Synthetic 43 2.8.2 Natural 43 2.9 Hydrogel 44 2.10 Nanofibers 45 2.11 Nanocomposites 45 2.12 Nanotechnologies for Clinical Laboratory Diagnosis 46 2.12.1 Nanotechnology-Based Biochips and Microarrays 46 2.12.2 Protein Microarrays/Chips 47 2.12.3 Nanobiosensors 48 2.12.4 PEBBLE Nanosensors (Probes Encapsulated by Biologically Localized Embedding) 48 2.12.5 Quantum Dots 48 2.12.6 Fluorescence Microscopy for Chromosomal Changes 49 2.12.7 Nanobarcodes 49 2.12.8 Protein Biobarcode Assay 50 2.12.9 Cantilever Arrays 50 2.12.10 DNA-Protein and Nanoparticles Conjugates 51 2.12.11 Resonance Light Scattering Technology 52 2.12.12 Method of Colorimetric DNA Detection 52 2.12.13 Upcoming Phosphor Technology Based on Nanoparticles 53 2.13 Clinical Uses of Nanotechnology 53 2.13.1 Application of Nanocrystals in Immunohistochemistry 54 2.13.2 Detection of Illness Biomarkers 54 2.13.3 Disease Gene Detection 54 2.13.4 Detection of Microorganisms 55 2.13.5 Dental Nanotechnology 55 2.14 Nanofilm Applications 56 2.15 Nanomedicine Implementation 57 2.16 Future Prospects 58 2.17 Conclusion 58 References 59 3 Application of Nanotechnology in Clinical Research: Present and Future Prospects 75 Mansi Sharma, Pragati Chauhan, Rekha Sharma and Dinesh Kumar 3.1 Introduction 76 3.2 Scope of Nanotechnology in Clinical Research 77 3.3 Classification 78 3.3.1 Nanomaterials 78 3.3.1.1 Nanocrystal 80 3.3.1.2 Nanostructures 81 3.3.2 Nanodevices 89 3.4 Applications of Nanotechnology 91 3.4.1 Drug Delivery 93 3.4.2 Cancer Treatment 93 3.4.3 Gene Therapy 95 3.4.4 Tissue Engineering 95 3.4.5 Wound Treatment 96 3.4.6 Visualization 96 3.4.7 Tuberculosis Treatment 97 3.4.8 In Ophthalmology 97 3.4.9 Neurodegenerative Treatment 97 3.4.10 Diabetes Treatment 98 3.4.11 Protein Detection 98 3.4.12 In Surgery 99 3.4.13 Antibiotic Resistance 99 3.4.14 Immune Response 99 3.4.15 Operative Dentistry 101 3.4.16 Diagnostic Techniques 102 3.5 Conclusion 103 Acknowledgment 103 References 104 Part 2: Synthesis, Characterization and Applications of Nanomaterials 115 4 Fermentation Process Versus Nanotechnology 117 Nabya Nehal, Anushka Mathur, Modhumita Ganguli and Priyanka Singh 4.1 Overview of Microbial Technology 118 4.1.1 Biological Methodologies for Extraction and Purification of Biomolecules 118 4.1.2 Recent Advancements in Bioprocess Technology 119 4.1.2.1 Genetic Engineering and Random Mutagenesis 120 4.1.2.2 Immobilization Techniques 120 4.2 Nanotechnology 123 4.2.1 Classification of Nanostructures 125 4.2.1.1 Organic Nanocarriers 126 4.2.1.2 Inorganic Nanocarriers 127 4.2.2 Self-Assembly 128 4.2.3 Methodology for Synthesis of Nanoparticles 129 4.3 Biogenic Sources 131 4.3.1 From Bacteria 131 4.3.2 Filamentous Fungi 133 4.3.3 Plants 135 4.3.4 Microalgae 135 4.4 The Extent of Biogenic Nanoparticles in Industrial Sectors 139 4.4.1 Biomedical and Pharmaceutical Sectors 143 4.4.2 Environmental Remediation 146 4.4.3 Food Sectors 148 References 158 5 Application of Geno-Sensors and Nanoparticles in Gene Therapy: A New Avenue for Gene Delivery 177 Sharmili Roy, Monalisha Ghosh Dastidar, Vivek Sharma, Beom Soo Kim and Rajiv Chandra Rajak 5.1 Introduction 178 5.2 Inorganic Nanomaterials and Their Application in Gene Delivery 179 5.2.1 Magnetic Nanoparticles 180 5.2.2 Quantum Dots 181 5.2.3 Gold, Silver, and Platinum Nanoparticles 182 5.2.4 Graphene-Based Nanoparticles 186 5.3 Carbon-Based Nanotubes and Their Applications in Gene Delivery 187 5.4 Polymer-Based Nanomaterials and Their Applications in Gene Delivery 188 5.5 Protein, Lipid, and Peptide-Based Nanomaterials and Their Advantages for Gene Delivery 192 5.6 Conclusion: Challenges and Outlook 194 References 196 6 Flexuous Plant Viruses as Nanomaterials for Biomedical Applications 205 De Swarnalok 6.1 Introduction 205 6.2 Plant Virus Particle Structures 207 6.2.1 Viruses With Icosahedral Symmetry 207 6.2.2 Viruses with Helical Symmetry 208 6.2.2.1 Rigid Rod-Like Viruses 208 6.2.2.2 Flexuous Filament-Like Viruses 209 6.3 Virus Nanoparticles and Virus-Like Particles 209 6.3.1 VNPs 209 6.3.2 VLPs 210 6.4 Production Platforms for VNPs and VLPs 210 6.4.1 VNPs/VLPs in Plants 211 6.4.2 VLPs via In Vitro Assembly 212 6.5 Functionalization of Viruses 212 6.5.1 Genetic Engineering 213 6.5.2 Chemical Conjugation 213 6.5.3 Other Functionalization Strategies 214 6.6 Uses of Flexuous Plant Viruses in Medicine 214 6.6.1 Vaccination and Immunotherapy 214 6.6.2 3D Tissue Engineering 215 6.6.3 Drug Delivery and Targeting 215 6.6.4 Bioimaging 216 6.6.5 Biosensing 217 6.7 Conclusions 217 References 218 7 Role of Plants in Nanoparticle Synthesis 225 Tanya Kapoor, Md Azizur Rahman, Shally Pandit and Anand Prakash 7.1 Introduction 225 7.2 Characterization of Nanoparticles 227 7.3 Classification of Nanoparticles 227 7.4 Biochemical Synthesis of Nanoparticles 228 7.5 Green Synthesis Approach for NPs 232 7.6 Plants’ Role in the Green Synthesis of NPs 232 7.7 Green Synthesis Using Enzymes 234 7.8 Nanoparticles Role in Photosynthesis 235 7.9 Applications of Green Synthesis NPs 235 7.10 Conclusion 237 References 237 8 Static DNA Nanostructures and Their Applications 245 Debalina Bhattacharya 8.1 Introduction 245 8.1.1 DNA Structure 245 8.1.2 Types of DNA Structures 247 8.2 Static DNA Nanostructures 247 8.2.1 DNA Tile Assembly 248 8.2.2 DNA Origami and Brick Assembly 251 8.3 DNA Origami Nanostructure 251 8.4 DNA Polyhedra 252 8.5 DNA-Functionalized Nanoparticles 253 8.6 Stability in Biological Fluid and Cellular Uptake of DNA-NSs and DNA-NPs 254 8.7 Application 255 8.7.1 DNA Nanostructures as Biosensors 255 8.7.2 DNA in Therapeutics 257 8.7.3 Photo Thermal Therapy and Photo Dynamic Therapy 258 8.7.4 DNA-Based Enzyme Reactors 259 8.7.5 DNA-Based Gene Delivery 260 8.7.6 DNA Scaffolds for Nanophotonics 261 8.7.7 Conclusion 261 References 262 9 Protein-Based Nanostructures 269 Ditipriya Hazra and Amlan Roychowdhury 9.1 Introduction 269 9.2 Peptide-Based Nanoparticle 270 9.3 Protein-Based Nanostructure 271 9.3.1 Oligomerization of Protein 272 9.3.2 Repeat Domain Proteins 273 9.3.3 Protein-Based 2D and 3D Lattice Assembly of Nanoparticles 274 9.3.4 Covalently Assembled Single Chain-Based Nanostructure 274 9.4 Application of Protein-Based Nanostructures in Therapeutics 275 9.4.1 Protein Nanoparticle for Drug Delivery 275 9.4.2 Nanoparticle-Based Vaccines 275 9.4.3 Hydrogel 277 References 278 10 Nanocomposites-Based Biodegradable Polymers 285 Pragati Chauhan, Mansi Sharma, Rekha Sharma and Dinesh Kumar 10.1 Introduction 286 10.2 Nanocomposite 287 10.3 Biodegradable Polymer 288 10.4 Biopolymer 289 10.5 Nanofillers 289 10.6 Cellulose and Its Sources 289 10.7 Nanocellulose 291 10.8 Nanocellulose Composite Processing 292 10.8.1 Melt Mixing Method 293 10.8.1.1 Injection Molding Method 294 10.8.1.2 Resin Transfer Molding Method 295 10.8.1.3 Extrusion Method 296 10.8.2 Solution Casting Method 297 10.8.3 Particle Suspensions Method 299 10.8.4 In-Situ Polymerization Method 300 10.8.5 Layer-by-Layer Lamination Method 303 10.9 Nanocomposites Used as Packaging Materials 305 10.10 Future Perspective and Application 306 10.11 Conclusions 307 References 308 11 Instrumentation for the Analysis and Characterization of Nanomaterials 317 Andrea Komesu, Johnatt Oliveira, Débora Kono Taketa Moreira, Yvan Jesus Olortiga Asencios, João Moreira Neto and Luiza Helena da Silva Martins 11.1 Introduction 318 11.2 Scanning Electron Microscopy [SEM] 319 11.3 Energy Dispersive X-Ray Analysis [EDX] 320 11.4 Atomic Force Microscopy [AFM] 322 11.5 Transmission Electron Microscopy [TEM] 323 11.6 Scanning Tunneling Microscopy [STM] 325 11.7 Ultraviolet-Visible Spectroscopy 327 11.8 Raman Spectroscopy 329 11.9 Fourier Transform Infrared Spectroscopy 330 11.10 X-Ray Diffraction [XRD] 332 11.11 X-Ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy [XPS] 333 11.12 Zeta Potential 335 11.13 Conclusions 336 References 337 12 Application of Microbial Nanoparticles 343 Monika Yadav, Sneha Upreti and Priyanka Singh 12.1 Introduction 344 12.2 Categorization of Nanoparticles 346 12.2.1 Polymeric Nanoparticles 346 12.2.1.1 Polymeric Micelles 346 12.2.1.2 Nanosphere 347 12.2.1.3 Nanocapsules 347 12.2.1.4 Polymerosome 347 12.2.1.5 Nanogels 348 12.2.1.6 Dendrimers 348 12.2.1.7 Nanocomplex 349 12.2.2 Lipid-Based Nanoparticles 349 12.2.2.1 Liposomes 349 12.2.2.2 Solid Lipid Nanoparticles 349 12.2.2.3 Lipoplexes 349 12.2.3 Inorganic Nanoparticles 350 12.2.3.1 Gold Nanoparticles 350 12.2.3.2 Magnetic Nanoparticles 350 12.2.3.3 Silica Nanoparticles 351 12.2.3.4 Quantum Dots 351 12.2.3.5 Nanocarbons 351 12.2.4 Bioinspired Nanoparticles 352 12.2.4.1 Exosomes 352 12.2.4.2 Protein Nanoparticles 352 12.2.4.3 DNA Nanostructures 352 12.2.5 Hybrid Nanoparticles 353 12.2.5.1 Cell Membrane-Coated Nanoparticles 353 12.2.5.2 Organic-Inorganic Nanocomposites 353 12.2.5.3 Lipid-Polymer Nanoparticles (LPNs) 354 12.3 Microbial-Mediated Synthesis of Nanoparticles for Therapeutic and Biomedical Applications 354 12.3.1 Bacteria 355 12.3.2 Molds and Yeast 356 12.3.3 Microalgae 357 12.4 Agriculture and Food Nanotechnology 358 12.4.1 Food Nanotechnology 359 12.4.1.1 Food Processing 359 12.4.1.2 Food Packaging 359 12.4.2 Agriculture Nanotechnology 360 12.4.3 Enzyme Nanotechnology 360 12.5 Role of Nanoparticles in the Medical Field 361 12.5.1 Nanoparticles Drug Delivery Applications 362 12.5.1.1 Drug Loading 362 12.5.1.2 Covalent Bonding (Prodrug) 362 12.5.1.3 Noncovalent Encapsulation 363 12.6 Application of Microbial Nanoparticles 363 12.6.1 Application of NPs in Food Industry 364 12.6.2 Applications of Nanoparticles in the Pharmaceuticals Industry 368 12.6.2.1 Biopolymeric Nanoparticles in Detection, Diagnosis and Imaging 369 12.6.2.2 In Drug Liberation 370 12.6.2.3 In Magnetic Partition and Recognition 372 12.6.3 Application of Nanoparticles in Cosmetic Sector 373 12.6.4 Nanoparticles in Bioremediation 375 12.6.4.1 Dendrimers in the Process of Bioremediation 376 12.6.4.2 Carbon Nanoparticles in Bioremediation 377 12.6.4.3 Biogenic Uraninite NMs in Bioremediation 378 12.7 Conclusion 378 References 379 13 Bio-Nanostructures: Applications and Perspectives 393 Tanya Kapoor, Shally Pandit and Anand Prakash 13.1 Introduction 393 13.2 Classification of Nanostructures 394 13.2.1 Self-Assembled Nanostructures 394 13.2.2 Carbon-Based Nanostructures 394 13.2.3 Nanocellulose Nanostructures 395 13.2.4 Graphene Oxide-Based Nanostructures 395 13.2.5 Silica-Based Nanostructures 396 13.3 Characterization Method of Nanostructures 396 13.4 Applications of Bio-Nanoparticles 401 13.5 Conclusion 404 References 405 Part 3: Application of Nanomaterials in Clinical Research 411 14 Nanomaterials for Tissue Grafting 413 Paramjeet Singh, Atanu Kotal and Avik Acharya Chowdhury 14.1 Introduction 414 14.2 Tissue Engineering 415 14.2.1 Bone Tissue Engineering 416 14.2.2 Cartilage Tissue Engineering 418 14.2.3 Tissue Grafting 420 14.3 What is Nanotechnology? 422 14.4 Nanomaterials and Nanoparticles 423 14.4.1 Nanomaterials 423 14.4.1.1 Organic Nanomaterials 423 14.4.1.2 Inorganic Nanomaterials 424 14.4.1.3 Composite Nanomaterials 424 14.4.2 Nanoparticles 425 14.4.2.1 Nanoparticles as Bioactive Agents 431 14.4.2.2 Scaffolds and Nanoparticles 431 14.5 Future Prospects 433 14.6 Conclusion 435 References 436 15 Nanoparticles for Cancer Therapy 441 Kaliyaperumal Rekha, Nalok Dutta, Muthu Thiruvengadam, Mohammad Ali Shariati, Muhammad Usman Khan, Muhammad Usman, Mihir Bhatta, Kunal Ghosh, Shaheer Arif and Muhammad Naeem 15.1 Introduction 442 15.2 Nanoparticles as Drug Delivery in Cancer Treatment 442 15.3 Drug Nanocarriers Classification 444 15.4 Organic Nanocarriers 444 15.4.1 Liposomes 444 15.4.2 Solid Lipid Nanoparticles 445 15.4.3 Polymer Nanoparticles 446 15.4.4 Polymer Micelles 446 15.4.5 Dendrimers 446 15.4.6 Polymersomes 447 15.4.7 Hydrogel Nanoparticles 447 15.4.8 Mineral Nanoparticles 448 15.5 Tumor Targeting by Nanoparticles 448 15.6 Utilization of Nanoparticles in Imaging and Treatment for Cancer 449 15.7 Use of Nanoparticles in the Diagnosis and Treatment of Breast Cancer 450 15.8 The Use of Nanoparticles in the Diagnosis and Treatment of Brain Cancer 451 15.9 Conclusion 452 References 452 16 Nanoantibiotics 459 Rituparna Saha and Mainak Mukhopadhyay 16.1 Introduction 460 16.2 Nanoantibiotics—A Potent Alternative to Antibiotics? 461 16.3 Developmental Strategy of Nanoantibiotics Over Antibiotics 462 16.4 Mechanism of Action of Nanoantibiotics 463 16.5 Common Functions of Nanoantibiotics 463 16.6 Nanomaterials—A Suitable Source of Nanoantibiotics 464 16.7 Types of Nanoantibiotics 465 16.7.1 Through Direct Formulations 465 16.7.1.1 Metal-Based Nanoparticles 465 16.7.1.2 Carbon-Based Nanomaterials 466 16.7.1.3 Nanoemulsions 466 16.7.1.4 Nanocomposites 466 16.7.2 Through Indirect Formulations 467 16.7.2.1 Polymers 467 16.7.2.2 Dendrimers 467 16.7.2.3 Hydrogels 468 16.7.2.4 Liposomes 468 16.8 Advantages of Nanoantibiotics 468 16.9 Disadvantages of Nanoantibiotics 469 16.10 Treatment of Multidrug-Resistant Bacteria with Nanoantibiotics 469 16.11 Treatment of Methicillin-Resistant Staphylococcus aureus with Nanoantibiotics 470 16.12 Development of Targeted Therapy Using Nanoantibiotics 470 16.13 Future Prospects of Nanoantibiotics 471 16.14 Conclusion 471 References 472 17 Theranostic Nanomaterials and Its Use in Biomedicine 479 Arka Mukhopadhyay 17.1 Introduction 480 17.2 Biomedical Payloads 482 17.2.1 Imaging 482 17.2.1.1 Optical Imaging 482 17.2.1.2 Magnetic Resonance Imaging 486 17.2.1.3 Computed Tomography 486 17.2.1.4 Positron Emission Tomography 486 17.2.1.5 Photo Acoustic Tomography 486 17.2.1.6 Ultrasound 488 17.2.1.7 Multimodal Image Therapy 488 17.2.2 Photodynamic Therapy 488 17.2.3 Targeted Gene Therapy 489 17.2.4 Photothermal Therapy 489 17.3 Carrier 490 17.3.1 Polymers 491 17.3.2 Lipids 491 17.3.3 Dendrimers 491 17.3.4 Inorganic Nanocarriers 492 17.4 Theranostic Nanomaterials and Applications 492 17.4.1 Magnetic Nanoparticles 492 17.4.2 Quantum Dots 493 17.4.3 Anisotropic Nanoparticles 494 17.4.4 Upconverting Nanoparticles 494 17.4.5 Carbon Nanotubes 495 17.4.6 Dendrimers 496 17.4.7 Other Nanomaterials 496 17.4.7.1 Gold (Au) Nanoparticles (GNPs) 496 17.4.7.2 Conjugated Polymers 498 17.5 Pharmacokinetics and Pharmacodynamics 499 17.6 Conclusions: Challenges and Future Perspectives 501 References 503 Appendix 509 Index 511

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe unique nanoscale properties of renewable biomaterials present valuable opportunities in the field of nanoscience and technology. Lignocellulosic biomass is an important industrial resource which can be used for the production of highly efficient and environmentally sustainable nanomaterials.Table of ContentsChapter 1 - A Fundamental Review of the Relationships between Nanotechnology and Lignocellulosic Biomass Theodore H. Wegner and E. Philip Jones 1.1 Introduction 1.2 Use of Lignocellulosic-based Materials 1.3 Green Chemistry and Green Engineering 1.4 Nanotechnology 1.5 Nanotechnology-enabled Product Possibilities 1.6 Wood Nanodimensional Structure and Composition 1.7 Nanomanufacturing 1.8 Nanotechnology Health and Safety Issues 1.9 Instrumentation, Metrology, and Standards for Nanotechnology 1.10 A Nanotechnology Agenda for the Forest Products Industry 1.11 Forest Products Industry Technology Priorities 1.12 Nanotechnology Priority Areas to Meet the Needs of the Forest Products Industry 1.13 Summary References 2 Biogenesis of Cellulose Nanofibrils by a Biological Nanomachine Candace H. Haigler and Alison W. Roberts 2.1 Introduction 2.2 Background 2.3 CesA Protein is a Major Component of the Plant CSC 2.4 The Functional Operation of the CSC 2.5 Phylogenetic Analysis 2.5.1 Possible Functional Diversification of CS Proteins 2.6 Conclusion References 3 Tools for the Characterization of Biomass at the Nanometer Scale James F. Beecher, Christopher G. Hunt and J.Y. Zhu 3.1 Introduction 3.2 Water in Biomass 3.3 Measurement of Specific Biomass Properties 3.4 Microscopy and Spectroscopy 3.5 Summary References 4 Tools to Probe Nanoscale Surface Phenomena in Cellulose Thin Films: Applications in the Area of Adsorption and Friction Junlong Song, Yan Li, Juan P. Hinestroza and Orlando J. Rojas 4.1 Introduction 4.2 Polyampholytes Applications in Fiber Modification 4.3 Cellulose Thin Films 4.4 Friction Phenomena in Cellulose Systems 4.5 Lubrication 4.6 Boundary Layer Lubrication 4.7 Techniques to Study Adsorption and Friction Phenomena 4.8 Surface Plasmon Resonance (SPR) 4.9 Quartz Crystal Microbalance with Dissipation (QCM) 4.10 Application of SPR and QCM to Probe Adsorbed Films 4.11 Lateral Force Microscopy 4.12 Summary Acknowledgements References 5 Polyelectrolyte Multilayers for Fibre Engineering Rikard Lingström, Erik Johansson and Lars Wågberg 5.1 Background 5.2 The Formation of PEM on Wood Fibres 5.3 Formation of PEM with Different Polyelectrolytes and the Properties of the Layers Formed 5.4 Formation of PEM on Fibres 5.5 Influence of PEM on Properties of Fibre Networks 5.6 Influence of PEM on Adhesion Between Surfaces 5.7 Concluding Remarks Acknowledgements References 6 Hemicelluloses at Interfaces: Some Aspects of the Interactions Tekla Tammelin, Arja Paananen and Monika Österberg 6.1 Overview 6.2 Introduction 6.3 Theoretical Basis for Interpreting QCM-D and AFM Data 6.4 Experimental 6.5 Results 6.6 Discussion 6.7 Conclusions Acknowledgements References 7 Lignin: Functional Biomaterial with Potential in Surface Chemistry and Nanoscience Shannon M. Notley and Magnus Norgren 7.1 Introduction 7.2 Lignin Synthesis and Structural Aspects 7.3 Isolation of Lignin from Wood, Pulp and Pulping Liquors 7.4 Solution Properties of Kraft Lignin 7.5 Surface Chemistry of Solid State Lignin 7.6 Lignin: Current and Future Uses 7.7 Concluding Remarks References 8 Cellulose and Chitin as Nanoscopic Biomaterials Jacob D. Goodrich, Deepanjan Bhattacharya and William T. Winter 8.1 Overview 8.2 Introduction 8.3 Preparation and Microscopic Characterization of Cellulose and Chitin Nanoparticles 8.4 NMR Characterization of Cellulose and Chitin Nanoparticles 8.5 Chemical Modification of Cellulose and Chitin Nanoparticles 8.6 Nanocomposite Properties 8.7 Conclusions Acknowledgements References 9 Bacterial Cellulose and its Polymeric Nanocomposites Marie-Pierre G. Laborie 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Bacterial Cellulose: Biosynthesis and Basic Physical and Mechanical Properties 9.3 BC Nanocomposites by in situ Polymerization 9.4 BC Nanocomposites by Polymer Impregnation and Solution Casting 9.5 BC Nanocomposites via Biomimetic Approaches 9.6 BC/Polymer Nanocomposites Based on Bacterial Cellulose Nanocrystals 9.7 Conclusions and Prospects References 10 Cellulose Nanocrystals in Polymer Matrices John Simonsen and Youssef Habibi 10.1 Introduction 10.2 Background on CNXL Material Science 10.3 Polymer Nanocomposite Systems 10.4 Thermal Properties 10.5 Mechanical Properties of CNXL 10.6 Transport Properties References 11 Development and Application of Naturally Renewable Scaffold Materials for Bone Tissue Engineering Seth D. McCullen, Ariel D. Hanson, Lucian A. Lucia and Elizabeth G. Loboa 11.1 Introduction 11.2 Natural Renewable Materials for Bone Tissue Engineering 11.3 Bone Background 11.4 Conclusions and Future Directions References 12 Template Synthesis of Nanostructured Metals Using Cellulose Nanocrystal Yongsoon Shin and Gregory J. Exarhos 12.1 Overview 12.2 Introduction 12.3 Metal Oxide and Metal Carbides 12.4 Metal Nanoparticles on CNXL 12.5 Conclusion Acknowledgements References

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis work assembles chapters from contributors across our planet to document technologies, applications, missions, licensing requirements, and lessons learned by individuals and organizations that have participated in the nanosatellite revolution. This book is not intended as a ""how to"" or as a university reference to design, build, and fly nanosatellites but as a deeper-level reference on what has and hasn't worked in previous nanosatellite programs. Many chapters act as a historical reference for particular programs.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis volume explores the chemical basis of lithography, with the goal of deconstructing lithography into its essential chemical principles and to situate its various aspects in specific fields of chemistry. It is organized in five parts, comprising: lithographic process chemistry, lithographic materials chemistry, lithographic photo- and radiation chemistry, chemistry of lithographic imaging mechanisms, and lithographic process-induced chemistry.With the successful implementation of EUV lithography in manufacturing at the 10-nm and 7-nm technology nodes, patterning challenges have shifted from resolution to mostly noise and sensitivity. This is a regime where the resist suffers from increased stochastic variation and the attendant effects of shot noise—a consequence of the discrete nature of photons, which, at very low number per exposure pixel, show increased variability in the response of the resist relative to its mean. Noise in this instance is the natural variation in lithographic pattern placement, shape, and size. It causes line edge roughness, line width variation, and stochastic defects.Ultimately, these patterning issues have their origin in the materials used in lithography. Chemistry underpins the essence, functions, and properties of these materials. We therefore examine in the second volume of the present edition the role of stochastics in EUV lithography in far greater detail than we did in the first edition. Equally significant, the book develops a chemistry and lithography interaction matrix, which is used as a device to explore how various aspects and practices of photolithography (or optical lithography), electron-beam lithography, ion-beam lithography, EUV lithography, imprint lithography, directed self-assembly lithography, and proximal probe lithography derive from established chemical principles and phenomena.Table of Contents Lithographic Process Chemistry Lithographic Materials Chemistry Lithographic Photochemistry and Radiation Chemistry Chemistry of Lithographic Imaging Mechanisms Lithographic-Process-Induced Chemistry

Read more less

Book SynopsisGlobal market sizes for nanocoatings and coatings are expected to be $14.3 billion and $123 billion, respectively, by the year 2019. Coatings can be classified according to their applications or method of preparation or type of property imparted to the product. They can be either solvent based or water based and may be comprised of polymers or inorganic materials. Nanocoatings with thicknesses less than 100 nm can offer superior performance properties compared with conventional coatings. Nanotuff was one of the first commercial nanocoatings it contained nanosized particles suspended in an epoxy matrix. Coatings can have specific purposes such as corrosion resistance, antiabrasive resistance, scratch resistance, chemical resistance, and stain resistance to the objects they are applied on. This book contains some new theory in the areas of solubility parameter estimates using isentropic volume expansivity, compressibility, and surface tension effects during coating flows. This volume contains separate chapters on introduction, applications, and stability.

Read more less

Book SynopsisNuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) and Electron Spin Resonance (ESR) spectroscopies are well-known characterization techniques that reveal the molecular details of a sample non-invasively. The authors discuss how NMR can provide useful information on the microstructure of carbon and its surface properties and explain how C-MEMS/C-NEMS technology can be explored for building improved NMR microdevices. The authors highlight the manipulation of fluids and particles by dielectrophoresis and the use of carbon electrodes for dielectrophoresis in Lab-on-a-Chip. The use of these electrodes in sample preparation through electrical polarization of a sample for identification, manipulation, and lysis of bioparticles is also discussed and they introduce a new generation of neural prosthetics based on glassy carbon micromachined electrode arrays. The tuning of the electrical, electrochemical and mechanical properties of these patternable electrodes for applications in bio-electrical signal recording and stimulation, and results from in-vivo testing of these glassy carbon microelectrode arrays is reported, demonstrating a quantifiable superior performance compared to metal electrodes.

Read more less

Book SynopsisThere are physical and chemical methods of synthesis of nanomaterials. But due to the damage caused by these methods to the environment there is a pressing need of green nanotechnology, which is a clean and eco-friendly technology for the development of nanomaterials. The present book includes green synthesis of nanoparticles by algae, diatoms and plants. The mechanism behind the synthesis of nanoparticles will also be discussed. The book would be a valuable resource for students, researchers and teachers of biology, chemistry, chemical technology, nanotechnology, microbial technology and those who are interested in green nanotechnology.Table of Contents1: Green technology for Nanoparticles on Biomedical Application 2: Multiple Strategic Approaches for Green Synthesis and Application of Silver and Gold Nanoparticles 3: Role of Natural Products in Green Synthesis of Nanoparticles 4: Biological Synthesis of Nanoparticles Using Algae 5: Synthesis of Metallic Nanoparticles by Diatoms – Prospect and Applications 6: Green Synthesis of Silver and Gold Nanoparticles Using Plant Extracts 7: Rolls and Sandwiches: Cages and Barrels 8: Understanding the Involved Mechanisms in Plant Mediated Synthesis of Nanoparticles 9: Synthesis of Nanostructured Calcite Particles In Coccolithophores, Unicellular Algae 10: Phytotoxic Effects of Metal Nanoparticles in Plants 11: Biomineralization, Properties and Applications of Bacterial Magnetosomes 12: Interactions Between Plant-Produced Nanoparticles And Antibiotics As a Way of Coping with Bacterial Resistance 13: Nanostructured particles from coccolithophores – an undiscovered resource for applications 14: Applications of Nanoparticles Synthesized by Yeasts:Green and Eco-friendly Method

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe major topical and societal issues of energy transition and environmental conservation have benefited from the contribution of nanotechnologies and nanomaterials. Nanomaterials, including carbon-based newcomers, have helped to improve in particular the performance of energy storage and conversion devices. Some of these nanomaterials, including fullerenes, carbon nanotubes, nanodiamonds and carbon dots, were discovered well before the 2000s. Others are more recent, including graphene (the leading material of the 21st century) as well as many mineral materials developed at the nano scale: atomic clusters, metal or semiconductor nanoparticles, two-dimensional inorganic materials, metal-organic frameworks (MOF) and luminescent quantum dots. All of these are involved in the realization of devices for energy purposes. Nanotechnology and Nanomaterials for Energy provides a critical analysis of the latest work in the fields of batteries, photovoltaics, fuel cells and catalysis as well as lighting, with the advent of light-emitting diodes.Table of ContentsIntroduction ix Part 1 Nanomaterials and Nanotechnologies 1 Chapter 1 Carbon-based Nanomaterials 3 1.1 Fullerenes 4 1.1.1 Properties of fullerenes 5 1.2 Carbon nanodiamonds 11 1.2.1 Principal techniques used in creating nanodiamonds 11 1.2.2 Key properties of nanodiamonds 13 1.3 Carbon dots or carbon quantum dots 16 1.3.1 CQD production methods 16 1.3.2 Fluorescence properties of CQDs 18 1.3.3 CQD applications 21 1.4 Carbon nanotubes 21 1.4.1 Chirality of carbon nanotubes 24 1.4.2 Mechanistic models of CNT growth 26 1.4.3 CNT arrays aligned horizontally or perpendicularly to a planar substrate 31 1.4.4 Key properties and applications of CNTs 34 1.4.5 Conclusion 37 1.5 Graphene 37 1.5.1 Electrical properties of exfoliated graphene 38 1.5.2 Graphene production techniques 41 1.5.3 Applications of graphene and graphene derivatives 51 1.5.4 Conclusion 62 1.6 Graphene quantum dots 63 1.6.1 GQD production methods 63 1.6.2 Properties and applications of GQDs 66 1.6.3 Graphdiyne: a new alternative to graphene 72 1.7 Conclusions and perspectives of carbon-based nanomaterials 77 Chapter 2 Inorganic Nanomaterials 79 2.1 Metallic nanoparticles 80 2.1.1 Gold nanoparticles (Au NPs) 81 2.1.2 Core-shell type bimetallic nanoparticles 83 2.2 Metal nanoclusters 87 2.2.1 Production methods for gold nanoclusters 88 2.2.2 Structure and stability criteria of Au NC 90 2.2.3 Luminescence properties of Au NCs 91 2.2.4 Applications using the luminescent properties of Au NCs 95 2.2.5 Conclusion 97 2.3 Semiconductor quantum dots 97 2.3.1 Development of colloidal QDs 98 2.4 Two-dimensional inorganic lamellar nanosheets 103 2.4.1 Transition metal dichalcogenides 104 2.4.2 Conclusion 113 2.5 Hybrid metal-organic frameworks 113 2.5.1 MOF production 113 2.5.2 Potential applications of MOFs 119 2.5.3 Conclusions 128 2.6 Conclusions on inorganic nanomaterials 129 Part 2 Nanotechnology and Nanomaterials for Energy 131 Chapter 3 Energy Storage 133 3.1 Worldwide energy use 133 3.2 Energy storage systems 135 3.2.1 Non-chemical/electrochemical storage 135 3.2.2 Chemical and electrochemical storage systems 136 3.2.3 Rechargeable batteries 139 3.2.4 Supercapacitors 184 3.2.5 Pseudocapacitors 189 3.3 Conclusions on energy storage 193 Chapter 4 Energy Conversion 195 4.1 Photovoltaics 196 4.1.1 General principles of the photovoltaic process 197 4.1.2 Photovoltaic technologies 200 4.2 Electroluminescence, lighting and display 225 4.2.1 Inorganic light-emitting diodes 226 4.2.2 Organic light-emitting diodes 233 4.2.3 QDot light-emitting diodes 244 4.3 Conclusions on energy conversion 249 Chapter 5 Electro- and Photocatalysis 251 5.1 Water splitting 252 5.2 Electrolysis techniques 253 5.3 HER and OER processes in water splitting 257 5.3.1 HER in an acidic medium 257 5.3.2 HER in alkaline media 274 5.3.3 Conclusions on HER reactions 279 5.3.4 Catalysts for oxygen evolution reaction 279 5.4 Photoelectrochemical water splitting 294 5.4.1 Heterogeneous photocatalysts 297 5.4.2 Photocatalytic systems with two SC heterojunctions 298 5.4.3 Conclusions 302 5.5 Fuel cells 302 5.5.1 Operating principle of a fuel cell 303 5.5.2 Choice of O 2 reduction catalysts 306 5.5.3 Conclusions on electrocatalysis and photocatalysis 310 Conclusion 313 References 317 Index 359

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe science of nanotechnology, the manipulation, design and engineering of devices at the atomic and molecular scale, is starting to be applied to many disciplines including aspects of agriculture and crop science. This book opens with a brief history of nanotechnology in agriculture. Applications are then examined in detail, including nanopesticides, nanosensors, nanofertilizers, and nanoherbicides. Topics covered include; the biosynthesis of nanoparticles (through microbes, plants and other biotic agents); the ecological consequences of their delivery into the environment (examining effects and toxicity on soil, soil biota, and plants); safety issues; an overview of the global market for nanotechnology products, and the regulation of nanotechnology in agriculture. The book concludes with speculations on what the future holds for the technology. The book has been written by an international group of researchers and experts from over 12 countries with experience across a wide range of issues relating to the industry. This book will be of use to a wide range of researchers and professional scientists in the agricultural sector, academia and industry, including microbiologists, chemical engineers, geneticists, plant scientists and biochemists.Table of Contents1: Rewinding the History of Agriculture and Emergence of Nanotechnology in Agriculture 2: Use of Nanomaterials in Agriculture: Potential Benefits and Challenges 3: Green Nanotechnology for Enhanced Productivity in Agriculture 4: Nanonutrient from Fungal Protein: Future Prospects on Crop Production 5: Multifarious Applications of Nanotechnology for Enhanced Productivity in Agriculture 6: Different Methods of Nanoparticle Synthesis and Their Comparative Agricultural Applications 7: Nanotoxicity to Agroecosystem: Impact on Soil and Agriculture 8: Factors Affecting the Fate, Transport, Bioavailability and Toxicity of Nanoparticles in the Agroecosystem 9: Nanotechnology: Comprehensive Understanding of Interaction, Toxicity and the Fate of Biosynthesized Nanoparticles in the Agroecosystem 10: Global Market of Nanomaterials and Colloidal Formulations for Agriculture: An Overview 11: The Responsible Development of Nanoproducts – Lessons from the Past 12: Nanotechnology Application and Emergence in Agriculture 13: Positive and Negative Effects of Nanotechnology 14: Vanguard Nano(bio)sensor Technologies Fostering the Renaissance of Agriculture 15: Current Trends and Future Priorities of Nanofertilizers 16: Biosafety and Regulatory Aspects of Nanotechnology in Agriculture and Food 17: Implication of Nanotechnology for the Treatment of Water and Air Pollution 18: Role of Nanotechnology in Insect Pest Management

Read more less

Book SynopsisExamining one of the fastest growing industries in the world, Ronit Justo-Hanani compares the distinctly different approaches between both sides of the Atlantic when regulating the health, safety and environmental risks of nanotechnology and its novel properties.Looking at ongoing adjustments to existing laws, Justo-Hanani details how and why, in contrast to the United States, the European Union has adopted a far more stringent, comprehensive regulatory policy for nanotechnology safety. This illuminating book shows that despite the US’ prominence in global nanotechnology markets, the strict rules of the EU have been at the forefront of market regulations across the globe. With a full and comparative account of the politics and regulatory processes of nanotechnology safety in the EU and US, it ultimately argues that the EU’s adaptive and proactive, capacity-building strategy, is the key to strengthening its role as a global regulatory leader.This timely book will be useful to students and scholars of regulation and governance; science, technology, and innovation policy; environmental and health policy; and international law and politics. Its practical applications will also be of interest to policymakers concerned with the advancements of nanotechnology.Trade Review‘Nanotechnologies are rapidly proliferating in a wide array of industries. What kinds of risk their use may have for human health and the environment is still imbued with much uncertainty. This excellent comparative study delves into the different approaches employed in the EU and the US towards regulating nanotechnology safety and shows how the EU has succeeded in influencing international discussions towards the adoption of more precautionary regulatory approaches. The book will interest scholars and practitioners interested in the governance of emerging technologies, transatlantic competition and cooperation in the establishment of technology regulations, global regime formation, and European foreign policy.’ -- Miranda A. Schreurs, Technical University of Munich, Germany‘A carefully researched and comprehensive analysis of the European, American and global approaches to managing the risks of nanotechnology. The analysis of the EU's global impact is particularly illuminating.’ -- David Vogel, University of California, Berkeley, USTable of ContentsContents: Preface 1 Nanotechnology safety and the global economy 2 Nanosafety regulatory policies: comprehensive and limited approaches 3 Transatlantic regulatory divergence: the role of domestic politics and policy styles 4 The establishment of EU nanotechnology regulatory policy: green political actors as drivers of regional integration 5 The spread of nano-specific risk regulation: the EU’s international regulatory influence 6 Conclusions References Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisSwift ion beam analysis (IBA) of materials and their surfaces has been widely applied to many fields over the last half century, constantly evolving to meet new requirements and to take advantage of developments in particle detection and data treatment. Today, emerging fields in nanosciences introduce extreme demands to analysis methods at the nanoscale. This book addresses how analysis with swift ion beams is rising to meet such needs. Aimed at early stage researchers and established researchers wishing to understand how IBA can contribute to their analytical requirements in nanosciences, the basics of the interactions of charged particles with matter, as well as the operation of the relevant equipment, are first presented. Many recent examples from nanoscience research are then explored in which the specific analytical capabilities of IBA are emphasized, together with the place of IBA alongside the wealth of other analytical methods. Table of ContentsPreamble ix Introduction xi Chapter 1 Fundamentals of Ion-solid Interactions with a Focus on the Nanoscale 1 1.1 General considerations 1 1.1.1 Wavelengths of ions, electrons and X-rays 1 1.1.2 Penetration depths of ions, electrons and X-rays 7 1.2 Basic physical concepts 8 1.2.1 Energy loss and range of ions in matter 8 1.2.2 Energy straggling 11 1.2.3 Elastic scattering 13 1.3 Channeling, shadowing and blocking 20 1.3.1 Channeling 20 1.3.2 Shadowing 23 1.3.3 Blocking 30 1.4 1D layers: limits to depth resolution 34 1.5 2D and 3D objects: aspects of lateral resolution 38 1.5.1 Beam focusing 38 1.5.2 Simulation of nanostructures 43 Chapter 2 Instruments and Methods 45 2.1 Instruments 45 2.1.1 Accelerators 45 2.1.2 Detectors and data acquisition 48 2.1.3 Analysis chambers 54 2.2 Methods 55 2.2.1 RBS and MEIS 56 2.2.2 ERDA 62 2.2.3 Narrow resonance profiling 64 Chapter 3 Applications 69 3.1 Example of resonances/light element profiling 69 3.1.1 Introduction 69 3.1.2 Channeling study of the SiO2/Si interface 70 3.1.3 Narrow resonance profiling and stable isotopic tracing studies of the oxidation of silicon 73 3.1.4 Thermal oxidation of silicon carbide 76 3.1.5 Diffusion and reaction of CO in thermal SiO2: transport, exchange and SiC nanocrystal growth 81 3.2 Quantitative analysis/heavy element profiling 86 3.2.1 RBS quantitative analysis of quantum dots and quantum wells 86 3.2.2 CMOS transistors and the race for miniaturization 114 3.3 Examples of HR-ERD analysis 131 3.3.1 Introduction 131 3.3.2 HRBS/HR-ERD comparison 132 3.3.3 HR-ERD profiles of Al2O3/TiO2 nanolaminates 133 3.4 Channeling/defect profiling 135 3.4.1 Introduction 135 3.4.2 Arsenic implant in ultra-shallow-junctions 135 3.5 Blocking/strain profiling 147 3.5.1 Introduction 147 3.5.2 GaN/AlN system 151 3.5.3 Si/Ge system 180 3.6 3D MEIS/real space structural analysis 195 3.6.1 Electrostatic analyzer method 196 3.6.2 Time-of-flight method 199 Chapter 4 The Place of NanoIBA in the Characterization Forest 203 4.1 Introduction 203 4.2 Scope of physical and chemical characterization 203 4.2.1 Targeted information by material characterization 204 4.2.2 Basic principle and instrumentation of material characterization 205 4.3 Ion-based characterization techniques overview 209 4.4 Ion-mass-spectroscopy-based characterization techniques versus IBA 211 4.4.1 Secondary ion mass spectrometry 211 4.4.2 Atom probe tomography 217 4.5 Other characterization techniques versus IBA 219 4.5.1 X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy 220 4.5.2 X-ray diffraction 222 4.5.3 X-ray absorption fine structure 223 4.5.4 Analytical electron microscopy 223 4.6 Emerging ion-beam-based techniques 225 4.6.1 Low energy ion scattering 226 4.6.2 Iono-luminescence 226 4.6.3 Scanning helium ion microscopy 226 4.6.4 Grazing incidence fast atoms diffraction 228 List of Acronyms 231 Bibliography 237 Index 257

Read more less

Book SynopsisTexturing surfaces at micro- and/or nano-scales modifies the interactions of liquids and solids. This book is a summary of the state of the art concerning the development and use of micro/nano-technologies for the design of synthetic liquid repellent surfaces with a particular focus on super-omniphobic materials. It proposes a comprehensive understanding of the physical mechanisms involved in the wetting of these surfaces and reviews emerging applications in various fields such as energy harvesting and biology, as well as highlighting the current limitations and challenges which are yet to be overcome.Table of Contents1. Nanotechnologies for Synthetic Super 
Non-wetting Surfaces. 2. Wetting on Heterogeneous Surfaces. 3. Engineering Super Non-wetting Materials. 4. Fabrication of Synthetic Super
Non-wetting Surfaces. 5. Characterization Techniques for Super 
Non-wetting Surfaces. 6. Emerging Applications.

Read more less